manualshive.com logo in svg

Mitel 6800 Series, Administrator'S Manual

Share
Download
Mitel 6800 Series Administrator'S Manual Download Page 722

Mitel 6800 Series SIP Phone Release 4.2.0 SP2 Administrator Guide

9-10

WATCHDOG TASK FEATURE

The IP Phones include a troubleshooting feature called the “

WatchDog

” that monitors the status 

of the phone’s tasks and provides the ability to get stack traces from the last time the phone 
failed. When the phone detects a failure (i.e. a crash), it automatically reboots. You can view a 
WatchDog crash file using the Mitel Web UI at the path, 

Advanced Settings->Troubleshooting

. 

You can enable/disable the WatchDog task using the configuration files or the Mitel Web UI.

ENABLING/DISABLING WATCHDOG

Use the following procedure to enable/disable the WatchDog.

For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see , the section, 

“WatchDog 

Settings”

 on 

page A-320

.

 CONFIGURATION FILES

Summary of Contents for 6800 Series

Page 1: ...Mitel 6800 Series SIP Phones 58014473 REV02 RELEASE 4 2 0 SERVICE PACK 2 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ...

Page 2: ... any purpose without written permission from Mitel Networks Corporation Trademarks The trademarks service marks logos and graphics collectively Trademarks appearing on Mitel s Internet sites or in its publications are registered and unregistered trademarks of Mitel Networks Corporation MNC or its subsidiaries collectively Mitel or others Use of the Trademarks is prohibited without the express cons...

Page 3: ...late or reduce to electronic medium or machine readable form or language derive source code without the express written consent of the Seller and its Suppliers or disseminate or otherwise disclose the Software to third parties All Software furnished hereunder whether or not part of firmware including all copies thereof are and shall remain the property of Seller and its Suppliers and are subject t...

Page 4: ...6867i IP Phone 1 12 Model 6869i IP Phone 1 15 Model 6873i IP Phone 1 18 Firmware Installation Information 1 20 Description 1 20 Important M685i Expansion Module Firmware Downgrade Information 1 20 Installation Considerations 1 20 Installation Requirements 1 21 Configuration Server Requirement 1 22 Firmware and Configuration Files 1 23 Description 1 23 Configuration File Precedence 1 25 Installing ...

Page 5: ...ions 3 10 Phone Status 3 10 Restarting Your Phone 3 13 Set Phone to Factory Defaults Erase Local Configuration 3 14 Basic Settings 3 17 Account Configuration 3 37 Custom Ringtones 3 38 Network Settings 3 38 Line Settings 3 63 Softkeys Programmable Keys Expansion Module Keys 3 64 Action URI 3 65 Configuration Server Settings 3 67 Firmware Update Features 3 74 TLS Support 3 75 802 1x Support 3 80 Tr...

Page 6: ... Configuration Server Protocol 4 101 Configuring the Configuration Server Protocol 4 101 CHAPTER 5 CONFIGURING OPERATIONAL FEATURES About this Chapter 5 2 Topics 5 2 Operational Features 5 6 Description 5 6 User Passwords 5 6 Administrator Passwords 5 8 Locking Unlocking the Phone 5 9 Emergency Dial Plan 5 14 Configurable Emergency Call Behavior 5 16 User Dial Plan Setting 5 17 Time and Date 5 18 ...

Page 7: ...ting 5 75 Stuttered Dial Tone 5 80 XML Beep Support 5 81 Status Scroll Delay 5 83 Switch Focus to Ringing Line 5 84 Call Hold Reminder During Active Calls 5 85 Call Hold Reminder on Single Hold 5 87 Call Hold Reminder Timer Frequency 5 88 Preferred Line and Preferred Line Timeout 5 89 Goodbye Key Cancels Incoming Call 5 91 Message Waiting Indicator Line 5 93 Customizable Message Waiting Indicator ...

Page 8: ...rogramming 5 159 Customizing the Key Type List in the Mitel Web UI 5 167 Speeddial Prefixes 5 169 Enabling Disabling Ability to Add or Edit a Speeddial Key 5 169 Busy Lamp Field BLF 5 170 BLF Page Switch Feature 5 174 Configurable Display Modes for BLF and BLF List Softkey Labels 5 175 Configurable Display for Blank BLF List and XMPP Presence Related Favorite Softkeys 5 176 Configurable BLF or BLF...

Page 9: ...le Directory List Key 5 280 Voicemail 5 280 Visual Indicators for Voicemail on SCA Configured Lines 5 282 PIN and Authorization Code Suppression 5 283 XML Customized Services 5 284 XML Override for a Locked Phone 5 315 Configurable Indication of Terminated Calls 5 316 Centralized Conferencing for Sylantro and BroadSoft Servers 5 317 Custom Ad Hoc Conference 5 321 SIP Join Feature for 3 Way Confere...

Page 10: ...Sylantro Servers 6 32 Configurable DNS Queries 6 34 Ignore Out of Sequence Errors 6 36 Early Only Parameter in Replaces Header RFC3891 6 36 Switching Between Early Media and Local Ringing 6 37 Enable Microphone During Early Media 6 37 Configurable Codec Negotiation Behavior 6 37 Call Info Header to 200ok Responses for Shared Call Appearance SCA Lines 6 38 Reason Header Field in SIP Message 6 38 Co...

Page 11: ...eloading of the Configuration Files 6 105 MiCloud Telepo Music on Hold Support 6 106 UAC Session Refresh Support 6 106 Configurable SRTP Rollover Counter ROC RESET Behavior 6 107 CHAPTER 7 ENCRYPTED FILES ON THE IP PHONE About this Chapter 7 2 Topics 7 2 Encrypted Files on the IP Phone 7 3 Configuration File Encryption Method 7 3 Procedure to Encrypt Configuration Files 7 4 Vendor Configuration Fi...

Page 12: ...2 Why does my phone display Bad Encrypted Config 9 22 Why is my phone not receiving the TFTP IP address from the DHCP Server 9 23 How do I restart the IP phone 9 24 How do I set the IP phone to factory default 9 25 How do I erase the phone s local configuration 9 26 How to reset a user s password 9 27 How do I lock and unlock the phone 9 29 APPENDIX A CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS About this Appendix A...

Page 13: ... Settings A 44 Time Server Settings A 52 Custom Time Zone and DST Settings A 53 Backlight Mode Settings A 61 Brightness Level Settings A 62 Background Image on Idle Screen A 63 Home Idle Screen Settings A 63 Screen Saver Settings A 64 Background Image on Screen Saver A 65 Picture ID Feature A 66 DHSG Settings A 67 Live Dialpad Settings A 67 Live Keyboard Settings A 68 SIP Local Dial Plan Settings ...

Page 14: ...129 Directory Loose Number Matching A 157 Customizable Directory List Key A 157 Missed received Callers List Settings A 158 Customizable Received Callers List and Services Key A 158 Call Forward Settings A 159 Call Forward Key Mode Settings A 160 PIN Suppression A 161 LLDP MED and ELIN Settings A 162 Missed Calls Indicator Settings A 164 XML Settings A 165 Action URI Settings A 167 XML SIP Notify ...

Page 15: ...ing DTMF Events A 208 Intercom Auto Answer and Barge In Settings A 208 Enable Microphone During Early Media A 211 Codec Negotiation Behavior A 211 Group Paging RTP Settings A 211 Audio Mode Settings A 212 Disable User Login to Mitel Web UI A 213 Minimum Ringer Volume A 213 Terminated Calls Indicator A 213 Directed Call Pickup BLF or XML Call Interception Settings A 214 ACD Auto Available Timer Set...

Page 16: ...nd BLF List Key Behavior When in an Active Call A 268 Ring Splash Settings A 269 Discreet Ringing Settings A 281 Drop Softkey Settings A 281 Customizing M685i Expansion Module Column Display A 282 Expansion Module 1 through 3 A 282 Advanced Operational Parameters A 284 uaCSTA Settings A 284 Blind Transfer Setting A 285 Semi Attended Transfer Settings A 285 Update Caller ID Setting A 286 Boot Seque...

Page 17: ...301 Active VoIP Recording Settings A 302 Xsi Feature Settings A 304 Settings for Re Branding BroadSoft Related Feature UI Strings A 309 UC ONE Interoperability Settings A 310 BroadSoft BroadWorks Executive and Assitant Services Settings A 312 Visitor Desk Phone Settings A 313 MiCloud Telepo Music on Hold Settings A 315 UAC Session Refresh Settings A 317 ROC Reset Behavior Settings A 317 Troublesho...

Page 18: ... PROXY SERVER CONFIGURATION About this Appendix E 2 Topics E 2 Multiple Proxy Server Configuration E 3 APPENDIX F CERTIFICATE SUPPORT About this Appendix F 2 Topics F 2 Certificates Supported in This Software Release F 3 Limited Warranty Warranty 1 Exclusions Warranty 1 Warranty Repair Services Warranty 1 After Warranty Service Warranty 1 Limited Warranty Australia Only Warranty 2 Repair Notice Wa...

Page 19: ...Table of Contents xviii M5T SIP Stack M5T Copyright 1 MD5 RSA Copyright 1 OpenSSL Copyright 2 libSRTP SRTP Cisco Copyright 6 Wind River Systems VxWorks software Copyright 6 UPnP Intel Copyright 7 ...

Page 20: ...ion that is at a technical level more suitable for a system or network administrator Mitel Model Specific SIP IP Phone User Guides explains the most commonly used features and functions for an end user Mitel Model Series Specific SIP IP Phone Release Notes provides new features and documents issues resolved for the SIP IP phones This Administrator Guide complements the Mitel Model Specific Install...

Page 21: ...nd Global SIP Features on the IP Phone Chapter 4 Configuring operational information on the IP Phones Chapter 5 Configuring advanced operational information on the IP Phones Chapter 6 Encryption information Chapter 7 Firmware upgrade information Chapter 8 Troubleshooting solutions Chapter 9 Configuration parameters Appendix A Configuring the IP Phones at the Asterisk PBX Appendix B Sample configur...

Page 22: ...Chapter 1 OVERVIEW ...

Page 23: ...odel 6863i IP Phone page 1 7 Model 6865i IP Phone page 1 9 Model 6867i IP Phone page 1 12 Model 6869i IP Phone page 1 15 Model 6873i IP Phone page 1 18 Firmware Installation Information page 1 20 Important M685i Expansion Module Firmware Downgrade Information page 1 20 Installation Considerations page 1 20 Installation Requirements page 1 21 Configuration Server Requirement page 1 22 Firmware and ...

Page 24: ...el SIP IP Phone Models communicate over an IP network allowing you to receive and place calls in the same manner as a regular business telephone All phone models support the Session Initiation Protocol SIP The following illustration show the IP phone models in the 6800 series 6865i 6867i 6863i 6869i 6873i ...

Page 25: ...ion modules are optional accessories designed to be used with the 6865i 6867i 6869i and 6873i IP Phones The M680i module adds 16 additional softkeys to the 6865i 6867i 6869i and 6873i IP phones andprovidespaperlabelsforeachsoftkey TheM685iadds3pagesof28 i e 84total additional softkeys to the 6865i 6867i 6869i and 6873i IP phones Labels can be configured and displayed on the backlit color LCD displ...

Page 26: ... attempt the upgrade again IP PHONE MODEL MAXIMUM OF DAISY CHAINED MODULES WHEN POWERED VIA 48V AC ADAPTER MAXIMUM OF DAISY CHAINED MODULES WHEN POWERED VIA POE POE CLASS 6865i 3 3 Class 2 6 49W 6867i 3 3 Class 2 6 49W without modules Dynamically switches to Class 3 12 95W when modules are attached 6869i 3 3 Class 3 12 95W 6873i 3 3 Class 3 12 95W without modules Dynamically switches to Class 4 25...

Page 27: ...ot increase the upgrade time e g three connected M685i expansion modules will still take approximately 7 to 10 minutes to upgrade Reference For more information about installing the 6800 Wall Mount Kit and setting up and using the K680i keyboard and M680i M685i expansion modules see the following respective documents 6800 Wall Mount Kit Installation Guide K680i Detachable Magnetic Keyboard Install...

Page 28: ...6863i 6863I PHONE FEATURES LCD screen Built in two port 10 100 Fast Ethernet switch lets you share a connection with your computer 3 programmable keys Press and hold speeddial key configuration feature Supports up to 2 call lines with LEDs Wideband handset Wideband full duplex speakerphone for handsfree calls AC power adapter sold separately Set paging Availability of feature dependent on your pho...

Page 29: ...h your System Administrator before changing the administrator only options Goodbye Key Ends an active call The Goodbye key also exits an open list such as the Options List without saving changes Hold Key Places an active call on hold To retrieve a held call press the call appearance button beside the light that is flashing Line Call Appearance Keys Connects you to a line or call The Mitel 6863i su...

Page 30: ... with backlight Built in two port 10 100 1000 Gigabit Ethernet switch lets you share a connection with your computer 8 programmable top keys Press and hold speeddial key configuration feature Supports up to 24 call lines with LEDs Wideband handset Wideband full duplex speakerphone for handsfree calls Headset mode support AC power adapter sold separately Enhanced busy lamp fields Set paging Availab...

Page 31: ...ntries on the display pressing the LEFT key erases the character on the left pressing the RIGHT key sets the option Alternatively pressing the center Select key sets the option as well on specific screens Transfer Key Transfers the active call to another number Conference Key Begins a conference call with the active call Options Key Accesses services and options to customize your phone Your System...

Page 32: ...each with LED indicator lights Speaker Headset Key Transfers the active call to the speaker or headset allowing handsfree use of the phone Programmable Keys When programmed allows you to easily perform up to 8 specific functions e g Services Directory Received Callers List Intercom etc and access enhanced services provided by third parties e g XML applications KEY DESCRIPTION ...

Page 33: ...0 Gigabit Ethernet switch lets you share a connection with your computer USB 2 0 port 100mA maximum 6 programmable and 4 context sensitive softkeys Press and hold speeddial key configuration feature Supports up to 24 call lines with LEDs Wideband handset Wideband full duplex speakerphone for handsfree calls Headset mode support AC power adapter sold separately Enhanced busy lamp fields Set paging ...

Page 34: ...Adjusts the volume for the handset ringer and handsfree speaker Received Callers List Key Accesses a list of the last 200 calls received Outgoing Redial Key Accesses a list of the last 100 previously dialed numbers Pressing the Outgoing Redial key twice redials the last dialed number Line Call Appearance Keys Connects you to a line or call The Mitel 6867i IP Phone supports two line keys each with ...

Page 35: ...keys 6 programmable keys that allow you to easily perform up to 20 specific functions and access enhanced services provided by third parties e g XML applications Bottom Softkeys 4 programmable keys that support up to 18 functions These keys also act as state based keys allowing you to easily perform context sensitive functions during specific states i e when the phone is an idle connected incoming...

Page 36: ...t in two port 10 100 1000 Gigabit Ethernet switch lets you share a connection with your computer USB 2 0 port 100mA maximum 12 programmable and 5 context sensitive softkeys Press and hold speeddial key configuration feature Supports up to 24 call lines with LEDs Wideband handset Wideband full duplex speakerphone for handsfree calls Headset mode support AC power adapter sold separately Enhanced bus...

Page 37: ...er and handsfree speaker Received Callers List Key Accesses a list of the last 200 calls received Outgoing Redial Key Accesses a list of the last 100 previously dialed numbers Pressing the Outgoing Redial key twice redials the last dialed number Line Call Appearance Keys Connects you to a line or call The Mitel 6869i IP Phone supports two line keys each with LED indicator lights Speaker Headset Ke...

Page 38: ...ctions and access enhanced services provided by third parties e g XML applications Bottom Softkeys 5 programmable keys that support up to 24 functions These keys also act as state based keys allowing you to easily perform context sensitive functions during specific states i e when the phone is an idle connected incoming outgoing or busy state KEY DESCRIPTION ...

Page 39: ...switch lets you share a connection with your computer USB 2 0 port 500mA maximum Up to 48 top and 30 bottom softkeys Press and hold speeddial key configuration feature Supports 2 hard line keys with LEDs additional line keys programmable via softkeys Wideband handset Wideband full duplex speakerphone for handsfree calls USB and Bluetooth headset support AC power adapter sold separately Enhanced bu...

Page 40: ...ministrator before changing the administrator only options Mute Key Mutes the microphone so that your caller cannot hear you the light indicator flashes when the microphone is on mute Volume Controls Adjusts the volume for the handset ringer and handsfree speaker Received Callers List Key Accesses a list of the last 200 calls received Outgoing Redial Key Accesses a list of the last 100 previously ...

Page 41: ...align itself with the new UI changes If downgrading the phone with an M685i Expansion Module from Release 4 2 0 to a firmware version of Release 4 1 0 or below it is required to first downgrade to Release 4 1 0 Hot Fix or 4 1 0 Service Pack and then to the Release 4 1 0 or below firmware version in such scenarios This will ensure the UI of the M685i Expansion Module is aligned with the UI at all t...

Page 42: ...pply inline power to the phone IEEE 802 3af use an Ethernet cable to connect from the phone directly to the network for power no 48VAC power adapter required if using Power over Ethernet PoE For Ethernet networks that DO NOT supply power to the phone Use the respective power adapter to connect from the DC power port on the phone to a power source or Use a PoE power injector or a PoE switch Power s...

Page 43: ...tore the firmware images that you need to download to your IP phone Stores configuration files for the IP phone REFERENCE To set the protocol for your configuration server see Chapter 4 Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol SIP Features the section Configuring the Configuration Server Protocol on page 4 101 To update the firmware on your phone see Chapter 8 Upgrading the Firmware ...

Page 44: ...g that is used for the model name e g 6863i cfg 6865i cfg 6867i cfg 6869i cfg 6873i cfg MAC cfg for example 00085D1610DE cfg This file contains configuration information about the IP Phone Note Automatic download is dependent on your configuration server setup For more information about manual and automatic download of firmware see Chapter 8 Upgrading the Firmware For more information on changing ...

Page 45: ...g_cs txt Czech UTF 8 lang_cs_op txt Czech ASCII lang_cy txt Welsh lang_de txt German lang_da txt Danish lang_el txt Greek 6867i 6869i and 6873i only lang_es txt Spanish lang_es_mx txt Mexican Spanish lang_eu txt Euskera lang_fi txt Finnish lang_fr txt French lang_fr_ca txt Canadian French lang_gl txt Galego lang_hu txt Hungarian lang_it txt Italian lang_nl txt Dutch lang_nl_nl txt Dutch Netherland...

Page 46: ...e 2 Values downloaded from the configuration server 3 Values stored locally on the phone The last values to be applied to the phone configuration are the values that take effect For example if a parameter s value is set in the local configuration via Mitel Web UI or IP phone UI and the same value was also set differently in one of the startup cfg model cfg mac cfg files on the configuration server...

Page 47: ...er and the firmware files from the server specified in the URL When the firmware server parameter specifies a partial URL path the configuration server that is linked to the partial path is used to load the firmware For example firmware server path When there is no firmware server parameter or if it is empty the original configuration server is used to load the firmware Examples To download all co...

Page 48: ...Multiple Configuration Server Settings on page A 30 CSV DIRECTORY FILES LANGUAGE PACKS TLS CERTIFICATES 802 1X CERTIFICATES HTTPS FILES AND MULTIPLE CONFIGURATION SERVERS The CSV directory files language packs TLS certificate files 802 1x certificate files and HTTPS files can also be downloaded to the phone from a server other than the configuration server For each of these types of files you can ...

Page 49: ...ECIFIED SERVER ARE BY ORDER security tuz startup cfg startup tuz model cfg model tuz mac cfg mac tuz CSV Directory Files directory 1 directory 2 Language Pack Files language 1 language 2 language 3 language 4 Transport Layer Security TLS Certificate Files sips root and intermediate certificates sips local certificate sips private key sips trusted certificates 802 1x Security Authentication Certifi...

Page 50: ...age 4 Valid files names you can specify for languages are lang_ca txt Catalan lang_ca_va txt Valencian lang_cs txt Czech UTF 8 lang_cs_op txt Czech ASCII lang_cy txt Welsh lang_de txt German lang_da txt Danish lang_el txt Greek 6867i 6869i and 6873i only lang_es txt Spanish lang_es_mx txt Mexican Spanish lang_eu Euskera lang_fi txt Finnish lang_fr txt French lang_fr_ca txt Canadian French lang_gl ...

Page 51: ...le downloads the German language pack to the phones from the original configuration server language 1 lang_de txt Transport Layer Security TLS Certificate Files sips root and intermediate certificates sips local certificate sips private key sips trusted certificates 802 1x Security Authentication Certificate Files 802 1x root and intermediate certificates 802 1x local certificate 802 1x trusted ce...

Page 52: ...tificate Files The following example downloads no 802 1x local certificate file 802 1x local certificate The following example downloads the 802 1x local certificate for the phone from the original configuration server 802 1x local certificate 8021xlocalCert pem The following example uses FTP to download the firmware file 8021xlocalCert pem 802 1x local certificate file from the path directory on ...

Page 53: ...Chapter 2 CONFIGURATION INTERFACE METHODS ...

Page 54: ...to configure the IP phones TOPICS This chapter covers the following topics Note Features characteristics requirements and configuration that are specific to a particular phone model are indicated where required in this guide TOPIC PAGE Configuration Methods page 2 3 IP Phone UI page 2 3 Mitel Web UI page 2 5 Configuration Files Administrator Only page 2 16 ...

Page 55: ...tkeys programmable keys see Chapter 5 Softkeys Programmable Keys Expansion Module Keys on page 5 140 OPTIONS KEY The Options key allows you to access the Options List on the IP phone Accessible options in this list are for both User and Administrator use The Administrator must enter a password for administrator options This document describes the administrator options only For a description of the...

Page 56: ... to scroll through the list of options 3 To select an option press the Enter softkey the button if applicable or select the number on the keypad that corresponds to the option in the Option List 4 Use the Set softkey after making a change to an option to save the change 5 Press the Done softkey at any time to save the changes and exit the current option 6 Press the Cancel softkey press 3 press at ...

Page 57: ...text Transfer Protocol over Secure Socket Layer HTTPS client and server protocols HTTP is the set of rules for transferring files text graphic images sound video and other multimedia files over the Internet When you open your Web browser you are indirectly making use of HTTP HTTP is an application protocol that runs on top of the TCP IP suite of protocols the foundation protocols for the Internet ...

Page 58: ...main HTTPS client functions are Downloading of configuration files and firmware images Downloading of script files based on an HTTPS URL supplied by a softkey definition Note HTTPS uses port 443 instead of HTTP port 80 in its interactions with the TCP IP lower layer Both the HTTP and HTTPS port numbers are configurable using the configuration files the IP Phone UI the Mitel Web UI and DHCP Option ...

Page 59: ...g file the phone automatically sends aastra as the default Username and Password back to the server For more information about this feature see Chapter 5 the section Authentication Support for HTTP HTTPS Download Methods used with BroadSoft Client Management System CMS on page 5 323 USING HTTPS VIA THE MITEL WEB UI HTTPS is enabled by default on the IP phones When you open a browser window and ent...

Page 60: ...WEB UI Use the following procedure to access the Mitel Web UI 1 Open your web browser and enter the phone s IP address or host name into the address field The following is an example of the Login screen that displays 2 Enter your username and password and click OK Note For an administrator the default username is admin and the password is 22222 For a user the default username is user and the passw...

Page 61: ...enu of the Mitel Web UI Status Operation Basic Settings Advanced Settings Status The Status section displays the network status and the MAC address of the IP phone It also displays hardware and firmware information about the IP phone The status window also displays the SIP Account information for each account on the phone The information in the Status window is read only Note Programmable Keys app...

Page 62: ...ti functional programmable keys Applicable to User and Administrator Expansion Module N The M680i has up to 16 configurable keys The M685i has up to 84 configurable keys You can have up to 3 expansion modules attached to a single phone allowing you to configure keys for Expansion Module 1 Expansion Module 2 and Expansion Module 3 See your Model Specific SIP Phone User Guide for applicable expansio...

Page 63: ... to set Outgoing Intercom Settings Admin Only Administrator can enable these for a User if required Incoming Intercom Settings Group Paging RTP Settings Key Mapping Admin Only Ring Tones Priority Alert Settings Admin Only Directed Call Pickup Settings Admin Only Auto Call Distribution Settings Admin Only Time and Date Settings Language Settings Only the Admin can specify the language pack names to...

Page 64: ...rver TFTP default FTP HTTP or HTTPS configure automatic firmware and configuration file updates enable disable auto resync and assign an XML push server list Applicable to Administrator Only Firmware Update Allows you to manually perform a firmware update on the IP phone from the configuration server using any of the IP Phones supported protocols Applicable to Administrator Only TLS Support Allows...

Page 65: ...strators can start stop packet capturing configure capture ports set how long the capture should last and retrieve the capture file through the Capture page For more information on this feature see Chapter 9 the section Tcpdump Network Packet Capture Support on page 9 19 Applicable to Administrator Only HEADING DESCRIPTION ...

Page 66: ...fg file if you want to disable the Web UI on a single phone Open the startup cfg file to disable the Web UI on all phones 2 Enter the following parameter web interface enabled 0 3 Save the changes and close the model cfg mac cfg or the startup cfg file 4 Restart the phone to apply the changes The Mitel Web UI is disabled for a single IP phone or for all phones WEB UI SECURITY FEATURES WEB UI Lock ...

Page 67: ... HTTPs ports 80 and 443 as well as port 49249 Closing these ports not only disables users from accessing the Web UI and other services such as XML BroadWorks Xsi and custom ring tones but will also help nullify web server attacks as the ports will not be visible using port scanning software By defining the secure web service parameter as 1 in the configuration files Administrators can close TCP po...

Page 68: ...rameters and their settings in the configuration files 1 Using a text based editing application open the configuration file for the phone for which you want to configure the CSV directory list either startup cfg model cfg mac cfg or all three 2 Enter the required configuration parameters followed by the applicable value For example directory 1 company_directory directory 2 my_personal_directory 3 ...

Page 69: ...OVERWRITINGPARAMETERSWITHDEFAULTSINTHECONFIGURATION FILES An Administrator can specify a caret character before a configuration parameter in the startup cfg model cfg and mac cfg configuration files which allows the parameter to be overwritten and reset back to a specified value This can be convenient when changes are made by a user to specific parameters on the phone locally via Mitel Web UI or I...

Page 70: ...strar ip pbx mitel com this parameter is locked sip registrar port 5062 this parameter is locked new model cfg file is loaded to the phone with sip proxy ip and any other parameter s from the file specifying a the sip proxy ip and any other parameters are overwritten if previously changed by the user new startup cfg file is loaded to the phone with sip proxy ip and any other parameter s from the f...

Page 71: ...ple DNS A record entries The phone tries to contact the first server address it receives but if this fails it now tries to contact the second server address etc This feature supports all the download protocols TFTP FTP HTTP and HTTPS Limitation In certain cases the TFTP Protocol cannot distinguish between server down and no file on server error messages therefore the failover in these instances ma...

Page 72: ...Chapter 3 ADMINISTRATOR OPTIONS ...

Page 73: ...ific options are configurable only via the IP Phone UI and or Mitel Web UI and or configuration files TOPIC PAGE Administrator Level Options page 3 3 IP Phone UI Options page 3 3 Mitel Web UI Options page 3 7 Configuration File Options page 3 10 Phone Status page 3 10 Restarting Your Phone page 3 13 Set Phone to Factory Defaults Erase Local Configuration page 3 14 Basic Settings page 3 17 Account ...

Page 74: ... and manage local and or remote IP phones in a network An Administrator can access and manage these options using the IP Phone UI the Mitel Web UI or the configuration files IP PHONE UI OPTIONS Using the 6863i 6865i IP Phone UI you can access the Administrator options at Options Admin Menu using the default password of 22222 The following are administrator options in the Options List on the 6863i ...

Page 75: ...ration Server SIP Settings Network Settings Reset includes options for Erase Local Config and Factory Default Note An administrator has the option of enabling and disabling the use of password protection on the IP phone UI for all model phones This is configurable using the configuration files only For more information about this feature see Appendix A the section Password Settings on page 16 6867...

Page 76: ...r can replace the existing options menu on the Phone UI with a more simplified options menu In the configuration files the options simple menu parameter allows you to display either the full menu if set to 0 or the simplified menu if set to 1 The following table illustrates the differences between the full menu and the simplified menu 6863i and 6865i Note When setting the options simple menu param...

Page 77: ...D OPTIONS MENU Language Removed Time and Date Removed Directory Removed Credentials Removed Call Forward Call Forward Lock Lock Password Sub Option Removed Status Status Audio Audio Display Display Dialing Removed Restart Restart Advanced Only Factory Default option available ...

Page 78: ...he default username is admin and the default password is 22222 The IP phones accept numeric passwords only The column on the left FULL OPTIONS MENU SIMPLIFIED OPTIONS MENU Language Removed Time and Date Removed Status Status Bluetooth Bluetooth Directory Removed Credentials Removed Call Forward Call Forward Lock Lock Password Sub Option Removed Audio Audio Display Display Dialing Removed Restart R...

Page 79: ...cal Configuration Settings Basic Settings Preferences General Local Dial Plan Send Dial Plan Terminator Digit Timeout seconds Basic Settings Preferences Outgoing Intercom Settings User can configure this via the Mitel Web UI if enabled by an Administrator Basic Settings Preferences Key Mapping Basic Settings Preferences Priority Alerting Settings Basic Settings Preferences Directed Call Pickup Set...

Page 80: ...Server Firmware Update TLS Support 802 1x Support Troubleshooting REFERENCES For information about options available to a User AND Administrator in the Mitel Web UI see your Model Specific SIP Phone User Guide For procedures to Restart your phone or restore factory defaults see Restarting Your Phone on page 3 13 and Set Phone to Factory Defaults Erase Local Configuration on page 3 14 For more info...

Page 81: ... UI PHONE STATUS VIA IP PHONE UI In the IP phone UI the Phone Status options are available to the user and the administrator and do not require a password entry Phone Status for 6863i and 6865i IP Phones IP MAC Addresses Displays the IP address and MAC address of the phone LAN Port Displays the Link State Negotiation Method Speed and Duplex Method that the phone uses on its LAN port PC Port Displa...

Page 82: ...t Displays the Link State Negotiation Method Speed and Duplex Method that the phone uses on its PC Port Storage Displays the number of Local Directory Received Callers and Outgoing Redial List entries saved on the phone Error Messages Displays any error messages that occurred during the phone s last reboot PHONE STATUS VIA MITEL WEB UI The first screen that displays after logging into the Mitel We...

Page 83: ...onstatusofthephone Ifthereareaccounts configured on the IP Phone their SIP status displays in this field Excluding the 6863i 2 lines all model phones display the status of up to 24 lines The following table describes the status conditions that can display for an account s STATUS CONDITION DESCRIPTION Registered Displays this status on accounts that HAVE been registered with the SIP proxy server Ex...

Page 84: ...ss on the phone to enter the Options List 2 Navigate to the Restart option and press the button or Select softkey A Restart Phone prompt displays 3 Select Yes using the button to restart the phone Press No using the button to cancel the restart function For the 6873i 1 Press on the phone to enter the Options List 2 Press the Restart icon A Restart Phone prompt displays 3 Press Yes to restart the p...

Page 85: ...ng a factory default on the phone will revert all the settings in the startup cfg model cfg mac cfg and local configuration back to the original factory values You can reset a phone to factory defaults using the IP Phone UI or the Mitel Web UI Setting Factory Defaults Using the IP Phone UI For the 6863i 6865i 1 Press on the phone to enter the Options List 2 Select Administrator Menu and enter your...

Page 86: ... function For the 6873i 1 Press on the phone to enter the Options List 2 Press the Advanced softkey 3 Enter the Administrator password and press the blue Enter key Default is 22222 4 Press the Reset icon 5 With the Factory Default option highlighted press the Select softkey A Factory Default prompt displays 6 Press Yes to restart the phone Press No to cancel the restart function Settings Factory D...

Page 87: ... 1 Press on the phone to enter the Options List 2 Press the Advanced softkey 3 Enter the Administrator password and press Enter Default is 22222 4 Navigate to the Reset option and press the button or Select softkey 5 Select Erase Local Cfg using the button or press the Select softkey An Erase Local Configuration prompt displays 6 Select Yes using the button to erase the local configuration Press N...

Page 88: ...ves the last customized configuration settings made on the phone BASIC SETTINGS An Administrator has access to specific Basic Setting options to configure and manage the IP Phone in the network The following sections identify the options available to an Administrator only or where indicated to a User and Administrator These tables also identify whether you can configure them using the Mitel Web UI...

Page 89: ...secutive key presses For more information on this feature see Digit Timeout on page 5 71 Park Call Note This option can be set by both Users and Administrators sip lineN park pickup config The parking of a live call to a specific extension Note This feature on the Basic Preferences screen is not available on the 6863i and 6865i To configure the Park feature on a key see Chapter 5 the section Park ...

Page 90: ...feature see Stuttered Dial Tone on page 5 80 XML Beep Support Note This option can be set by both Users and Administrators xml beep notification Enables or disables the playing of a beep to indicate a status on the phone When the phone receives a status message the BEEP notifies the user that the message is displaying For more information on this feature see XML Beep Support on page 5 81 Status Sc...

Page 91: ...the ability for the phone to initiate a continuous reminder tone on the active call when another call is on hold When this feature is disabled a ring splash is heard when the active call hangs up and there is still a call on hold For more information on this feature see Call Hold Reminder During Active Calls on page 5 85 PARAMETER IN MITEL WEB UI PARAMETER IN CONFIGURATION FILES DESCRIPTION ...

Page 92: ... answered Notes 1 This parameter is used with the call hold reminder frequency parameter 2 You must enable this call hold reminder timer parameter for it to work 3 A value of 0 disables the call hold reminder feature For more information on this feature see Call Hold Reminder Timer Frequency on page 5 88 call hold reminder frequency Note This option can be set by an Administrator only Specifies th...

Page 93: ...ctivity on an active line For more information on this feature see Preferred Line and Preferred Line Timeout on page 5 89 Goodbye Key Cancels Incoming Call Note This option can be set by both Users and Administrators goodbye key cancels incoming call Enable or disables the behavior of the Goodbye Key on the IP phone For more information on this feature see Goodbye Key Cancels Incoming Call on page...

Page 94: ...r emergency numbers For more information on this feature see Link Layer Discovery Protocol for Media Endpoint Devices LLDP MED and Emergency Location Identification Number ELIN on page 5 99 PARAMETER IN MITEL WEB UI PARAMETER IN CONFIGURATION FILES DESCRIPTION INCOMING INTERCOM SETTINGS Auto Answer Note This option can be set by both Users and Administrators sip allow auto answer Enables or disabl...

Page 95: ... for notifying the recipient that an Intercom call is being placed Applicable settings are Phone Side Server Side OFF For more information on this feature see Incoming Outgoing Intercom with Auto Answer and Barge In on page 5 103 Prefix Code sip intercom prefix code The prefix to add to the phone number for server side outgoing Intercom calls This parameter is required for all server side Intercom...

Page 96: ...sten Addresses Note This option can be set by both Users and Administrators paging group listening Allows you to specify up to 5 listening multicast addresses to send receive a Real Time Transport Protocol RTP stream to from these pre configured multicast addresses without involving SIP signaling For more information on this feature see Group Paging RTP Settings on page 5 106 ...

Page 97: ...g an active call the phone will send the custom number as DTMF using the phone configured DTMF method inbound vs out of band RFC2833 vs SIP INFO When a user presses the Redial key the mapped number will be sent out as DTMF during an active call if the current map redial key to parameter is configured to a number and the map redial as dtmf parameter is set to 1 For more information on this feature ...

Page 98: ...s feature see Ring Tones and Tone Sets on page 5 112 N A LineN Note This option can be set by both Users and Administrators lineN ring tone Sets the type of ring tone on the IP phone on a per line basis Ring tone can be set to one of 15 distinct rings excluding silence or a custom ring tone For more information on this feature see Ring Tones and Tone Sets on page 5 112 PARAMETER IN MITEL WEB UI PA...

Page 99: ...n alert priority keyword appears in the header of the INVITE request the configured Bellcore ring tone is applied to the IP phone For more information on this feature see Priority Alerting on page 5 127 Auto Call Distribution alert auto call distribution When an alert acd keyword appears in the header of the INVITE request the configured Bellcore ring tone is applied to the IP phone For more infor...

Page 100: ...Enables or disables the playing of a short ring splash tone when there is an incoming call on the BLF or BLF List monitored extension For more information on this feature see Ring Signal Type for BLF and BLF List on page 5 177 N A prgkeyN ring splash Controls the ring splash alert pattern per programmable key For more information on this feature see Ring Signal Type for BLF and BLF List on page 5 ...

Page 101: ...o available Enables or disables the use of the ACD Auto Available Timer For more information on this feature see Automatic Call Distribution ACD for Sylantro BroadWorks Servers on page 5 192 Auto Available Timer acd auto available timer Specifies the length of time in seconds before the IP phone status switches back to available For more information on this feature see Automatic Call Distribution ...

Page 102: ...ormats For more information on this feature see Time and Date on page 5 18 Time Zone Note This option can be set by both Users and Administrators N A time zone name Custom Parameters time zone minutes dst minutes dst start relative date dst end relative date dst start month dst end month dst start week dst end week dst start day dst end day dst start hour dst end hour This parameter allows you to ...

Page 103: ...s on page 5 30 Time Server 3 Note This option can be set by both Users and Administrators Time Server 3 time server3 This parameter allows you to set the IP address of Time Server 3 in dotted decimal format For more information on this feature see Time Servers on page 5 30 PARAMETER IN IP PHONE UI PARAMETER IN MITEL WEB UI PARAMETERS IN CONFIGURATION FILES DESCRIPTION Live Dialpad Note This option...

Page 104: ...rator via the IP Phone UI and the configuration files N A live keyboard This parameter turns the Live Keyboard feature ON or OFF For more information on this feature see Live Dialpad on page 5 48 N A N A keyboard script Specifies the URI to be called when an alphabetic key on a K680i keyboard attached to a 6867i or 6869i SIP phone is pressed If this parameter is not defined or left blank the phone...

Page 105: ...ng language packs see Loading Language Packs on page 5 52 For more information on specifying a language to use on the IP Phone see Specifying the Screen Language to Use on page 5 53 Webpage Language Note This option can be set by both Users and Administrators web language The language you want to display for the Mitel Web UI Valid values are 0 English is default 1 4 The values 1 4 are dependent on...

Page 106: ...aracters in the IP Phone UI and in XML applications via the keypad on the phone or for the 6873i the on screen keyboard in the language s specified Valid values are English French Français German Deutsch Italian Italiano Spanish Español Portuguese Português Russian Русский Nordic Greek 6867i 6869i and 6873i only ελληνικά 6867i 6869i and 6873i only For more information on this feature see Specifyin...

Page 107: ...xt Galego lang_hu txt Hungarian lang_it txt Italian lang_nl txt Dutch lang_nl_nl txt Dutch Netherlands lang_no txt Norwegian lang_pl txt Polish ASCII lang_pl_pl txt Polish UTF8 lang_pt txt Portuguese lang_pt_br txt Brazilian Portuguese lang_ro txt Romanian lang_ru txt Russian lang_sk txt Slovak UTF8 lang_sk_op txt Slovak ASCII lang_sv txt Swedish lang_tr txt Turkish Notes 1 The languages packs you...

Page 108: ... all accounts on the phone A pre configured DND key toggles all accounts on the phone to ON or OFF Sets the same CFWD configuration for all accounts All Busy and or No Answer When you configure the initial account the phone applies the configuration to all other accounts In the Mitel Web UI only the account you configured is enabled All other accounts are grayed out but set to the same configurati...

Page 109: ... Tones on page 123 NETWORK SETTINGS The following paragraphs describe the network parameters you can configure on the IP phone Network settings are in two categories Basic network settings Advanced network settings NOTIFICATION WHEN INCORRECT NETWORK SETTINGS ENTERED If an Administrator enters incorrect network settings over the IP Phone UI or the Mitel Web UI such as A 0 0 0 0 entered as values f...

Page 110: ...s Subnet Mask Gateway Domain Name System DNS servers TFTP HTTP HTTPS and FTP servers and Timer servers Note For DHCP to automatically populate the IP address or qualified domain name for the TFTP server your DHCP server must support Option 66 The IP phones also support Option 60 and 43 For more information see DHCP on page 4 4 IP Address IP Address ip IP address of the IP phone To assign a static ...

Page 111: ...ings Manually on page 4 23 Hostname Hostname hostname Specifies the hostname DHCP Option 12 that the phone sends with the DHCP Request packet For more information see Using Option 12 Hostname on the IP Phone on page 4 13 Ethernet LAN Port Link PC Port Link PC Port Enabled 6863i and 6865i Enable PassThru Port 6867i 6869i and 6873i N A LAN Port PC Port PC Port PassThru Enable Disable 6863i and 6865i...

Page 112: ...mation see Using Option 77 User Class on the IP Phone on page 4 15 Download Options DHCP Download Options dhcp config option override The value specified for this parameter overrides the precedence order for determining a configuration server Valid values are 1 Disabled ignores all DHCP configuration options 0 Any 43 66 159 160 Notes 1 If the DHCP server supplies Options 159 and 160 the phones wil...

Page 113: ... Discovery Protocol for Media Endpoint Devices LLDP MED and Emergency Location Identification Number ELIN on page 5 99 N A Rport RFC 3581 sip rport Allows you to enable 1 or disable 0 the use of Rport on the IP phone Rport in RFC 3581 allows a client to request that the server send the response back to the source IP address and the port from which the request came For more information see Chapter ...

Page 114: ...ion on page 4 34 Client Method HTTPS Client Method https client method Defines the security method that the client advertises to the server during the Secure Socket Layer SSL handshake Available options are TLS 1 0 The phone will attempt to communicate using TLS 1 0 only TLS 1 1 The phone will attempt to communicate using TLS 1 1 only TLS 1 2 The phone will attempt to communicate using TLS 1 2 onl...

Page 115: ... files will not be performed if this feature is disabled Therefore disabling HTTPS validation of certificates is only recommended for troubleshooting purposes or when self signed certificates are in use For more information see Chapter 4 HTTPS Server Certificate Validation on page 4 38 Check Expires Check Certificate Expiration https validate expires Enables or disables the HTTPS validation of the...

Page 116: ... provided certificate through a configuration server using the HTTPS protocol you must temporarily disable the https validate certificates Afterthecertificateisinstalledandyoucan re enable the https validate certificates parameter For more information see Chapter 4 HTTPS Server Certificate Validation on page 4 38 PARAMETER IN IP PHONE UI PARAMETER IN MITEL WEB UI PARAMETERS IN CONFIGURATION FILES ...

Page 117: ...ETTINGS VLAN Enable VLAN Enable tagging enabled Enables or disables VLAN on the IP phones For more information see Chapter 4 Virtual LAN optional on page 4 44 Other Priority Priority Non IP Packet priority non ip Specifies the priority value for non IP packets For more information see Chapter 4 Virtual LAN optional on page 4 44 LAN PORT SETTINGS PORT 0 Phone VLAN ID VLAN ID vlan id Allows you to c...

Page 118: ...SCP value range is 0 63 and the priority range is 0 7 Mappings not enclosed in parentheses and separated with a comma or with values outside the ranges are ignored For more information see Chapter 4 Virtual LAN optional on page 4 44 PC PORT SETTINGS PORT 1 PC Port VLAN ID VLAN ID vlan id port 1 Allows you to configure a VLAN ID that associates with the physical Ethernet Port 1 PC port For more inf...

Page 119: ...registrar present at a different location than the PBX server the SIP parameters may need to be changed 2 Global SIP settings are applicable only to Lines 1 and 2 for the 6800 series SIP phones To configure lines that do not have an associated Line hard key Administrators must configure each individual line manually 3 The IP phones allow you to define different SIP lines with the same account info...

Page 120: ... sip lineN user name per line User name used in the name field of the SIP URI for the IP phone and for registering the phone at the registrar Valid values are up to 20 alphanumeric characters For more information see Chapter 4 Basic SIP Settings on page 4 60 Display Name Caller ID Global and Per Line sip display name global sip lineN display name per line Name used in the display name field of the...

Page 121: ...er line Phone number that you assign to BLA lines that is shared across all phones global configuration or shared on a per line basis per line configuration For more information see Chapter 4 Basic SIP Settings on page 4 60 For more information about BLA see Chapter 5 the section Bridged Line Appearance BLA on page 5 207 N A Line Mode Global and Per Line sip mode global sip lineN mode per line The...

Page 122: ...le For more information see Chapter 4 Basic SIP Settings on page 4 60 N A Backup Proxy Port Global and Per Line sip backup proxy port global sip lineN backup proxy port per line The port number of the backup SIP proxy server for which the IP phone uses when the primary SIP proxy port is unavailable For more information see Chapter 4 Basic SIP Settings on page 4 60 N A Outbound Proxy Server Global ...

Page 123: ...meric characters Enables or disables the phone to be registered with the Registrar When Register is disabled globally the phone is still active and you can dial using username and IP address of the phone A message No Service displays on the idle screen and the LED is steady ON If Register is disabled for a single line no messages display and LEDs are OFF For more information see Chapter 4 Basic SI...

Page 124: ...4 60 N A Conference Server URI Global and Per Line sip centralized conf global sip lineN centralized conf per line Globally enables or disables SIP centralized conferencing for an IP phone For more information see Chapter 4 Centralized Conferencing for Sylantro and BroadSoft Servers on page 5 317 PARAMETER IN MITEL WEB UI PARAMETERS IN CONFIGURATION FILES DESCRIPTION Explicit MWI Subscription sip ...

Page 125: ...For more information about this parameter see Chapter 6 the section As Feature Event Subscription on page 6 14 Send MAC Address in REGISTER Message sip send mac Adds an Aastra Mac header to the SIP REGISTER messages sent from the phone to the call server where the value is the MAC address of the phone For more information about this parameter see Chapter 6 the section TR 069 Support on page 6 8 Se...

Page 126: ... the message has timed out For more information see Chapter 4 Advanced SIP Settings optional on page 4 79 Transport Protocol sip transport protocol The protocol that the IP phone uses to send out SIP messages Notes 1 If you set the value of this parameter to 4 TLS the phone checks to see if the sips persistent tls is enabled If it is enabled the phone uses Persistent TLS on the connection If sips ...

Page 127: ...oid the conflict with any TCP ports being used For example WebUI HTTP server on 80 tcp and HTTPS on 443 tcp 2 By default the IP phones use symmetric TLS signaling for outgoing TLS SIP messages When symmetric TLS is enabled the IP phone uses port 5061 as the persistent TLS connection source port When symmetric TLS signaling is disabled the IP phone chooses a random persistent TLS connection source ...

Page 128: ...seconds the renewal REGISTER message will be sent 60 seconds prior to the expiration as half way 600 2 60 If the registration period was 100 seconds then the renewal would be sent at the half way point as 100 2 60 For more information see Chapter 4 Advanced SIP Settings optional on page 4 79 N A sip subscription timeout retry timer Applicable for all event packages this parameter controls how long...

Page 129: ...optional on page 4 79 BLA Subscription Period sip bla subscription period Specifies the amount of time in seconds that the phone waits to receive a BLA subscribe message from the server If you specify zero 0 the phone uses the value specified for the BLA expiration in the subscribe message received from the server If no value is specified the phone uses the default value of 300 seconds For more in...

Page 130: ...TIFY is coming from a trusted source it is recommended that you enable the Whitelist feature Whitelist Proxy parameter on the IP phone If enabled and the phone receives a SIP NOTIFY from a server that is NOT on the whitelist i e untrusted server the phone rejects the message For more information about XML SIP Notify see Chapter 6 the section XML SIP Notify Events on page 5 306 PARAMETER IN IP PHON...

Page 131: ...col RTP Settings on page 4 85 N A RTP Encryption Global and Per Line sip srtp mode global sip lineN srtp mode per line This parameter determines if SRTP is enabled on this IP phone as follows 3 If set to 0 then disable SRTP 4 If set to 1 then SRTP calls are preferred 5 If set to 2 then SRTP calls only are generated accepted For more information see Chapter 4 Real time Transport Protocol RTP Settin...

Page 132: ...mation see Chapter 4 Real time Transport Protocol RTP Settings on page 4 85 N A Silence Suppression sip silence suppression Silence suppression is enabled by default on the IP phones The phone negotiates whether or not to use silence suppression Disabling this feature forces the phone to ignore any negotiated value For more information see Chapter 4 Real time Transport Protocol RTP Settings on pag...

Page 133: ...ndset If this parameter is set to a value greater than 0 the phone waits the specified number of seconds before dialing the pre configured number warmline when you lift the handset Default is 0 hotline For more information see Chapter 4 Autodial Settings on page 4 98 N A Use Global Settings Per line configurations only N A For each line this parameter specifies to use the global autodial settings ...

Page 134: ...ttings Basic SIP Network Settings RTP Settings DTMF Method and RTP Encryption only Autodial Settings On a per line basis you can also enable disable the Use Global Settings parameter Additional Settings Missed Calls only i e configure missed calls indicator applicability for specific lines REFERENCES For more information about configuring the features listed above on a per line basis see the secti...

Page 135: ...oftkeys Programmable Keys Expansion Module Keys on page 5 140 IP PHONE MODEL SOFTKEYS EXPANSIONMODULE KEYS PROGRAMMABLE KEYS 6863i N A 3 6865i 16 to 48 Model M680i 84 to 252 Model M685i 8 6867i 6 top maximum of 20 functions 4 bottom maximum of 18 functions 16 to 48 Model M680i 84 to 252 Model M685i 6869i 12 top maximum of 44 functions 5 bottom maximum of 24 functions 16 to 48 Model M680i 84 to 252...

Page 136: ...P has not been configured i e the IP is 0 0 0 0 Note This action URI is not called when the same event is repeated for example a timeout occurs again when registration is already in a timeout state Incoming Call Specifies the URI for which the phone executes a GET on when an incoming call event occurs Outgoing Call Specifies the URI for which the phone executes a GET on when an outgoing call event...

Page 137: ...P Phones see Chapter 5 the section XML SIP Notify Events on page 5 306 POLLING ACTION URIS Another way to reach a phone behind a firewall is to have the phone make an XML call at periodic intervals An Administrator can use the action uri poll to command the phone to perform an XML call at configurable intervals An Administrator can specify the URI to be called and specify the interval between poll...

Page 138: ...PS Note For DHCP to automatically populate the IP address or domain name for the download servers your DHCP server must support Option 66 The IP phones also support Option 60 and 43 For more information see Chapter 4 the section DHCP on page 4 4 For more information about download protocols on the IP Phone see Chapter 4 Configuration Server Protocol on page 4 101 Primary TFTP TFTP Server tftp serv...

Page 139: ...this configuration file has been downloaded into the phone For more information see Chapter 4 Configuration Server Protocol on page 4 101 Alternate TFTP Path Alternate TFTP Path alternate tftp path Specifies the path name for which the configuration files reside on the Alternate TFTP server for downloading to the IP Phone If the IP phone s configuration and firmware files are located in a sub dire...

Page 140: ...n a sub directory beneath the server s root directory the relative path to that sub directory should be entered in this field For more information see Chapter 4 Configuration Server Protocol on page 4 101 FTP Username FTP Username ftp username The username to enter for accessing the FTP server This will become effective after this configuration file has been downloaded into the phone Note The IP P...

Page 141: ...rver s root directory the relative path to that sub directory should be entered in this field For more information see Chapter 4 Configuration Server Protocol on page 4 101 HTTP Port HTTP Port http port Specifies the HTTP port that the server uses to load the configuration to the phone over HTTP For more information see Chapter 4 Configuration Server Protocol on page 4 101 Download Server HTTPS Se...

Page 142: ...rectory beneath the server s root directory the relative path to that sub directory should be entered in this field For more information see Chapter 4 Configuration Server Protocol on page 4 101 Download Port HTTPS Port https port Specifies the HTTP port that the server uses to load the configuration to the phone over HTTP For more information see Chapter 4 Configuration Server Protocol on page 4 ...

Page 143: ...uto resync update Auto resync affects the configurationfilesonly However the settings in the Mitel Web UI take precedenceovertheIPphoneUIand the configuration files 3 The resync time is based on the local time of the IP phone 4 If the IP phone is in use not idle at the time of the resync check the reboot occurs when the phone becomes idle 5 The automatic update feature works with both encrypted an...

Page 144: ...mecanbe entered as 02 56 For more information see Chapter 8 the section Using the Auto Resync Feature on page 8 6 N A Maximum Delay auto resync max delay Specifies the maximum time in minutes the phone waits past the scheduled time before starting a checksync For more information see Chapter 8 the section Using the Auto Resync Feature on page 8 6 N A Days auto resync days Specifies the amount of d...

Page 145: ...dates and configuration files during the boot process Setting an Auto Resync feature to automatically update the firmware configuration files or both at a specific time in a 24 hour period Feature can be enabled using the configu ration files or the Mitel Web UI REFERENCE For more information about firmware update see Chapter 8 Upgrading the Firmware XML PUSH SERVER LIST APPROVED IP ADDRESSES N A ...

Page 146: ...t protocol Specifies the protocol that the IP phone uses to send out SIP messages Default is UDP Notes 1 If you set the value of this parameter to 4 TLS the phone checks to see if the sips persistent tls is enabled If it is enabled the phone uses Persistent TLS on the connection If sipspersistenttls is disabled then the phone uses TLS on the connection If TLS is used you must specify the Root and ...

Page 147: ... the phone this call and all subsequent calls use the same authenticated connection This significantly reduces the delay time when placing a call Notes 1 There can be only one persistent TLS connection created per phone 2 If you configure the phone to use Persistent TLS you must also specify the Trusted Certificate file to use The Root and Intermediate Certificates Local Certificate and Private Ke...

Page 148: ...which will send CRLF to peer periodically The phone will retry the connection automatically when a persistent TLS connection is down When a persistent TLS connection is re established primary is up or primary is down and backup is up refresh registration of the accounts associated with the connection When a persistent TLS connection to primary is down switch to backup if connection to backup is wo...

Page 149: ...his parameter is required when configuring TLS optional for Persistent TLS Note The certificate files must use the format pem To create custom certificate files to use on your IP phone contact Mitel Technical Support For more information see Chapter 6 the section Transport Layer Security TLS on page 6 21 N A Local Certificate Filename sips local certificate Allows you to specify the Local Certific...

Page 150: ...hone uses the TLS transport protocol to setup a call The Trusted Certificate files define a list of trusted certificates The phone s trusted list must contain the CA root certificates for all the servers it is connecting to For example if the phone is connecting to server A which has a certificate signed by CA1 and server B that has a certificate signed by CA2 the phone must have CA1 root certific...

Page 151: ...tificates and private keys PARAMETER IN IP PHONE UI PARAMETER IN MITEL WEB UI PARAMETERS IN CONFIGURATION FILES DESCRIPTION GENERAL 802 1x Mode EAP Type eap type Specifies the type of authentication to use on the IP Phone For more information see Chapter 6 the section 802 1x Support on page 6 24 Identity Identity identity Specifies the identity or username used for authenticating the phone Note Th...

Page 152: ...ificate Specifies the file name that contains the local certificate For more information see Chapter 6 the section 802 1x Support on page 6 24 N A Private Key Filename 802 1x private key Specifies the file name that contains the private key For more information see Chapter 6 the section 802 1x Support on page 6 24 N A Trusted Certificates Filename 802 1x trusted certificates Specifies the file nam...

Page 153: ...ile to a specified location if logged on using the Visitor Desk Phone feature Save the current user_local configuration file to a specified location if logged on using the Visitor Desk Phone feature Show task and stack status including Free Memory and Maximum Memory Block Size Enable disable a WatchDog task View System and Error Messages Enable disable the uploading of configuration and crash file...

Page 154: ...Chapter 4 CONFIGURING NETWORK AND SESSION INITIATION PROTOCOL SIP FEATURES ...

Page 155: ...on files the IP Phone UI and the Mitel Web UI where applicable TOPICS This chapter covers the following topics TOPIC PAGE Overview page 4 3 Network Settings page 4 4 Basic Network Settings page 4 4 Advanced Network Settings page 4 32 Global SIP Settings page 4 60 Basic SIP Settings page 4 60 Advanced SIP Settings optional page 4 79 Real time Transport Protocol RTP Settings page 4 85 RTCP Summary R...

Page 156: ...gure the phone using the Mitel Web UI you must enter an administrator username and password 7 REFERENCES For configuring the IP phone at theAsterisk IP PBX see Appendix B Configuring the IP Phone at the Asterisk IP PBX For sample configuration files see Appendix C Sample Configuration Files These sample files include basic parameters required to register the IP phone at the PBX Note An administrat...

Page 157: ... querying a DHCP server allowing a network administrator a centralized and automated method of configuring various network parameters for the phone If DHCP is enabled the IP phone requests the following network information Subnet Mask Gateway i e router Domain Name System DNS Server Network Time Protocol Server IP Address TFTP Server or Alternate TFTP Server if enabled on the phone TFTP Path or Al...

Page 158: ... procedure to enable disable DHCP on the phone using the IP Phone UI For the 6863i 6865i 1 Press on the phone to enter the Options List 2 Select Administrator Menu 3 Enter your Administrator password 4 Select Network Settings 5 Select option DHCP 6 Press Change to set Use DHCP to Yes enable or No disable 7 Press Done to save the changes For the 6867i 6869i 1 Press on the phone to enter the Options...

Page 159: ... UI 1 Click on Advanced Settings Network Basic Network Settings 2 Enable the DHCP field by checking the check box Disable this field by unchecking the box 3 Click Save Settings to save your settings DHCP OPTIONS 66 60 AND 43 SERVER CONFIGURATIONS Option 66 The IP Phones support download protocols as referenced in RFC2131 and RFC1541 TFTP FTP HTTP HTTPS to support DHCP option 66 Option 66 is part o...

Page 160: ...ed DHCP Option 60 Vendor Class Identifier information that includes firmware and bootrom information in addition to the identifier value If the parameter is configured as 0 disabled default the phone will send simply a DHCP Option 60 value consisting of the identifier value If the parameter is configured as 1 enabled the phone will send a DHCP Option 60 value consisting of the identifier value fir...

Page 161: ...IPPhone6867i option AastraIPPhone6867i cfg server name code 02 text option space AastraIPPhone6869i option AastraIPPhone6869i cfg server name code 02 text Subnet 192 168 1 0 netmask 255 255 255 0 class vendor class 6867i match if option vendor class identifier AastraIPPhone6867i vendor option space AastraIPPhone6867i option AastraIPPhone6867i cfg server name ftp username password 10 10 10 1 class ...

Page 162: ...with the existing code 2 sub option to set the configuration server PROTOCOL FORMAT EXAMPLES HTTP http server path option AastraIPPhone6869i cfg server name http 192 168 1 45 option AastraIPPhone6869i cfg server name http 192 168 1 45 path option AastraIPPhone6869i cfg server name http httpsvr example com path HTTPS https server path option AastraIPPhone6869i cfg server name https 192 168 1 45 opt...

Page 163: ...e outbound proxy server that can be used for all outbound SIP requests Using the use dhcp option 120 configuration parameter administrators can enable support for DHCP Option 120 on the IP phones This is particularly useful when service providers require the IP phones to use certain outbound proxy servers or Session Border Controllers SBCs based on geographical location and have provisioned the ou...

Page 164: ...n set in the configuration files see Appendix A the section DHCP Option Settings on page A 13 USING OPTION 132 802 1P VLAN ID AND OPTION 43 TO TRANSFER VLAN ID ASSIGNMENT USING DHCP There are now two ways of transporting the VLAN ID parameter in the Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP By DHCP Option 43 vendor specific information By DHCP Option 132 802 1P VLAN ID When the phone receives the V...

Page 165: ...option space AastraIPPhone option AastraIPPhone cfg server name code 02 text option AastraIPPhone contact rcs code 03 boolean option AastraIPPhone ActivateVLANHeader code 08 text option AastraIPPhone VLAN ID code 09 unsigned integer 32 class AastraSIP match if option vendor class identifier AastraIPPhone6863i or option vendor class identifier AastraIPPhone6865i or option vendor class identifier Aa...

Page 166: ...onfiguring DHCP Option 12 Hostname on the IP Phone Use the following procedures to configure DHCP Option 12 Hostname on the IP Phone For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files see Appendix A the section DHCP Option Settings on page A 13 For the 6863i 6865i 1 Press on the phone to enter the Options List 2 Select Administrator Menu 3 Select Network Settings 4 Select Hostname 5 By...

Page 167: ...y Valid values are up to 64 alpha numeric characters You can use a fully qualified domain name if required 7 Restart the phone for the change to take affect For the 6873i 1 Press on the phone to enter the Options List 2 Press the Advanced softkey 3 Enter the Administrator password and press the blue Enter key Default is 22222 4 Press the Network icon 5 Press the Settings icon 6 Press the Hostname ...

Page 168: ...onfiguration server This Option 77 defines specific User Class identifiers to convey information about a phone s software configuration or about its user s preferences For example you can use the User Class option to configure all phones in the Accounting Department with different user preferences than the phones in the Marketing Department A DHCP server uses the User Class option to choose the ad...

Page 169: ...o your phones then press DONE Valid values are up to 64 alpha numeric characters For example admin 7 Restart the phone for the change to take affect For the 6867i 6869i 1 Press on the phone to enter the Options List 2 Press the Advanced softkey 3 Enter the Administrator password using the keypad Default is 22222 4 Select Network Settings 5 Press the down navigation key to the DHCP User Class field...

Page 170: ...configuration files DHCP Download Options Mitel Web UI or Download Options IP Phone UI Setting this parameter results in the phone only using the chosen DHCP option and ignoring the other options For more information about setting DHCP download preference see Configuration Server Download Precedence on page 4 20 Configuring DHCP Download Options on the IP Phones Use the following procedures to con...

Page 171: ...ect Network Settings 5 Press the down navigation key to the DHCP Download Options field 6 Select one of the following DHCP download options using the left and right navigation keys Any default no override uses normal precedence order of 43 160 159 66 Option 43 Option 66 Option 159 Option 160 Disabled Ignores all DHCP configuration options 43 66 159 160 7 Press the Save softkey 8 Restart the phone ...

Page 172: ...the phone for the selection to take affect 1 Click on Advanced Settings Network Advanced Network Settings 2 In the DHCP Download Options field select an option to use to override the normal precedence order Valid values are Any default no override uses normal precedence order of 43 160 159 66 Option 43 Option 66 Option 159 Option 160 Disabled Ignores all DHCP configuration options 43 66 159 160 3 ...

Page 173: ...ure to configure the DHCP download precedence using the configuration files For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files see Appendix A the section DHCP Option Settings on page A 13 Configuring a Download Precedence Using the IP Phone UI Use the following procedure to configure a download precedence using the IP Phone UI For the 6863i 6865i 1 Press on the phone to enter the Optio...

Page 174: ...vanced softkey 3 Enter the Administrator password and press the blue Enter key Default is 22222 4 Press the Network icon 5 Press the Settings icon 6 Press the DHCP Download Options field 7 Select the Disabled value 8 Press the Save softkey 9 Restart the phone for the selection to take affect Note Disabled Ignores all DHCP configuration options 43 66 159 160 This option also performs the same funct...

Page 175: ...x second time interval before the next discovery request any DCHP offers received by the phone from the DHCP servers are serviced in the order that they are received If the first DHCP offer contains configuration server information Options 43 66 159 or 160 the offer is accepted and the phone stops listening for additional offers If the offer does not contain configuration server information the ph...

Page 176: ... time and speed of the servers a DHCP offer with no configuration server information may be accepted instead of an offer with configuration server information For example when three DHCP servers are available the fastest with no configuration server information defined the second fastest with no configuration server information defined but with an IP reserved for the phone and the slowest with con...

Page 177: ...s parameter values configured are not on the same subnet For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files see Appendix A the section Network Settings on page A 10 For the 6863i 6865i 1 Press on the phone to enter the Options List 2 Select Administrator Menu 3 Select Network Settings 4 Select IP Address and enter the IP address of the phone 5 Select Subnet Mask and enter the subnet ma...

Page 178: ... Press the Advanced softkey 3 Enter the Administrator password and press the blue Enter key Default is 22222 4 Press the Network icon 5 Press the Settings icon 6 In the IPAddress field enter the IP address of your phone The IPAddress must be entered in the format 0 0 0 0 for example 192 168 0 7 7 In the Subnet Mask field enter the subnet mask address For example 255 255 0 0 8 In the Gateway field ...

Page 179: ...figuration server your PC There are two Ethernet ports on the rear of the IP phones LAN Port and PC Port Using the Mitel Web UI you can select the type of transmission you want these ports to use to communicate over the LAN The IP phones support each of the following methods of transmission Auto negotiation Half duplex 10Mbps 100 Mbps or 1000Mbps if applicable Full duplex 10Mbps 100 Mbps or 1000Mb...

Page 180: ...u can set the half duplex transmission to transmit in 10Mbps or in 100Mbps For the 6865i 6867i 6869i and 6873i IP phones you can set the half duplex transmission to transmit in 1000Mbps Full Duplex 10Mbps 100Mbps or 1000Mbps Full duplex data transmission means that data can be transmitted in both directions on a signal carrier at the same time For example on a LAN with a technology that has full d...

Page 181: ... Select Network Settings 4 Select Ethernet 5 Select LAN Port Link 6 Select a negotiation method to use on port 0 and press Done Valid values are AutoNegotiation Full 10Mbps Full 100Mbps Full 1000Mbps applicable for the 6865i Half 10Mbps Half 100Mbps Half 1000Mbps applicable for the 6865i 7 Default is AutoNegotiation 8 Select PC Port Link 9 Select a negotiation method to use on port 1and press Done...

Page 182: ...egotiation Full 10Mbps Full 100Mbps Full 1000Mbps Half 10Mbps Half 100Mbps Half 1000Mbps 6 Default is AutoNegotiation 7 Press the left navigation key and press down to highlight PC Port 8 Select a negotiation method to use on port 1 Valid values are AutoNegotiation Full 10Mbps Full 100Mbps Full 1000Mbps Half 10Mbps Half 100Mbps Half 1000Mbps 9 Default is AutoNegotiation 10 Press the Save softkey 1...

Page 183: ...lf 10Mbps Half 100Mbps Half 1000Mbps Default is AutoNegotiation 7 Press PC Port 8 Select a negotiation method to use on port 1 Valid values are AutoNegotiation Full 10Mbps Full 100Mbps Full 1000Mbps Half 10Mbps Half 100Mbps Half 1000Mbps Default is AutoNegotiation 9 Press the Save softkey 10 Restart the phone for the selection to take affect Note If required swipe left on the screen to navigate to...

Page 184: ... 10Mbps Half Duplex 100Mbps Half Duplex 1000Mbps applicable for the 6865i 6867i 6869i and 6873i IP phones only Default is Auto Negotiation 3 In the PC Port field select a negotiation method to use on port 1 Valid values are Auto Negotiation Full Duplex 10Mbps Full Duplex 100Mbps Full Duplex 1000Mbps applicable for the 6865i 6867i 6869i and 6873i IP phones only Half Duplex 10Mbps Half Duplex 100Mbp...

Page 185: ...on files see Appendix A the sections Local SIP UDP TCP Port Setting on page A 31 Local SIP TLS Port on page A 32 Note The available advanced network parameters via the IP phone UI are VLAN and QoS only Notes 1 By default the IP phones use symmetric UDP signaling for outgoing UDP SIP messages When symmetric UDP is enabled the IP phone generates and listens for UDP messages using port 5060 If symmet...

Page 186: ...fault value of 5060 Change this value if required to a value greater than 1024 and less than 65535 3 The Local SIP TLS Port field has a default value of 5061 Change this value if required to a value greater than 1024 and less than 65535 4 Click Save Settings to save your changes MITEL WEB UI Note It is recommended that you avoid the conflict RTP port range in case of a UDP transport Note It is rec...

Page 187: ...of script files based on an HTTPS URL supplied by a softkey definition The HTTPS server provides HTTP functionality over secure connections It coexists with the HTTP server but has its own set of tasks The main HTTPS server functions are Delivery of web page content to a browser client over a secure connection Execution of HTTP GET and POST requests received over a secure connection Using the conf...

Page 188: ...L 3 0 The phone will attempt to communicate using SSL 3 0 only TLS Preferred The phone will initially attempt to communicate using TLS 1 0 If the TLS protocol is rejected the phone will automatically switch to the SSL 3 0 protocol 8 Press Done to save the changes Configure HTTPS Server 9 Select HTTPS Server 10 Select HTTP HTTPS 11 Press Change to select Yes or No Default is No Enabling this featur...

Page 189: ...g TLS 1 0 only TLS 1 1 The phone will attempt to communicate using TLS 1 1 only TLS 1 2 The phone will attempt to communicate using TLS 1 2 only SSL 3 0 The phone will attempt to communicate using SSL 3 0 only TLS Preferred The phone will initially attempt to communicate using TLS 1 0 If the TLS protocol is rejected the phone will automatically switch to the SSL 3 0 protocol Configure HTTPS Server...

Page 190: ...TLS 1 2 The phone will attempt to communicate using TLS 1 2 only SSL 3 0 The phone will attempt to communicate using SSL 3 0 only TLS Preferred The phone will initially attempt to communicate using TLS 1 0 If the TLS protocol is rejected the phone will automatically switch to the SSL 3 0 protocol Configure HTTPS Server 7 In the HTTPS Server field enter the IP address of the HTTPS server Enabling t...

Page 191: ... HTTPs server and the phones during an HTTPs session The certificate can be used for file download processes e g configuration file download for secure provisioning and for HTTPs XML requests Please go to www miteldocs com to obtain the client certificate HTTPS SERVER CERTIFICATE VALIDATION The HTTPS client on the IP Phones support validation of HTTPS certificates This feature supports the followi...

Page 192: ...an configure via the configuration files the IP Phone UI or the Mitel Web UI https validate certificates Enables disables validation https validate hostname Enables disables the checking of the certificate commonName against the server name https validate expires Enables disables the checking of the expiration date on the certificate SSL Certificate Subject Alternative Name SAN Support The 6800 Se...

Page 193: ...t will be matched identically with the DNS names and IP address names from the certificate SAN User Interface Certificate Rejection When the phone rejects a certificate it displays Bad Certificate on the LCD For Verisign Certificate Rejection The phones support 2048 bit Verisign certificates In case of a certificate error detailed descriptions can be found from the error message list in the phone ...

Page 194: ...es screen Enable Disable HTTPS Validate Certificate Expiration 8 Select Check Expires 9 Press Change to toggle the Check Expires field to Yes or No 10 Press DONE to save the change and return to the Certificates screen Enable Disable HTTPS Validate Hostname 11 Select Check Hostnames 12 Press Change to toggle the Check Hostnames field to Yes or No IP PHONE UI Note If you are using HTTPS as a config...

Page 195: ...e Enable Disable HTTPS Validate Hostname 8 In the Check Hostnames checkbox press the button to enable the feature 9 Press the Save softkey 10 Restart the phone for the selection to take affect For the 6873i 1 Press on the phone to enter the Options List 2 Press the Advanced softkey 3 Enter the Administrator password using the keypad Default is 22222 4 Press the Configuration Server icon 5 In the D...

Page 196: ...k mark in the box to clear the check mark When this parameter is enabled the HTTPS client verifies whether or not a certificate has expired prior to accepting the certificate 4 The Check Certificate Hostnames field is enabled by default To disable validation of hostnames click the check mark in the box to clear the check mark MITEL WEB UI Notes 1 This parameter is immediately applied after clickin...

Page 197: ...tag VLAN on the IP phones is disabled by default When you enable VLAN the IP phone provides defaults for all VLAN parameters If you choose to change these parameters you can configure them using the configuration files the IP Phone UI or the Mitel Web UI The following sections describe the VLAN features you can configure on the IP phones TYPE OF SERVICE TOS QUALITY OF SERVICE QOS AND DIFFSERV QOS ...

Page 198: ...nable in the Web UI vlan id or vlan id port 1 parameters 2 Setting the LAN Port VLAN ID vlan id to 4095 and PC Port VLAN ID vlan id port 1 to any ID from 1 to 4094 will allow frames from the PC Port containing a VLAN ID to be untagged before being forwarded to the LAN Port and frames from the LAN Port without a VLAN ID to be tagged with the configured VLAN ID before being forwarded to the PC Port ...

Page 199: ...SCP values just the VLAN priority values or by modifying all values The following table shows the DSCP range VLAN priority mapping The following table identifies the default DSCP values for the protocols Configuring Type of Service ToS DSCP optional Use the following procedures to configure ToS DSCP on the IP phone For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files see Appendix A the s...

Page 200: ...222 4 Select Network DSCP 5 Enter a value for Type of Service SIP Default is 26 or Enter a value for Type of Service RTP Default is 46 or Enter a value for Type of Service RTCP Default is 46 Valid values are 0 to 63 6 Press the Save softkey Note If you change the ToS DSCP setting for a Protocol and VLAN is enabled you will need to map the applicable priority to the Protocol setting as shown in the...

Page 201: ...values are 0 to 63 7 Press the Save softkey 8 Restart the phone for the selection to take affect 1 Click on Advanced Settings Network Type of Service DSCP 2 Select a Protocol field SIP or RTP or RTCP 3 Enter a value from 0 to 63 Default values are as follows SIP 26 RTP 46 Note If required swipe left on the screen to navigate to the second page of options Note If you change the ToS DSCP setting for...

Page 202: ... Settings on page A 37 Note If you change the ToS DSCP setting for a Protocol and VLAN is enabled you will need to map the applicable priority to the Protocol setting as shown in the first table in DSCP Range VLAN Priority Mapping on page 4 45 For more information see the section Configuring VLAN optional on page 4 49 Note VLAN is disabled by default When you enable VLAN the IP phones use the defa...

Page 203: ...pecify the VLAN ID for the LAN Port Default is 1 Example You enable tagging on the phone port as normal but set the LAN Port VLAN ID to 4095 and the PC Port VLAN ID to any ID from 1 to 4094 The following example sets the PC port to be on VLAN 3 but the LAN port is configured as untagged VLAN Settings VLAN Enable VLAN Settings LAN Port VLAN LAN Port VLAN ID 4095 VLAN Settings PC Port VLAN PC Port V...

Page 204: ...tings VLAN Enable VLAN Settings LAN Port VLAN LAN Port VLAN ID 3 VLAN Settings PC Port VLAN PC Port VLAN ID 4095 21 Press Enter or Set to save the change 22 Select PC Port Priority 23 Select a PC Port VLAN priority value from 0 to 7 for the PC Port Default is 0 24 Press Done to save the changes 25 Navigate back to the Options List menu 26 Select Restart Phone and follow the prompts to restart the ...

Page 205: ...or the LAN Port Default is 5 10 In the LAN Port VLAN RTCP Priority field enter a value from 0 to 7 to specify the RTCP priority for the LAN Port Default is 5 To set VLAN ID and priority for PC Port Port 1 11 In the PC Port VLAN PC Port VLAN ID field enter a value from 1 to 4095 to specify the VLAN ID for the LAN Port Default is 4095 Example You enable tagging on the phone port as normal but set th...

Page 206: ...AN Port Port 0 8 In the LAN Port VLAN LAN Port VLAN ID field enter a value from 1 to 4095 to specify the VLAN ID for the LAN Port Default is 1 Example You enable tagging on the phone port as normal but set the LAN Port VLAN ID to 4095 and the PC Port VLAN ID to any ID from 1 to 4094 The following example sets the PC port to be on VLAN 3 but the LAN port is configured as untagged VLAN Settings VLAN...

Page 207: ... LAN port to be on VLAN 3 but the PC port is configured as untagged VLAN Settings VLAN Enable VLAN Settings LAN Port VLAN LAN Port VLAN ID 3 VLAN Settings PC Port VLAN PC Port VLAN ID 4095 13 In the PC Port VLAN Priority field enter a value from 0 to 7 to specify the PC Port VLAN priority Default is 0 14 Press the Save softkey 15 Restart the phone for the selection to take affect 1 Click on Advanc...

Page 208: ...ol Valid values are 0 to 7 Defaults are as follows SIP Priority 3 RTP Priority 5 RTCP Priority 5 To set VLAN ID and priority for the PC Port Port 1 6 Enter a VLAN ID value from 1 to 4095 in the VLAN ID field Default is 4095 Example You enable tagging on the phone port as normal but set the PC Port VLAN ID to 4095 and Note Setting the LAN Port VLAN ID to 4095 and PC Port VLAN ID to any ID from 1 to...

Page 209: ...r the Via header called Rport in RFC 3581 allows a client to request that the server send the response back to the source IP address and the port from which the request came When you enable Rport the phone always uses symmetric signaling listens on the port used for sending requests An Administrator can configure Rport using the configuration files or the Mitel Web UI Configuring Rport Using the C...

Page 210: ...in RFC 3581 allows a client to request that the server send the response back to the source IP address and the port from which the request came 3 Click Save Settings to save your changes NETWORK TIME SERVERS Network Time Protocol NTP is a protocol that the IP phone uses to synchronize the phone clock time with a computer configuration server in the network To use NTP you must enable it using the c...

Page 211: ... Server 3 5 Enter the IP Address in dotted decimal or qualified domain name for the Time Server 6 Press Done to save the change For the 6867i 6869i 1 Press on the phone to enter the Options List 2 Select Time and Date Set Date and Time 3 In the Timer Server 1 Time Server 2 and or Time Server 3 fields enter the respective IP address in dotted decimal or qualified domain name 4 Press the Save softke...

Page 212: ...asic Settings Preferences Time and Date Setting 2 Enable the NTP Time Servers field by checking the check box Disable this field by unchecking the box Default is disabled 3 Enter an IP address or qualified domain name in the Time Server 1 Time Server 2 and or Time Server 3 field s to specify the location of the NTP time server 4 Click Save Settings to save your changes MITEL WEB UI ...

Page 213: ...authentication and network see Basic SIP Settings on page 4 60 For more information about Advanced SIP Settings see Advanced SIP Settings optional on page 4 79 BASIC SIP SETTINGS Specific parameters are configurable on a global and per line basis You can also configure specific parameters using the IP Phone UI the Mitel Web UI or the configuration files If you have a proxy server or have a SIP reg...

Page 214: ... name sip password sip bla number sip mode call waiting see Chapter 5 Configuring Operational Features sip vmail SIP GLOBAL NETWORK PARAMETERS Proxy Server Proxy Port Registrar Server Registrar Port Proxy Server Proxy Port Backup Proxy Server Backup Proxy Port Outbound Proxy Server Outbound Proxy Port Backup Outbound Proxy Backup Outbound Proxy Port Registrar Server Registrar Port Backup Registrar...

Page 215: ...TWORK PARAMETERS Proxy Server Proxy Port Registrar Server Registrar Port Proxy Server Proxy Port Backup Proxy Server Backup Proxy Port Outbound Proxy Server Outbound Proxy Port Backup Outbound Proxy Server Backup Outbound Proxy Port Registrar Server Registrar Port Backup Registrar Server Backup Registrar Port Registration Period Conference Server URI see Chapter 5 Configuring Operational Features ...

Page 216: ...meters you can set in the configuration files seeAppendixA the section SIP Basic Global Settings on page A 72 SIP PRECEDENCE EXAMPLE The following example shows the SIP proxy feature and example schema for storage and parsing of the SIP configuration parameters The following SIP configuration is assumed SIP network block sip proxy ip 10 30 11 154 sip proxy port 5060 sip registrar ip 10 44 122 37 s...

Page 217: ...ture using the following parameter in the configuration files sip outbound support DNS A Record Flow Behavior for SIP Outbound Proxies Using Persistent TLS When the sip outbound support parameter is enabled and the phone is configured to use the DNS A query method to resolve FQDNs for outbound proxies if multiple IP addresses are provided the phone establishes a persistentTLS connection with the f...

Page 218: ...ypes The ability to configure the SIP outbound keep alive timer The ability to reestablish failed outbound connections in the background The ability to support the DNS Cache Time to Live TTL requirements Using this feature depends on the SIP network settings on your phone The following table identifies network configuration scenarios and the method by which this specific feature works in each scen...

Page 219: ...ns are performed again through the primary outbound proxy SIP OUTBOUND ENABLED AND backup proxy and backup registrar configured Establishes flow to the primary proxy and registrar If the flow to the primary registrar fails the phone establishes flow to the backup registrar registers to the backup registrar attempts to reestablish flow to the primary registrar in the background When the primary reg...

Page 220: ... the phone registers the primary AOR to the primary registrar moves the subscriptions to the primary proxy unregisters unsubscribes from the backup proxy registrar backup outbound proxy configured only Establishes a flow to the primary outbound proxy If the flow fails the phone establishes the flow to the backup proxy registers the backup AOR to the backup registrar moves subscriptions to the back...

Page 221: ...Name Query to resolve the FQDN into dot notation form If the IP address is a valid dot notation and the port is zero then a default port 5060 is used You can configure SRV lookup using the configuration files startup cfg and mac cfg only The parameters to use are sip proxy ip sip proxy port CONTACT HEADER MATCHING When sending SIP packets the IP Phones observe the Contact header by matching the us...

Page 222: ...pecific parameters you can set in the configuration files see Appendix A the section SIP Basic Global Settings on page A 72 or SIP Basic Per Line Settings on page A 81 For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files for call waiting see the section Call Waiting Settings on page A 75 or SIP Per Line Call Waiting Setting on page A 86 Reference For more information about setting the ca...

Page 223: ...ne to enter the Options List 2 Press the Advanced softkey 3 Enter the Administrator password using the keypad Default is 22222 4 Select SIP User 5 In the User Name field enter the username that appears in the name field of the SIP URI This user name is also used for registering the phone at the registrar 6 In the Display Name field enter the name used in the display name field of the From SIP head...

Page 224: ...r 7 In the Display Name field enter the name used in the display name field of the From SIP header 8 In the Screen Name field enter the name to display on the idle screen 9 In the Auth Name field enter the authorization name used in the username field of the Authorization header field of the SIP REGISTER request 10 In the Password field enter the password used to register the IP phone with the SIP...

Page 225: ...ou want to display on the phone under the Screen Name on the idle screen 5 In the Phone Number field enter the phone number of the IP phone 6 In the Caller ID field enter the phone number of the IP phone 7 In the Authentication Name field enter the name used in the username field of the Authorization header of the SIP REGISTER request Notes 1 Ifotherstatusmessagesdisplayonthephone suchas NetworkDi...

Page 226: ...Line Call Waiting 12 The Call Waiting field is set to Global by default To enable call waiting for a specific line select enabled from the list in this field To disable call waiting for a specific line select disabled from the list in this field For more information about setting the call waiting parameters see Chapter 5 the section Call Waiting on page 5 75 13 Click Save Settings to save your cha...

Page 227: ...stration However the phone is still active and you can dial using username ip address of the phone If the Registrar IP address is set to 0 0 0 0 for a per line basis i e line 1 line 2 etc then the register request is not sent the No Service message does not display and the mes sage waiting indicator MWI does not come on 10 Enter a Registrar Port number in the Registrar Port field for accessing the...

Page 228: ...erver field Default is 0 0 0 0 A global value of 0 0 0 0 disables registration However the phone is still active and you can dial using username ip address of the phone If the Registrar IP address is set to 0 0 0 0 for a per line basis i e line 1 line 2 etc then the register request is not sent the No Service message does not display and the mes sage waiting indicator MWI does not come on 8 In the...

Page 229: ...ost name in the Registrar Server field Default is 0 0 0 0 A global value of 0 0 0 0 disables registration However the phone is still active and you can dial using username ip address of the phone If the Registrar IP address is set to 0 0 0 0 for a per line basis i e line 1 line 2 etc then the register request is not sent the No Service message does not display and the mes sage waiting indicator MW...

Page 230: ...Settings 2 Or for per line configuration click on Advanced Settings Line N Basic SIP Network Settings 3 In the Proxy Server field enter an IP address or fully qualified host name of the SIP proxy server 4 In the Proxy Port field enter a port number for accessing the SIP proxy server 5 In the Backup Proxy Server field enter an IP address or fully qualified host name for the backup proxy server MITE...

Page 231: ...vice message does not display and the mes sage waiting indicator MWI does not come on 12 In the Registrar Port field enter the port number associated with the Registrar 13 In the Backup Registrar Server field enter an IP address or fully qualified host name for the backup registrar server A global value of 0 0 0 0 disables registration However the phone is still active and you can dial using usern...

Page 232: ...r 6 Configuring Advanced Operational Features Send MAC Address in REGISTER Message see Chapter 6 Configuring Advanced Operational Features Send Line Number in REGISTER Message see Chapter 6 Configuring Advanced Operational Features sip send mac see Chapter 6 Configuring Advanced Operational Features sip send line see Chapter 6 Configuring Advanced Operational Features Session Timer sip session tim...

Page 233: ...er toAppendixA Advanced SIP Settings on page 98 for a description of each of the above parameters For more information about Blacklist Duration and Whitelist Proxy see Chapter 6 Configuring Advanced Operational Features CONFIGURING ADVANCED SIP SETTINGS Use the following procedures to configure the advanced SIP settings on the IP phone For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files...

Page 234: ...this field by unchecking the check box Default is disabled If the IP phone has a message waiting subscription with the Service Provider a Message Waiting Indicator MWI LED or display icon tells the user there is a message on the IP Phone 3 If you enable the Explicit MWI Subscription field then in the Explicit MWI Subscrip tion Period field enter the requested duration in seconds before the MWI sub...

Page 235: ...essage features see Chapter 6 the section TR 069 Support on page 6 8 8 In the Session Timer field enter the time in seconds that the IP phone uses to send periodic re INVITE requests to keep a session alive The proxy uses these re INVITE requests to maintain the status of the connected sessions See RFC4028 for details 9 In the Timer 1 and Timer 2 fields enter a time in milliseconds that will apply...

Page 236: ...ected by the reg istrar Valid values are 30 to 1800 Default is 1800 15 In the Registration Timeout Retry Timer field enter the amount of time in seconds that the phone waits until it re attempts to register after a REGISTER message times out Valid values are 30 to 2147483647 Default is 120 16 In the Registration Renewal Timer field enter the threshold value in seconds prior to expiration that the ...

Page 237: ... to a failed server if another server is available for this amount of time 21 For information about setting the Blacklist Duration see Chapter 6 the section Blacklist Duration on page 6 17 22 In the Park Pickup Config field enter the appropriate value based on the server in your network 23 Enable the Whitelist Proxy field by checking the check box Disable this field by unchecking the check box Def...

Page 238: ...ne pair of ports for each media stream The RTP port is assigned to the first line on the phone and is then incremented for each subsequent line available within the phone to provided each line a unique RTP port for its own use On the IP phone the initial port used as the starting point for RTP RTCP port allocation can be configured using RTP Port Base The default RTP base port on the IP phones is ...

Page 239: ...ODEC is an acronym for COmpress DECompress It consists of a set of instructions that together implement one or more algorithms In the case of IP telephony these algorithms are used to compress the sampled speech data to decrease the content s file size and bit rate the amount of network bandwidth in kilobits per second required to transfer the audio With smaller file sizes and lower bit rates the ...

Page 240: ...ers have also been created to configure this feature Administrators can enable the feature by using the sip amr codec payload format which specifies the payload format for AMR AMR WB AMR AMR WB can operate in either bandwidth efficient mode 0 or in octet aligned mode 1 depending on the value configured Administrators can also disable the octet align mode and still send the octet align 0 header in ...

Page 241: ...R WB codec modes and corresponding bit rates AMR Codec Modes AMR WB G 722 2 Codec Modes AMR MODE BIT RATE KBPS 0 4 75 1 5 15 2 5 90 3 6 70 4 7 40 5 7 95 6 10 2 7 12 2 AMR WB MODE BIT RATE KBPS 0 6 60 1 8 85 2 12 65 3 14 25 4 15 85 5 18 25 6 19 85 7 23 05 8 23 85 ...

Page 242: ...used for transfer of the RTP stream You enter the ptime values for the customized codec list in milliseconds See table below Silsupp is used to enable or disable silence suppression Voice Activity Detection VAD on the IP phones is used to determine whether each individual packet contains useful speech data Enabling silsupp results in decreased network bandwidth by avoiding the transmission of RTP ...

Page 243: ...729 8000 G 729 96 G726 40 8000 G 726 40 97 G726 24 8000 G 726 24 98 G726 16 8000 G 726 16 110 G711u 16000 G711u 16K 111 G711a 16000 G711a 16K 112 L16 8000 L16 8K 113 L16 16000 L16 16K 115 G726 32 8000 G 726 32 118 AMR AMR Licensed feature 119 AMR WB G 722 2 AMR WB Licensed feature 121 G 722 1 G 722 1 Leave blank for all codecs All Codec 1 only Basic Codec 1 only None Codecs 2 thru 10 only ptime in...

Page 244: ...y clamped muted and DTMF digits are not sent in the RTP packets You can configure out of band DTMF on a global basis using the configuration files or the Mitel Web UI An additional feature on the IP phone allows you to select the DTMF method that the phone uses to send DTMF digits from the IP phone via INFO messages You can set the DTMF method as Real TimeTransport Protocol RTP SIP INFO or both Yo...

Page 245: ...es RTP secured calls and accepts both secured and non secured RTP calls If the receiving phone is not SRTP enabled it sends non secured RTP calls instead SRTP Only IP phone generates and accepts RTP secured calls only all other calls are rejected fail You can override the global setting as necessary configuring SRTP support on a per line basis This allows IP phone users to have both secured and un...

Page 246: ...p remove silence suppression offer is available allowing administrators the ability to control whether or not the silence suppression attribute should be included in the Session Description Protocol SDP offer If enabled 1 the silence suppression attribute will be removed from the SDP offer If disabled 0 the attribute will not be removed from the SDP offer This parameter is disabled by default and ...

Page 247: ...fault is 3000 6 Press the Save softkey 7 Restart the phone for the change to take affect For the 6873i 1 Press on the phone to enter the Options List 2 Press the Advanced softkey 3 Enter the Administrator password and press the blue Enter key Default is 22222 4 Press the SIP icon 5 Press the Call Server icon 6 In the RTP Port Base field enter an RTP port base setting Default is 3000 7 Press the Sa...

Page 248: ...way or router The RTP port is used for sending DTMF tones and for the audio stream Your network administrator may close some ports for security reasons You may want to use this parameter to send RTP data using a different port 4 The Force RFC2833 Out of Band DTMF field is enabled by default Disable this field by unchecking the box Enabling this parameter forces the IP phone to use out of band DTMF...

Page 249: ...hrough Codec 10 select a preference of codecs to use on the phone Valid values are Note You can configure the DTMF Method on a global or per line basis Note You can configure RTP Encryption on a global or per line basis Notes 1 Setting Codec 1 to All ignores the packetization interval ptime The packetization interval setting defaults to 30 which is the default for all codecs 2 Setting Codec 1 to A...

Page 250: ...ability of enabling disabling the generation of RTCP summary reports using the SIP vq rtcpxr event package These RTCP summary reports include voice qualitystatisticsaccordingtodraft ietf sipping rtcp summary 05specificationsincludingpacket loss jitter and delay statistics as well as call quality scores When this feature is enabled an RTCP summary report is sent at the end of each call via a PUBLIS...

Page 251: ...dials a pre configured number whenever it is off hook Depending on the configuration you specify the Autodial functions as either a hotline or as a warmline as follows Hotline default The IP phone immediately dials a preconfigured number when you lift the handset Warmline The IP phone waits for a specified amount of time after you lift the handset before dialing a pre configured number If you do n...

Page 252: ...specific parameters you can set in the configuration files see Appendix A the section Autodial Settings on page A 125 CONFIGURING AUTODIAL USING THE MITEL WEB UI Use the following procedure to configure Autodial using the Mitel Web UI By default your IP phone uses the global settings you specify for Autodial for all lines on your IP phone However you can also configure Autodial on a per line basis...

Page 253: ...e Global Settings parameter to enable it then click Save Settings to save your changes To specify a different autodial configuration for this specific line disable the Use Global Settings parameter Then proceed to step 3 3 In the Autodial Number field specify the SIP number for this line that the IP phone dials whenever the IP phone is off hook as follows If set to 1 then the global autodial setti...

Page 254: ...ated by the FTP server The TFTP setting is the default download protocol You can configure the type of protocol that the IP phones use by setting it in the configuration files the IP phone UI or the Mitel Web UI CONFIGURING THE CONFIGURATION SERVER PROTOCOL Use the following procedure to configure the configuration server protocol For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files see ...

Page 255: ...S Default is Use TFTP The IP phone uses the protocol you select to download new firmware and configuration files from the configuration server 6 Press Set to save the changes 7 From the Configuration Server menu select from the following This selection is dependent on the Download Protocol you selected in step 6 TFTP Settings FTP Settings HTTP Settings HTTPS Settings 8 Enter the IP address of the ...

Page 256: ...Set to save the change Select Alt TFTP Path Enter the path name for which the configuration files reside on the Alternate TFTP server for downloading to the IP Phone If the IP phone s files are located in a sub directory beneath the server s root directory the relative path to that sub directory should be entered in this field Enter the path name in the form folderX folderX folderX For example ipp...

Page 257: ...iles reside on the HTTPS server for downloading to the IP Phone If the IP phone s files are located in a sub directory beneath the server s root directory the relative path to that sub directory should be entered in this field Enter the path name in the form folderX folderX folderX For example ipphone 6863i configfiles Press Done or Set Select Client Method Select the client method to use for down...

Page 258: ...keypad Default is 22222 4 Select Configuration Server 5 In the Download Protocol field select the protocol you want the phone to use for down loading from the configuration server Valid values are TFTP Default FTP HTTP HTTPS The IP phone uses the protocol you select to download new firmware and configuration files from the configuration server Note For more information on configuring the HTTPS sec...

Page 259: ...col field select the protocol you want the phone to use for down loading from the configuration server Valid values are TFTP Default FTP HTTP HTTPS The IP phone uses the protocol you select to download new firmware and configuration files from the configuration server 6 After selecting the download protocol you must identify specific parameters for that specific protocol IP PHONE UI Note If requir...

Page 260: ...al You can enter a username and password for accessing the FTP server if required by entering them in the FTP Username and FTP Password fields HTTP SETTINGS In the HTTP Server field enter the IP address of the HTTP server In the HTTP Port field enter the HTTP port that the server uses to load the configuration to the phone over HTTP Default is 80 In the HTTP Path field enter the path name for whic...

Page 261: ...uration Server Protocol 4 108 1 Click on Advanced Settings Configuration Server 2 Select the protocol from the Download Protocol list box Valid values are TFTP FTP HTTP and HTTPS Default is TFTP MITEL WEB UI ...

Page 262: ...in the form folderX folderX folderX For example ipphone 6867i configfiles Optional You can enter a username and password for accessing the FTP server if required Enter a username for a user that will access the FTP server in the FTP User Name field Enter a password for a user that allows access to the FTP server in the FTP Password field HTTP Enter an IP address or fully qualified domain name in t...

Page 263: ...guration Server Protocol 4 110 3 Click Save Settings to save your settings 4 Select Operation Reset and click Restart Note The session prompts you to restart the IP phone to apply the configuration settings ...

Page 264: ...Chapter 5 CONFIGURING OPERATIONAL FEATURES ...

Page 265: ...ting page 5 17 Time and Date page 5 18 Backlight Mode page 5 32 Display page 5 33 Background Image on Idle Screen page 5 35 Configurable Home Idle Screen Modes page 5 36 Configurable Home Idle Screen Font Color page 5 39 Screen Saver page 5 40 Screen Saver Background Image Support page 5 41 Picture ID Feature page 5 43 Audio DHSG Headset page 5 44 USB Headset Support page 5 46 Audio Hi Q on G 722 ...

Page 266: ...ber ELIN page 5 99 Incoming Outgoing Intercom with Auto Answer and Barge In page 5 103 Group Paging RTP Settings page 5 106 Speeddial Key Mapping page 5 109 Send DTMF for Remapping Conference or Redial Key page 5 111 Ring Tones and Tone Sets page 5 112 Customizable Ringing Ring Back TimeOut Period page 5 123 Custom Ring Tones page 5 123 Ring Tone via Speaker During Active Calls page 5 125 Individu...

Page 267: ...orks Servers page 5 192 Do Not Disturb DND page 5 198 Bridged Line Appearance BLA page 5 207 BLA Support for Third Party Registration page 5 213 P Preferred Identity Header for BLA Accounts page 5 214 BLA Support for Message Waiting Indicator MWI page 5 214 Shared Call Appearance SCA Call Bridging page 5 216 Park Pick Up Static and Programmable Configuration page 5 220 Last Call Return LCR Sylantr...

Page 268: ...age 5 315 Configurable Indication of Terminated Calls page 5 316 Centralized Conferencing for Sylantro and BroadSoft Servers page 5 316 Custom Ad Hoc Conference page 5 321 SIP Join Feature for 3 Way Conference page 5 321 Conference Transfer Support for Live Dial Mode page 5 322 Authentication Support for HTTP HTTPS Download Methods used with BroadSoft Client Management System CMS page 5 323 Custom...

Page 269: ... A the section Password Settings on page A 16 For the 6863i 6865i 5 Press on the phone to enter the Options List 6 Select User Password 7 Enter the current user password 8 Press Enter 9 Enter the new user password 10 Press Enter 11 Re enter the new user password 12 Press Enter A message Password Changed displays on the screen Note The IP phones support numeric characters only in passwords If you e...

Page 270: ...ssword 6 In the Re enter Password field re enter the user password 7 Press Save 1 Click on Operation User Password 2 In the Current Password field enter the current user password 3 In the New Password field enter the new user password 4 In the Password Confirm field enter the new user password again 5 Click Save Settings to save your changes RESETTING A USER PASSWORD If a user forgets his password...

Page 271: ...strator can also assign a password for using the Options key on the IP phone You turn this feature on and off by entering the options password enabled parameter followed by a valid value in the configuration files Valid values are 0 false Options key not password protected or 1 true Options key password protected If this parameter is set to 1 a user has to enter a password at the IP phone UI If th...

Page 272: ...UI at the path Options Lock Using the Mitel Web UI via the path Operation Phone Lock Using the configuration files to configure a softkey as phonelock and then pressing the key to lock unlock the phone Using the Mitel Web UI to configure a softkey as Phone Lock and then pressing the key to lock unlock the phone LOCKING UNLOCKING THE PHONE USING THE IP PHONE UI Use the following IP Phone UI procedu...

Page 273: ... An Enter Unlock Password prompt displays 2 Enter the user or administrator password and press Enter Default is 22222 A prompt Unlock the Phone displays 3 Select Yes to unlock the phone For the 6873i Lock the phone 1 Press on the phone to enter the Options List 2 Press the Lock icon 3 Press the Phone Lock icon The prompt Lock the phone displays 4 Press Yes to lock the phone Unlock the phone 1 Pres...

Page 274: ...e phone unlocks dynamically and displays the following message Phone is unlocked CONFIGURING A LOCK UNLOCK KEY USING THE CONFIGURATION FILES Using the configuration files you can configure a key on the phone softkey programmable key or expansion module key to use as a lock unlock key In the configuration files you assign the function of the key as phonelock Use the following procedure to configure...

Page 275: ... the following procedure to configure a key as a lock unlock key using the Mitel Web UI 1 Click on Operation Softkeys and XML or Click on Operation Programmable Keys or Click on Operation Expansion Module N 2 Select a key you want to configure for locking unlocking the phone 3 In the Type field select Phone Lock from the list of options 4 Click Save Settings to save your changes Using the Configur...

Page 276: ...he softkey AND the Message Waiting Lamp go OFF The Lock label appears next to the softkey you just pressed For the 6867i 6869i Lock the phone 1 Press the Lock softkey The phone locks The message Phone is Locked displays on the screen Unlock the phone 1 Press the Unlock softkey A password prompt displays 2 Enter the user or administrator password and press the button or Enter softkey Default is 222...

Page 277: ... emergency call features are enabled the enabled emergency call behaviors will be applied The following table describes the default emergency numbers on the IP phones Note The default local dial plan is configured to allow for all emergency numbers to be dialed out when the phone is unlocked If you change the local dial plan ensure it is configured to take into consideration any emergency services...

Page 278: ...dial key number is 5000 the call will not dial out If a pre dial or speeddial key number is 91 the call will not dial out If a pre dial or speeddial key number is 911 the call will be dialed out as 911 If a pre dial or speeddial key number is 9112 the call will be dialed out as 9112 EMERGENCY DIAL PLAN AND PREFIX DIALING The IP phones also support a prefix dialing feature for outgoing emergency ca...

Page 279: ...r multiple numbers enter a between each emergency number For example 911 110 Default for this field is 911 999 112 110 You can enter up to 512 characters in this field 3 Click Save Settings to save the emergency dial plan to your phone CONFIGURABLE EMERGENCY CALL BEHAVIOR Administrators have the option of changing the default behavior of the IP phones when an emergency call i e a call made to an e...

Page 280: ...tive Forced Disconnect As the Connection Hold feature ensures that the caller cannot termi nate the call the only way the call can be terminated is if the emergency services agent forces the disconnection by ending the call himself herself The emergency call connection hold enabled parameter is disabled by default CONFIGURING EMERGENCY CALL BEHAVIOR Use the following procedures to configure the IP...

Page 281: ...er Parameter Dial Plan Use the following procedure to configure the SIP user parameter dial plan For the specific parameter you can set in the configuration files see Appendix A the section User Dial Plan Setting on page A 19 TIME AND DATE In addition to enabling disabling the time server you can also set the time and date format set the time zone and set daylight savings time on the IP phones You...

Page 282: ...es Both methods allow you to enter a value from the Time Zone table The list of time zone names is provided in the table in Appendix A the section Time Zone Name Time Zone Code Table on page A 47 The following is an example time zone name US Eastern Method 2 You can use the Time Zone option in the IP Phone UI or your can use the time zone name parameter in the configuration files and specify a val...

Page 283: ...h and week parameters absolute 0 or relative 1 dst start relative date 1 dst end relative date 1 ABSOLUTE TIME NOT APPLICABLE TO EASTERN STANDARD TIME EST dst start month The month that DST starts Valid values are 1 to 12 January to December dst start month 3 dst end month The month that DST ends Valid values are 1 to 12 January to December dst end month 4 dst start end week Not applicable to abso...

Page 284: ...he month dst start week 2 dst end week The week in the specified month in which DST ends Valid value is a positive or negative integer from 1 to 5 1 first full week of month 1 last occurrence dst start day in the month 2 second full week of month 2 second last occurrence dst start day in the month 5 fifth full week of month 5 fifth last occurrence dst start day in the month dst end week 1 dst star...

Page 285: ...bsolute dst end relative date 0 absolute start of DST dst start month 3 March dst start week 2 second full week dst start day 1 Sunday End of DST dst end month 11 November dst end week 1 first full week dst end day 1 Sunday dst end day The day of the specified week in the specified month that DST ends on Valid values are an integer from 1 to 7 1 Sunday 2 Monday 7 Saturday dst end day 7 dst start h...

Page 286: ...e IP Phone UI for 6863i and 6865i IP phones you select Preferences Time and Date Time Zone Others and enter DP for the country code or press and select Dhcp from the displayed time zone list If you enable DHCP Option 2 via the IP Phone UI the change takes place dynamically References For more information about setting DP DHCP for the timezone see Appendix A Time Zone Name on page A 46 For more inf...

Page 287: ...t time zone and daylight savings time using the configuration files For specific date and time parameters you can set in the configuration files see Appendix A the section Time and Date Settings on page A 44 For specific parameters you can set for custom time zone settings seeAppendixA the section Custom Time Zone and DST Settings on page A 53 CONFIGURING TIME AND DATE USING THE IP PHONE UI Use th...

Page 288: ...ime Zone from the list of values For valid values see Appendix A the section Time and Date Settings on page A 44 12 Press Done to save the Time Zone you selected Set Daylight Savings Time 13 Select Daylight Savings 14 Select a Daylight Savings time from the list of options Valid values are OFF 30 min summertime Note The default Date Format is WWW MMM DD Day of Week Month Day Note For more informat...

Page 289: ... to back to the options column and press the 4 key to highlight Daylight Savings 6 With Daylight Savings highlighted press the 4 key to move to selection column 7 Use the 5 and 2 keys to scroll through and choose the desired daylight savings setting Valid values are Off 30 min summertime 1h summertime Automatic default Set Date Format 8 Press the 3 key to move to back to the options column and pre...

Page 290: ...sired region Valid values are America Asia Atlantic Australia Europe Pacific Others 14 With the desired region highlighted press the 4 key to move to selection column 15 Use the 5 and 2 keys to scroll through and choose the time zone that applies to your area The default time zone is US Eastern 16 Press the Save softkey to save your changes For the 6873i 1 Press to enter the Options List Set Time ...

Page 291: ...D YY MMM DD DD MMM YYYY WWW DD MMM DD MMM DD MM YYYY 9 Press the Save softkey to save your changes Set Time Zone 10 Press to enter the Options List 11 Press the Time and Date icon 12 Press the Time Zone icon A list of time zones displays for different areas of the world 13 Select the desired region Valid values are America Asia Atlantic Australia Europe Pacific Others 14 Choose the time zone that ...

Page 292: ...ormat you want to use on your phone Valid values are 12h 12 hour format default 24h 24 hour format 3 In the Date Format field select the date format you want to use on your phone Valid values are WWW MMM DD default DD MMM YY YYYY MM DD DD MM YYYY DD MM YY DD MM YY MM DD YY MMM DD DD MMM YYYY WWW DD MMM DD MMM DD MM YYYY 4 Click Save Settings to save your changes MITEL WEB UI Note The time displays...

Page 293: ...he Configuration Files Use the following procedure to enable disable theTime Server and optionally set the IPAddress of Time Servers 1 2 and or 3 For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files see Appendix A the section Time Server Settings on page A 52 Setting Time Server Using the IP Phone UI Use the following procedure to set the Time Server and optionally set the IP Address of ...

Page 294: ... corresponding to the Use Network Time setting If there is no checkmark press the checkbox to enable the Use Network Time setting 5 Enter an IP address or domain name for the time server in the Time Server 1 Time Server 2 or Time Server 3 fields 6 Press the Save softkey to save your changes Setting Time Server Using the Mitel Web UI Use the following procedure to set the Time Server and optionally...

Page 295: ...waits before turning the backlight off is also configurable You can set this backlight feature using the configuration files and the IP Phone UI CONFIGURING THE BACKLIGHT MODE USING THE CONFIGURATION FILES Use the following information to set the backlight mode and backlight timer on the IP Phones For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files see Appendix A the section Backlight M...

Page 296: ... your setting The setting applies immediately to the phone DISPLAY The Display option on the 6867i 6869i and 6873i IP phones allows you to set the following on your phone Brightness Level Brightness Timer BRIGHTNESS LEVEL The Brightness Level option allows you to set the amount of light that illuminates the LCD display Use this option to set your preference of brightness SETTING BRIGHTNESS For the...

Page 297: ... 60 seconds of inactivity the LCD backlight goes off SETTING BRIGHTNESS TIMER For the 6867i 6869i 1 Press to enter the Options List 2 Navigate to the Display option and press the button or Select softkey 3 Press the 2 key to navigate to the Brightness Timer setting 4 Enter a value in seconds using the dialpad keys You can set the timer from 1 to 36000 seconds Default is 600 10 minutes 5 Press the ...

Page 298: ...of the background image The background image can be downloaded from your configuration server using either FTP HTTP and HTTPs protocols IDLE SCREEN IMAGE REQUIREMENTS 320x240 pixels 6867i 480x272 pixels 6869i 800x480 pixels 6873i 24 or 32 bit color depth 1MB maximum file size Both JPG and PNG files are supported JPG strongly recommended due to smaller file size and faster loading time There should...

Page 299: ...us bar The secondary screen mode displays both the Screen Name and Screen Name 2 parameters They are displayed above the smaller repositioned date and time Note Applicable to the 6867i 6869i and 6873i IP Phones only Note Screen Name 2 sip screen name 2 is not displayed on the 6867i 6869i 6873i IP phone s screen when the primary screen mode is configured for use 6867i Primary Home Idle Screen Mode ...

Page 300: ...Administrators can switch the home idle screen to the preferred layout by defining the idle screen mode parameter in the configuration files or by navigating to the Display options menu on the phone 6873i Primary Home Idle Screen Mode 6873i Secondary Home Idle Screen Mode ...

Page 301: ... the following procedure to switch the 6867i 6869i 6873i IP phones home idle screen mode using the IP Phone UI For the 6867i 6869i 1 Press to enter the Options List 2 Navigate to the Display option and press the button or Select softkey 3 With Home Screen Mode highlighted press the 3 or 4 key to change to the desired mode 4 Press the Save softkey to save your changes For the 6873i 1 Press to enter...

Page 302: ...nded when using a dark colored background image while black or Mitel blue provides the contrast required when using a light colored background image CONFIGURING THE HOME IDLE SCREEN FONT COLOR USING THE CON FIGURATION FILES Use the following parameter to configure the home idle screen font color For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files see Appendix A the section Home Idle Scr...

Page 303: ...rable through the phone s UI or by defining the screen save time parameter in the configuration files CONFIGURING THE SCREEN SAVER TIMER USING THE CONFIGURA TION FILES Use the following parameter to configure the screen saver timer For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files see Appendix A the section Screen Saver Settings on page A 64 Note Applicable to the 6867i 6869i and 6873...

Page 304: ... 4 Enter in the desired amount of time in seconds the phone must be idle before the screen saver is initiated The range is 0 screensaver disabled to 7200 seconds with a default of 1800 seconds 5 Press the Save softkey to save your changes SCREEN SAVER BACKGROUND IMAGE SUPPORT Administrators have the ability to display a screen saver background image on the 6867i 6869i and 6873i SIP phones The scre...

Page 305: ...ages These requirements are as follows 320x240 pixels 6867i 480x272 pixels 6869i 800x480 pixels 6873i 24 or 32 bit color depth 1MB maximum file size Both JPG and PNG files are supported JPG strongly recommended due to smaller file size and faster loading time There should be no frame around the image CONFIGURING A BACKGROUND IMAGE ON THE SCREEN SAVER Use the following procedures to configure a bac...

Page 306: ...png format 150 pixels wide x 150 pixels tall and in 24 bit or 32 bit color The filenames for pictures must be stored using the phone number as the filename for example 9995551234 png Enabling and disabling Picture ID on the phone can be done by an Administrator using the configuration files only Enabling Disabling the Picture ID on the Phone Using the Configuration Files Use the following paramete...

Page 307: ...ng a DHSG headset on your phone see the IP Phone Specific Installation Guide CONFIGURING DHSG ON THE PHONE You can enable or disable the use of a DHSG headset using the parameter dhsg in the configuration files or at the location Options Preferences Set Audio DHSG in the IP Phone UI Default for DHSG is disabled OFF Configuring DHSG Using the Configuration Files Use the following information to con...

Page 308: ...t Off press Done to save your setting 6 Press Set or Done to save your setting The setting applies immediately to the phone For the 6867i 6869i 1 Press to enter the Options List 2 Navigate to the Audio Headset option and press the button or Select softkey 3 Press the 2 key to highlight DHSG 4 With DHSG highlighted press the 4 key to move to selection column 5 Use the 5 and 2 keys to scroll through...

Page 309: ...lug in the supported USB headset into the USB input port located on the back of their phones and configure the phone s audio mode accordingly e g Headset Speaker Headset or Headset Speaker to start using their USB headset Note Applicable to the 6867i 6869i and 6873i IP Phones only 6867i 6869i USB Input Port Location 6873i USB Input Port Location ...

Page 310: ...ived using the handset or handsfree speakerphone In handset audio mode pressing the handsfree button on the phone switches to handsfree speakerphone In Speaker audio mode lift the handset to switch to the handset 1 Headset Choose this setting if you want to make or receive all calls using a handset or headset For the 6865i 6867i 6869i and 6873i calls can be switched from the handset to headset by ...

Page 311: ...e turns the Live Dial Pad mode ON or OFF With live dial pad ON the IP phone automatically dials out and turns ON Handsfree mode as soon as a dial pad key or softkey is pressed With live dial pad OFF if you dial a number while the phone is on hook lifting the receiver or pressing the Speaker Headset button initiates a call to that number Availability of feature dependent on your phone system or ser...

Page 312: ...lpad feature 4 Press the Save softkey to save your changes For the 6873i 1 Press to enter the Options List 2 Press the Dialpad icon 3 Press the Live Dialpad icon 4 Choose On to enable or Off to disable the live dialpad feature 5 Press the Save softkey to save your changes LIVE KEYBOARD When the 6867i 6869i SIP phone is in an idle state and a alphabetic character key on an attached K680i keyboard i...

Page 313: ...0i keyboard on the home idle screen will launch the XML application and pass the character to the XML application first input field if available For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files seeAppendixA the section Live Keyboard Settings on page A 68 Note Irrespective of whether the Live Keyboard feature is enabled or disabled pressing a numerical key on the K680i keyboard when o...

Page 314: ...e Mitel Web UI display in a specific language as required When you set the language to use all of the display screens menus services options configuration parameters etc display in that language The IP phones support the following languages IP PHONE UI Note The Live Keyboard setting is only available in this menu if a K680i keyboard is attached to the phone AVAILABLE LANGUAGE ASSOCIATED LANGUAGE F...

Page 315: ... A the section Language Codes from Standard ISO 639 on page 199 and ISO 3166 is the country code specified in Standard ISO 3166 see Country Codes from Standard ISO 3166 on page 200 The ISO 3166 attribute is optional Galego lang_gl txt Hungarian lang_hu txt Italian lang_it txt Dutch lang_nl txt Dutch Netherlands lang_nl_nl txt Norwegian lang_no txt Polish ASCII lang_pl txt Polish UTF 8 lang_pl_pl t...

Page 316: ... see the section Specifying the Screen Language to Use on page 5 53 For more information about language codes and country codes see Appendix A the section Language Pack Settings on page 197 Loading Language Packs via the Mitel Web UI Using the Mitel Web UI you can specify a language pack to load using the parameters at Basic Settings Preferences Language Settings You use the following fields in th...

Page 317: ...specific parameters you can set in the configuration files see Appendix A the section Language Settings on page A 195 and Language Pack Settings on page A 197 CONFIGURATION FILES Notes 1 If you specify the language to use on the phone via the configuration files you must reboot the phone for the changes to take affect 2 All languages may not be available for selection The available languages are d...

Page 318: ...to enter the Options List 2 Navigate to the Language option and press the button or Select softkey 3 With Screen Language highlighted press the 4 key to move to selection column 4 Use the 5 and 2 keys to scroll through and choose the desired screen language 5 Press the Save softkey to save your changes For the 6873i 1 Press to enter the Options List 2 Press the Language icon 3 Choose the desired s...

Page 319: ... the respective language lang_ca txt Catalan lang_ca_va txt Valencian lang_cs txt Czech UTF 8 lang_cs_op txt Czech ASCII lang_cy txt Welsh lang_de txt German lang_el txt Greek 6867i 6869i and 6873i only lang_da txt Danish lang_es txt Spanish lang_es_mx txt Mexican Spanish lang_eu txt Euskera lang_fi txt Finnish lang_fr txt French lang_fr_ca txt Canadian French lang_gl txt Galego lang_hu txt Hungar...

Page 320: ...he keypad on the phone or for the 6873i the on screen keyboard The System Administrator and User can enable this feature using the Mitel Web UI or the IP Phone UI An Administrator can also use the configuration files to enable this feature Users can then use text and characters in a specific language when performing inputs on the phone The following tables identify the language characters that a U...

Page 321: ...1 1 _ 1 _ 2 ABC2 abc2 3 DEF3 def3 4 GHI4 ghi4 5 JKL5 jkl5 6 MNO6 mno6 7 PQRS7 pqrs7 8 TUV8 tuv8 9 WXYZ9 wxyz9 SPACE SPACE KEY UPPERCASE CHARACTERS LOWERCASE CHARACTERS 0 0 0 1 1 _ 1 _ 2 ABC2ÀÂÇÁÅÆ abc2àâçáåæ 3 DEF3ÉÈÊË def3éèêë 4 GHI4ÎÏ ghi4îï 5 JKL5 jkl5 6 MNO6ÑÓÒÔÖ mno6ñóòôö 7 PQRS7 pqrs7 8 TUV8ÚÙÛÜ tuv8úùûü 9 WXYZ9 wxyz9 SPACE SPACE ...

Page 322: ...0 0 1 1 _ 1 _ 2 ABC2ÁÀÇ abc2áàç 3 DEF3ÉÈ def3éè 4 GHI4ÏÍ ghi4ïí 5 JKL5 jkl5 6 MNO6ÑÓÒ mno6ñóò 7 PQRS7 pqrs7 8 TUV8ÚÜ tuv8úü 9 WXYZ9 wxyz9 SPACE SPACE KEY UPPERCASE CHARACTERS LOWERCASE CHARACTERS 0 0 0 1 1 _ 1 _ 2 ABC2ÄÀ abc2äà 3 DEF3É def3é 4 GHI4 ghi4 5 JKL5 jkl5 6 MNO6Ö mno6ö 7 PQRS7ß pqrs7ß 8 TUV8Ü tuv8ü 9 WXYZ9 wxyz9 SPACE SPACE ...

Page 323: ...abc2àcç 3 DEF3ÉÈË def3éèë 4 GHI4 ghi4 5 JKL5 jkl5 6 MNO6ÓÒ mno6óò 7 PQRS7 pqrs7 8 TUV8Ù tuv8ù 9 WXYZ9 wxyz9 SPACE SPACE KEY UPPERCASE CHARACTERS LOWERCASE CHARACTERS 0 0 0 1 1 _ 1 _ 2 ABC2ÁÀÂÃÇ abc2áàâãç 3 DEF3ÉÊ def3éê 4 GHI4Í ghi4í 5 JKL5 jkl5 6 MNO6ÓÔÕ mno6óôõ 7 PQRS7 pqrs7 8 TUV8ÚÜ tuv8úü 9 WXYZ9 wxyz9 SPACE SPACE ...

Page 324: ... aбвг2abc 3 ДЕЁЖЭ3DEF Дeëжз3def 4 ИЙКЛ4GHI ийкл4ghi 5 МНОП5JKL мноп5jkl 6 РСТУ6MNO рсту6mno 7 ФХЦЧ7PQRS фхЧч7pqrs 8 ШЩЪЫ8TUV шщъы8tuv 9 ЬЗЮЯ9WXYZ ьзюя9wxyz SPACE SPACE KEY UPPERCASE CHARACTERS LOWERCASE CHARACTERS 0 0 0 1 1 _ 1 _ 2 ABC2ÅÄÆÀ abc2åäæà 3 DEF3É def3é 4 GHI4 ghi4 5 JKL5 jkl5 6 MNO6ÖØ mno6öø 7 PQRS7ß pqrs7ß 8 TUV8Ü tuv8ü 9 WXYZ9 wxyz9 SPACE SPACE ...

Page 325: ...guring Language Input Using the IP Phone UI Once Language Input is enabled an Administrator or User can change the input language on the phone using the IP Phone UI The Input Language option appears under the Language option in the IP Phone UI Use the following procedure to change the input language using the IP Phone UI For the 6863i 6865i 1 Press on the phone to enter the Options List 2 Select L...

Page 326: ...s the button or Select softkey 3 Press the 2 key to highlight the Input Language option 4 With Input Language highlighted press the 4 key to move to selection column 5 Use the 5 and 2 keys to scroll through and choose the desired input language Valid values are English default Français French Español Spanish Deutsch German Italiano Italian Português Portuguese Русский Russian Nordic ελληνικά Greek...

Page 327: ...ocedure to set the input language using the Mitel Web UI 1 Click on Basic Settings Preferences Language Settings 2 Select a language from the Input Language field Setting this field allows you to specify the language to use when entering text in the Mitel Web UI IP Phone UI or in XML applications on the phone Valid values are English default Français French Español Spanish Deutsch German Italiano ...

Page 328: ...support for ISO 8859 2 Latin2 of multi national languages when displaying and inputting in the IP Phone UI and the Mitel Web UI UTF 8 is also compatible with XML encoding on the IP Phones The following table illustrates the Latin 2 character set now used on the IP Phones MINIMUM RINGER VOLUME To prevent the user from turning off the ringer an Administrator can configure a parameter called ringer v...

Page 329: ... existing softkey and programmable key parameters defined in the configuration files as detailed in the table below CONFIGURATION FILES Notes 1 If no settings are configured locally but the key type is defined in a configuration file the phone will lock the respective key with the type defined in the configuration file along with any values associated with the additional key parameters e g for sof...

Page 330: ...y and perform a Save To from the Received Callers List It also allows you to save speeddial information to a programmable key You can also use the Save key while using specific XML applications The Delete key allows you to remove entries from the Local Directory List and Received Callers List Must enter the Directory or Received Callers List and select an entry then press twice to delete entry By ...

Page 331: ...attern of digits that a user dials to reach a particular telephone number Access codes area codes specialized codes and combinations of the number of digits dialed are all part of a dial plan For instance the North American Public Switched Telephone Network PSTN uses a 10 digit dial plan that includes a 3 digit area code and a 7 digit telephone number Most PBXs support variable length dial plans t...

Page 332: ...e string does not match a pattern defined in the local dial plan at all the number will not be dialed out If the whole string matches partially with a pattern defined in the local dial plan but has less numbers the number will not be dialed out If the whole string matches partially with a pattern defined in the local dial plan but has more numbers the full string is dialed out For example if the l...

Page 333: ...y 4 digit string starting with 6 4 6 XXXXXX 78 Prepends 78 to any 7 digit string starting with 4 5 or 6 Example If you enter the following dial string for a local dial plan sip dial plan 1 9 where 9 is the prepended digit and you dial the following number 15551212 the IP phone automatically adds the 9 digit to the beginning of the dialed number before the number is forwarded as 915551212 Notes 1 I...

Page 334: ...allows the user to dial a predefined dial string obtain a dial tone and continue dialing A User or Administrator can configure this using the existing Dial Plan feature on the phone You can enter a new character string in the dial plan that allows you to configure the secondary dial tone The character string is of the form where the period indicates an arbitrary number of digits and the semicolon ...

Page 335: ...d digits or a to present a secondary dial tone if required 3 Enable the Send Dial Plan Terminator field by checking the check box Disable this field by unchecking the box Default is disabled 4 In the Digit Timeout in seconds field enter a timeout value This is the length of time in seconds he phone waits before dialing Default is 4 seconds 5 Click Save Settings to save your changes CONFIGURATION F...

Page 336: ...layback on the IP phone For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files see Appendix A the section Suppress DTMF Playback Setting on page A 207 DISPLAY DTMF DIGITS A feature on the IP phones allows administrators to enable or disable DTMF dual tone multi frequency digits to display to the IP phone when using the keypad to dial or when dialing from a softkey or programmable key DTMF ...

Page 337: ... field by checking the check box Disable this field by unchecking the box Default is disabled 3 Click Save Settings to save your changes 4 You must restart your IP phone for the changes to take effect 5 Click on Operation Reset 6 In the Restart Phone field click Restart to restart the IP phone and apply the changes FILTER OUT INCOMING DTMF EVENTS An Administrator can enter a parameter in the confi...

Page 338: ...ive busy unless Call Forward Busy or Call Forward No Answer and Busy is configured on the phone It will then forward the call according to the rule configured The phone can only transfer the currently active call or accept transferred calls if there is no active calls If call waiting is disabled intercom calls are treated as regular incoming calls and are rejected pre dialing with live dialpad dis...

Page 339: ...lobal Call Waiting 3 The Call Waiting field is enabled by default To disable call waiting on a global basis uncheck this box Configure Per Line Call Waiting 4 The Call Waiting field is set to Global by default To enable call waiting for a specific line select enabled from the list in this field To disable call waiting for a specific line select disabled from the list in this field 5 Click Save Set...

Page 340: ...s audible to notify you of that incoming call A User or Administrator can configure this feature using the Mitel Web UI An Administrator can also configure this feature using the configuration files Configuring Call Waiting Tone Use the following procedures to configure the Call Waiting Tone feature on the IP phone For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files see Appendix A the s...

Page 341: ...fault and plays the call waiting tone only once on the active call When the incoming caller hangs up the call waiting tone stops on the existing active call You can enable or disable this feature in the configuration files or in the Mitel Web UI Configuring Call Waiting Tone Period You use the following procedures to enable or disable Call Waiting Tone Period For specific parameters you can set in...

Page 342: ...waiting tone will be audible on an active call when another call comes in Default is 0 seconds When enabled the call waiting tone plays at regular intervals for the amount of time set for this parameter For example if set to 30 the call waiting tone plays every 30 seconds When set to 0 the call waiting tone is audible only once on the active call 3 Click Save Settings to save your changes MITEL WE...

Page 343: ...NE Use the following procedures to configure stuttered dial tone on the IP phones For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files for enabling disabling stuttered dial tone see Appendix A the section Stuttered Dial Tone Setting on page A 184 1 Click on Basic Settings Preferences General 2 The Stuttered Dial Tone field is enabled by default To disable this field uncheck the box 3 Cli...

Page 344: ...ur System Administrator has set a value for this feature in a custom XML application or in the configuration files the value you set in the Mitel Web UI overrides theAdministrator s setting Setting and saving the value in the Mitel Web UI applies to the phone immediately REFERENCE For more information about enabling disabling the XML Beep Support in an XML script see XML Customized Services on pag...

Page 345: ...onal Features 5 82 1 Click on Basic Settings Preferences General 2 The XML Beep Support field is enabled by default To disable this field uncheck the box 3 Click Save Settings to save your changes MITEL WEB UI ...

Page 346: ...olling to the next message You can configure this option via the configuration files or the Mitel Web UI REFERENCE For more information about configuring the status scroll delay for XML status messages see XML Customized Services on page 5 284 CONFIGURING STATUS SCROLL DELAY Use the following procedures to configure Status Scroll Delay For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files...

Page 347: ...is functionality so that the phone now stays focused on the connected call You can do this using the switch focus to ringing line parameter in the configuration files or the Mitel Web UI CONFIGURING SWITCH FOCUS TO RINGING LINE You use the following procedures to enable or disable Switch Focus to Ringing Line For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files for enabling disabling Swi...

Page 348: ...example when this feature is enabled and the call on Line 1 is on hold and then the User answers a call on Line 2 and stays on that line a reminder tone is played in the active audio path on Line 2 to remind the User that there is still a call on hold on Line 1 When this feature is disabled a ring splash is heard when the active call hangs up and there is still a call on hold Your can enable or di...

Page 349: ...ick on Basic Settings Preferences General 2 In the Call Hold Reminder During Active Calls field enable this feature by placing a check mark in the box When this feature is enabled a reminder tone is heard on the active call when another call is on hold When disabled a ring splash is heard when the active call hangs up and there is still a call on hold 3 Click Save Settings to save your changes CON...

Page 350: ...t a call on hold even when no other calls are active on the phone When enabled the phone initiates a reminder ring splash periodically for the single call on hold When disabled no reminder ring splash is audible You can enable or disable this feature using the call hold reminder parameter in the configuration files or in the Mitel Web UI CONFIGURING CALL HOLD REMINDER You use the following procedu...

Page 351: ... another call on hold You can configure these parameters using the configuration files only CONFIGURING CALL HOLD REMINDER TIMER You use the following procedure to configure the Call Hold Reminder Timer For the specific parameter you can set in the configuration files for setting the Call Hold Reminder Timer see Appendix A the section Call Hold Reminder Settings on page A 180 CONFIGURING CALL HOLD...

Page 352: ...switches back immediately after the call ends Conference For incoming calls the phone switches back immediately after the call ends Transfer For incoming or outgoing calls the current behavior is that the same line used to transfer the call does not change For incoming calls the phone switches back immediately after the call transfers BLF The phone switches back immediately after the call ends Par...

Page 353: ...cus to after incoming or outgoing calls end on the phone Valid values are None disables the preferred line focus feature 1 to N Default is 1 For example if you set the preferred line to 1 when a call incoming or outgoing ends on the phone on any line the phone switches focus back to Line 1 3 In the Preferred Line Timeout field enter the amount of time in seconds that the phone switches back to the...

Page 354: ...iles the Goodbye key hangs up the active call For the 6863i 6865i If you disable this parameter and the phone receives another call when an active call is already present the Ignore option displays in the LCD window The phone will ignore the incoming call if you press the DOWN arrow navigation key The phone will hang up on the active call if you press the Goodbye key You can set this parameter usi...

Page 355: ...all the phone rejects the incoming call with a status code of 486 Busy Here The IP phones allow an administrator to configure this status code You can configure the status code using the configuration files only Use the following parameter to configure a status code when ignoring incoming calls sip ignore status code Configuring Status Codes on Ignoring Incoming Calls You can use the following pro...

Page 356: ...ED illuminates if a voicemail is pending on line 2 If you configure the MWI LED for all lines the LED illuminates if a voicemail is pending on any line on the phone lines 1 through N A User can configure the MWI using the Mitel Web UI only An Administrator can configure the MWI on single or all lines using the configuration files or the Mitel Web UI CONFIGURING MESSAGE WAITING INDICATOR MWI Use th...

Page 357: ... select a single line from 1 to N or select All for all lines If you select a single line the MWI illuminates when a voicemail message is pending on that line If you select all lines the MWI illuminates when a voicemail message is pending on any line from 1 to N 3 Click Save Settings to save your changes MITEL WEB UI ...

Page 358: ...strator or User can set do not disturb based on the accounts on the phone all accounts or a specific account You can set specific modes for the way you want the phone to handle DND The three modes you can set on the phone for DND are Account Phone Custom An Administrator or User can set the DND mode using the Mitel Web UI at the path Basic Settings Preferences General DND Key Mode AnAdministrator ...

Page 359: ...alid values are Account Sets DND for a specific account DND key toggles the account in focus on the IP Phone UI to ON or OFF Phone Sets DND ON for all accounts on the phone DND key toggles all accounts on the phone to ON or OFF Custom Sets the phone to display custom screens after pressing the DND key that list the account s on the phone The user can select a specific account for DND turn DND ON f...

Page 360: ...sy and or NoAnswer When you configure the initial account the phone applies the configuration to all other accounts In the Mitel Web UI only the account you configured is enabled All other accounts are grayed out but set to the same configuration Using the Mitel Web UI if you make changes to that initial account the changes apply to all accounts on the phone Custom mode The Custom mode allows you ...

Page 361: ...endix A the section Call Forward Key Mode Settings on page A 160 1 Click on Basic Settings Preferences General 2 In the Call Forward Key Mode field select a call forward mode to use on the phone Valid values are Account The account mode allows you to configure CFWD on a per account basis Pressing a configured CFWD key applies to the account in focus CONFIGURATION FILES MITEL WEB UI Note If there i...

Page 362: ... EMERGENCY LOCATION IDENTIFICATION NUMBER ELIN TheIPPhonessupportLinkLayerDiscoveryProtocolforMediaEndpointDevices LLDP MED LLDP MED is designed to allow for things such as Auto discoveryofLANpolicies suchasVLAN Layer2PriorityandDiffservsettings leading to plug and play networking Extended and automated power management of Power over Ethernet endpoints Inventory management allowing network adminis...

Page 363: ...n the phone is booting up If LLDP MED responses are received after this initial listening period the phone will ignore the response Administrators can configure this time out interval using the lldp startinterval parameter This parameter is only valid during the phone bootup process and it will control the LLDP MED time out interval where the phone sends LLDP MED advertisements and listens for the...

Page 364: ...DP setting to Enabled or Disabled This field enables or disables Link Layer Discovery Protocol for Media Endpoint Devices LLDP MED on the IP Phone 7 Press DONE to save the change For the 6867i 6869i 1 Press to enter the Options List 2 Press the Advanced softkey 3 Enter the Administrator password using the keypad Default is 22222 4 Select Network LLDP This option enables or disables Link Layer Disc...

Page 365: ...ED using the Mitel Web UI 1 Click on Advanced Settings Network Advanced Network Settings 2 The LLDP field is enabled by default To disable LLDP click the check mark in the box to clear the check mark 3 In the LLDP Packet Interval field enter the time in seconds between the transmission of LLDP Data Unit LLDPDU packets The value of zero 0 disables this parameter Valid values are 0 to 2147483647 Def...

Page 366: ...hat an intercom call is being placed while a server side intercom call means the SIP server is responsible for informing the recipient Server side calls require additional configuration of a prefix code After pressing the Icom button and if required entering the number to call the phone automatically adds the prefix to the called number and sends the outgoing call via the server For outgoing inter...

Page 367: ... the parameter is considered as ring forever In order for the delay functionality to operate you must first enable Auto Answer on the IP Phone Allow Barge In You can configure whether or not the IP phone allows an incoming intercom call to interrupt an active call The sip intercom allow barge in parameter controls this feature When you enable the sip intercom allow barge in parameter 1 enable in t...

Page 368: ...e Appendix A the section Incoming Intercom Settings on page A 209 Outgoing intercom Settings 1 Click on Basic Settings Preferences Outgoing Intercom Settings 2 Select an Intercom type for outgoing Intercom calls from the Type list box Valid values are Phone Side Server Side Off Default is Off 3 If Server Side is selected enter a prefix to add to the phone number in the Prefix Code field Note To co...

Page 369: ... Barge In field is enabled by default If an active line on the phone receives an incoming intercom call the active call is put on hold and the phone automatically answers the incoming intercom call To disable this field uncheck the box 11 Click Save Settings to save your changes GROUP PAGING RTP SETTINGS AnAdministrator or User can configure a specific key softkey programmable key or expansion mod...

Page 370: ...o set Do Not Disturb DND to ignore any incoming pages For incoming RTP multicasts the ringing display is dependent on the Allow Barge In parameter as per the following rules If the Allow Barge In parameter is disabled and there is not other call on the phone then the paging is automatically played via the preferred audio device see the Model Spe cific SIP Phone User Guide for setting Audio Mode on...

Page 371: ...Negotiation Behavior on page A 211 Use the following procedure to configure RTP streaming for Paging applications using the Mitel Web UI 1 Click on Basic Settings Preferences Group Paging RTP Settings 2 In the Paging Listen Addresses text box enter the multicast IP address es and port number s on which the phone listens for incoming multicast RTP packets 3 Click on Softkeys and XML or Click on Pro...

Page 372: ...he multicast RTP session and return to the idle screen SPEEDDIAL KEY MAPPING There are hard keys on your phone such as Hold Redial Xfer and Conf that are configured by default for specific call handling features See the Model Specific SIP Phone User Guide for more information about these key functions ENABLING DISABLING REDIAL XFER AND CONF KEYS You can enable or disable the Redial Xfer and Conf k...

Page 373: ... phone to use as Speeddial keys When the Redial or Conference key is pressed the number configured for the key automatically speeddials If no number is configured the Redial and Conference keys return to their original functionality You can configure this feature using the configuration files or the Mitel Web UI Use the following procedures to set the Redial and Conf keys as Speeddial keys For spe...

Page 374: ...Speeddial key when the phone is idle During an active call the phone will send the custom number as DTMF using the phone configured DTMF method inbound vs out of band RFC2833 vs SIP INFO This feature can be configured using the new map redial as dtmf and map conf as dtmf parameters When a user presses the Redial key the mapped number will be sent out as DTMF during an active call if the current ma...

Page 375: ...tifies the valid settings and default values for each type of configuration method Ring Tone Settings Table CONFIGURATION METHOD VALID VALUES DEFAULT VALUE Configuration Files Global 0 Tone1 1 Tone 2 2 Tone 3 3 Tone 4 4 Tone 5 5 Silent 6 Tone 7 7 Tone 8 8 Tone 9 9 Tone 10 10 Tone 11 11 Tone 12 12 Tone 13 13 Tone 14 14 Tone 15 15 Tone 6 100 Custom Ring Tone 1 101 Custom Ring Tone 2 102 Custom Ring ...

Page 376: ... Tone 14 14 Tone 15 15 Tone 6 100 Custom Ring Tone 1 101 Custom Ring Tone 2 102 Custom Ring Tone 3 103 Custom Ring Tone 4 104 Custom Ring Tone 5 105 Custom Ring Tone 6 106 Custom Ring Tone 7 107 Custom Ring Tone 8 Per Line 1 global IP Phone UI Global Tone 1 Tone 2 Tone 3 Tone 4 Tone 5 Tone 6 Tone 7 Tone 8 Tone 9 Tone 10 Tone 11 Tone 12 Tone 13 Tone 14 Tone 15 Silent Custom Ring Tones 1 8 if availa...

Page 377: ...ne 8 Tone 9 Tone 10 Tone 11 Tone 12 Tone 13 Tone 14 Tone 15 Silent Custom Ring Tones 1 8 if available Per Line Global Tone 1 Tone 2 Tone 3 Tone 4 Tone 5 Tone 6 Tone 7 Tone 8 Tone 9 Tone 10 Tone 11 Tone 12 Tone 13 Tone 14 Tone 15 Silent Custom Ring Tones 1 8 if available Global Tone 1 Per Line Global ...

Page 378: ...Australia Brazil Canada Europe generic tones France Germany Italy Italy2 Malaysia Mexico Russia Slovakia UK US Default When you configure the country s tone set the country specific tone is heard on the phone for the following dial tone secondary dial tone ring tone busy tone congestion tones call waiting tone ring cadence pattern Note You configure ring tones and tone sets using the Mitel Web UI ...

Page 379: ...0 2000 Busy 425 375 375 Congestion 425 2500 500 Call Waiting 425 200 200 200 Continuously Off Ring Cadence 400 200 400 2000 TONE FREQUENCY HZ CADENCE ON OFF MS Dial 425 Continuously On Secondary Dial 425 300 100 300 1300 Ringing 425 1000 4000 Busy 425 250 250 Congestion 425 500 500 Call Waiting 425 100 100 100 10000 Ring Cadence 1000 4000 TONE FREQUENCY HZ CADENCE ON OFF MS Dial 350 440 Continuous...

Page 380: ...Ringing 425 1000 4000 Busy 425 500 500 Congestion 425 200 200 Call Waiting 425 200 200 200 Continuously Off Ring Cadence 1000 4000 TONE FREQUENCY HZ CADENCE ON OFF MS Dial 440 Continuously On Secondary Dial 340 440 Continuously On Ringing 440 1500 3500 Busy 440 500 500 Congestion 440 500 500 Call Waiting 440 300 Continuously Off Ring Cadence 1500 3500 TONE FREQUENCY HZ CADENCE ON OFF MS Dial 425 C...

Page 381: ...00 TONE FREQUENCY HZ CADENCE ON OFF MS Dial 425 Continuously On Secondary Dial 425 500 500 Ringing 425 1000 4000 Busy 425 500 500 Congestion 425 200 200 Call Waiting 425 100 Continuously Off Ring Cadence 1000 4000 TONE FREQUENCY HZ CADENCE ON OFF MS Dial 425 Continuously On Secondary Dial 425 160 160 Ringing 425 50 400 200 400 2000 Busy 425 500 500 Congestion 425 250 250 Call Waiting 425 100 200 1...

Page 382: ...5 500 500 Congestion 425 250 250 Call Waiting 425 100 100 100 10000 Ring Cadence 1000 4000 TONE FREQUENCY HZ CADENCE ON OFF MS Dial 425 Continuously On Secondary Dial 425 500 50 Ringing 425 1000 4000 Busy 425 500 500 Congestion 425 200 200 Call Waiting 425 200 600 200 Continuously Off Ring Cadence 1000 5000 TONE FREQUENCY HZ CADENCE ON OFF MS Dial 425 330 330 660 660 Secondary Dial 425 165 165 165...

Page 383: ...350 440 750 750 Ringing 400 450 400 200 400 2000 Busy 400 375 375 Congestion 400 400 350 225 525 Call Waiting 400 100 Continuously Off Ring Cadence 400 200 400 2000 TONE FREQUENCY HZ CADENCE ON OFF MS Dial 350 440 Continuously On Secondary Dial 350 440 100 100 Continuously On Ringing 440 480 2000 4000 Busy 480 620 500 500 Congestion 480 620 240 260 Call Waiting 440 300 Continuously Off Ring Cadenc...

Page 384: ...e tone set Valid values are Australia Brazil Canada Europe France Germany Italy Italy2 Ma laysia Mexico Brazil Russia Slovakia UK and US Default is US 9 Press Done to save the change The ring tone and tone set you select is immediately applied to the IP phone For the 6867i 6869i 1 Press to enter the Options List 2 Navigate to the Audio Ring Tones option and press the button or Select softkey 3 Use...

Page 385: ...ia Mexico Brazil Russia Slovakia UK and US Default is US 8 Press the Save softkey to save your changes 1 Click on Basic Settings Preferences For global configuration 2 In the Ring Tones section select a country from the Tone Set field Valid values are Australia Brazil Canada Europe France Germany Italy Italy2 Ma laysia Mexico Brazil Russia Slovakia UK and US Default is US 3 Select a value from the...

Page 386: ...d a SIP 486 Busy Here to stop the ringback at the originating phone after the timeout expires CONFIGURING THE RINGING RING BACK TIMEOUT PERIOD Use the following procedures to configure the ringing ring back timeout on the IP phones For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files for the ringing ring back timeout period see Appendix A the section Ringing Ring Back TimeOut Period Sett...

Page 387: ...tor Web UIs by defining the parameter as 2 CONFIGURING THE CUSTOM RING TONE FEATURE Use the following procedures to configure the custom ring tone feature Notes 1 Ring tones must be in wav format The IP phones support the following WAV file specifications G 711 μ law and a law Codec 20 ms packet size Mono 8KHz 2 Individual WAV files cannot exceed 1 MB in size the total combined size of the eight W...

Page 388: ...2 to 4 to upload additional WAV files to the phone RING TONE VIA SPEAKER DURING ACTIVE CALLS The parameter ring audibly enable can be used to configure the IP phones to play the ring tone of an incoming call via the phone s speaker while in an active call With the parameter enabled if a user is in an active call on an extension and the phone receives a call for the same or different extension the ...

Page 389: ...ingtone is not assigned the standard ring tone for the line being used to field the incoming call is played As individual contact ring tone support is applicable to the local directory users that would like to apply a ring tone for a contact in an external directory source e g CSV based directories Exchange Contacts LDAP and Xsi directories or Received Callers List Outgoing Redial List must first ...

Page 390: ...te e g scenarios where the proxy may still accept INVITEs from the phone even if unregistered the no service congestion tone parameter has been programmed as disabled by default CONFIGURING THE NO SERVICE CONGESTION TONE Use the following procedures to configure the no service congestion tone feature For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files see Appendix A the section No Servi...

Page 391: ...risk BroadWorks Server ring tone keywords Alert Info http 127 0 0 1 Bellcore dr2 or Alert Info Bellcore dr2 Sylantro Servers The ring tone keywords that can display in the Alert Info header for a Sylantro server are alert acd auto call distribution alert community 1 alert community 2 alert community 3 alert community 4 alert emergency alert external alert group alert internal alert priority When t...

Page 392: ...nt Bellcore ring tone patterns and cadences CALL CRITERIA BELLCORE TONES internal calls Bellcore dr2 external calls Bellcore dr3 calls with contact list Bellcore dr4 calls with specific time frames Bellcore dr5 CALL CRITERIA BELLCORE TONES FOR EACH CALL CRITERIA alert acd auto call distribution alert community 1 alert community 2 alert community 3 alert community 4 alert emergency alert external a...

Page 393: ...using the Mitel Web UI Bellcore dr3 3 Ringing Silent Ringing Silent Ringing Silent Short Short Long 315 145 315 145 630 2975 400 200 400 200 800 4000 525 525 525 525 1025 4400 Bellcore dr4 4 Ringing Silent Ringing Silent Ringing Silent Short Long Short 200 145 800 145 200 2975 300 200 1000 200 300 4000 525 525 1100 525 525 4400 Bellcore dr5 5 Ringing 450 500 550 Note If the Do Not Disturb DND or t...

Page 394: ...Community 2 Community 3 Community 4 4 Click Save Settings to save your changes CALL WAITING TONES Call Waiting is a feature that tells you if a new caller is trying to contact you when you are already on the phone A discreet tone alerts you to the new caller so you can answer your second incoming call by putting your first caller on hold The IP phones use the following Bellcore specified call wait...

Page 395: ... number You can use the Directed call pickup feature on the phone in multiple ways With the existing BLF feature on Asterisk or sipXecs a user can dial 76 or 78 respec tively followed by the extension to pick up a ringing call on another phone For more information about BLF see Busy Lamp Field BLF on page 170 Using XML a user can intercept a call by selecting an extension from a list and then pres...

Page 396: ...ng line on Phone B 4 Phone C connects to Phone A How this Feature Works when Directed Call Pickup is Disabled with BLF or BLF List 1 Phone A monitors Phone B via BLF List 2 Phone C calls Phone B Phone B rings 3 If you press the BLF List softkey on Phone A it performs a speeddial to Phone B 4 Phone C and Phone A are ringing Phone B on separate lines if available You can enable disable Directed Call...

Page 397: ...nabled when idle or Enabled also in call when idle and in an active call state Default is disabled 5 If the Play a Ring Splash parameter is enabled the IP phone plays a short ring splash when there is an incoming call on the BLF monitored extension 6 Click Save Settings to save your changes CONFIGURING BLF OR BLF LIST FOR DIRECTED CALL PICKUP Use the following procedure to configure BLF or BLF Lis...

Page 398: ...ptional Enter a prefix in the Directed Call Pickup Prefix field For example 98 This prefix is appended to the beginning of the Directed Call Pickup number when dialed from the BLF or BLF List softkey 4 Enablethe Play a Ring Splash featurebyselectingeitherEnabled whenidle orEnabled also in call when idle and in an active call state Default is disabled If the Play a Ring Splash parameter is enabled ...

Page 399: ... the BLF List key configured on the call manager and the extension number an optional value corresponds to the target s extension number 10 Click Save Settings to save your changes 11 In the Line field select a line number that is actively registered to the appropriate SIP proxy you are using Note Depending on your phone model the key configuration screen displays Note If BLF List type is selected...

Page 400: ...king the check box 3 Optional Enter a prefix in the Directed Call Pickup Prefix field For example 98 This prefix is appended to the beginning of the Directed Call Pickup number when dialed from the BLF or BLF List softkey 4 Enablethe Play a Ring Splash featurebyselectingeitherEnabled whenidle orEnabled also in call when idle and in an active call state Default is disabled If the Play a Ring Splash...

Page 401: ... monitoring 9 In the Value field enter the URI that the phone uses to display the XML application to the LCD For example http 65 205 71 13 xml startup key php user SIPREMOTENUMBER 10 Select the line state idle connected incoming outgoing busy that you want to apply to the XML softkey or programmable key 11 Click Save Settings to save your changes Note Depending on your phone model the key configur...

Page 402: ...d phone or simply ignore cancel the call Configuring the Two Stage BLF Key Directed Call Pickup Feature Use the following procedure to configure the two stage BLF key directed call pickup feature in the configuration files To enable disable the two stage BLF key directed call pickup feature on the IP phone using the configuration files seeAppendixA the section Directed Call Pickup BLF or XML Call ...

Page 403: ...og information will be detailed in the Replaces header of the INVITE Enabling MiCloud Telepo Directed Call Pickup Support Use the following procedure to enable MiCloud Telepo directed call pickup support in the configuration files To enable MiCloud Telepo directed call pickup support using the configuration files see AppendixA the section Directed Call Pickup BLF or XML Call Interception Settings ...

Page 404: ...rs and administrators can configure a specific state to display when a softkey is being used Available states you can configure for each softkey include idle The phone is not being used connected The current line is in an active call or the call is on hold incoming The phone is ringing outgoing The user is dialing a number or the far end is ringing busy The current line is busy because the line is...

Page 405: ...ng outgoing busy DND idle connected incoming outgoing busy XML idle connected incoming outgoing busy Flash All states disabled Sprecode connected Park connected Pickup idle outgoing Last Call Return idle connected incoming outgoing busy Call Forward idle connected incoming outgoing busy Speeddial Xfer idle connected incoming outgoing busy Speeddial Conf idle connected incoming outgoing busy Direct...

Page 406: ...ble shows how the keys in the example above would display on the IP Phone UI Notes 1 By default the IP phone idle screen collapses the softkeys So in the previous example softkey 12 will appear in position 1 if no other softkeys are set 2 A softkey type of empty does not display on the idle screen at all For more information about the softkey type of empty see Appendix A the section Softkey Settin...

Page 407: ...n configure the softkeys and programmable keys on the phones and any attached expansion module keys to perform specific functions using the configuration files or the Mitel Web UI The following table identifies the available functions of the softkeys programmable keys and expansion module keys on the IP phones Available functions may vary on each model phone softkey5 not used Key 4 blank A blank d...

Page 408: ... out For more information about speeddial prefixes see Speeddial Prefixes on page 5 169 You can also create Speeddial keys and edit the keys using the IP Phone keypad For more information about Speeddial keys and editing Speeddial keys see your Model Specific SIP Phone User Guide for more information Busy Lamp Field BLF blf BLF Indicates the key is configured for Busy Lamp Field BLF use A user can...

Page 409: ...cation for accessing customized XML services You can also specify a URL for an XML key For more information on XML see the section XML Customized Services on page 5 284 Flash flash Flash Indicates the key is set to generate a flash event when it is pressed The IP phone generates flash events only when a call is connected and there is an active RTP stream for example when the call is not on hold Fo...

Page 410: ... Forward Indicates the key is set to be used to access the Call Forward menus on the phone For more information about call forwarding see the section Call Forwarding on page 5 231 BLF Xfer blfxfer BLF Xfer Indicates the key is set to be used as a BLF key AND as a Transfer key For more information about the BLF Xfer feature see the section BLF Xfer and Speeddial Xfer Keys on page 5 181 Speeddial Xf...

Page 411: ...ion on the Received Callers List see the section Received Callers List on page 5 255 Outgoing Redial List redial Redial Indicates the key is configured to access the Outgoing Redial List For more information about the Outgoing Redial List see your Model Specific SIP Phone User Guide Conference conf Conference Indicates the key is configured as a Conference key for local conferencing For Sylantro a...

Page 412: ...lock the phone For more information about the lock unlock key see Locking IP Phone Keys on page 5 66 Paging paging Paging Indicates the softkey is set for Group Paging on the phone Pressing this key automatically sends a Real Time Transport Protocol RTP stream to pre configured multicast addresses without involving SIP signaling For more information about the Paging key see Group Paging RTP Settin...

Page 413: ... key see Interoperability Support for XMPP Based BroadSoft UC ONE Services on page 6 76 Contacts contacts Contacts Indicates the key is configured for Contact List functionality For more information about the Contacts key see Interoperability Support for XMPP Based BroadSoft UC ONE Services on page 6 76 Favorite favorite Favorite Indicates the key is configured for favorite contacts functionality ...

Page 414: ...ons for your model phone see your Model Specific SIP Phone User Guide CONFIGURING SOFTKEYS AND PROGRAMMABLE KEYS Use the following procedures to configure the softkeys and programmable keys on the IP phone For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files see Appendix A the sections Softkey Programmable Key Keypad Key Expansion Module Key Hard Key Parameters on page A 221 1 Click on O...

Page 415: ...ou want to use for the Speeddial key or 12345 as a Speeddial prefix 6 If applicable in the Line field select the line for which you want to associate the softkey 7 Some softkey types allow you to configure specific operational states Operational states display to the IP phone when a softkey is used To enable disable an operational state click the Idle Connected Incoming or Out going fields to chec...

Page 416: ...ay For example for the 6867i if top softkeys 1 through 44 are set to None on and top softkey 3 is programmed as a speeddial softkey with the label Home after saving the settings the Home speeddial softkey will appear on the first top softkey position on the LCD display Administrators now have the option to configure programmed softkey positioning behavior Enabling the collapsed softkey screen para...

Page 417: ...d thefirstfourbottom softkeys will not be taken into consideration when collapsing i e essentially locking the first four bottom softkeys and collapsing the rest Alternatively the inverse is true whereby if the collapsed softkey screen parameter is disabled i e defined as 0 and an offset parameter such as collapsed softkey screen offset Notes 1 The collapsed softkey screen parameter applies to bot...

Page 418: ...verse would apply If the configuration file for the phone contains the following defined parameters collapsed softkey screen 0 collapsed softkey screen offset top 0 collapsed softkey screen offset bottom 4 the phone would lock all the top softkeys i e 1 44 collapse bottom softkeys 1 4 and lock the rest of the bottom softkeys i e 5 24 Alternatively If the configuration file for the phone contains t...

Page 419: ...nnected hold This feature is configured by defining the collapsed context user softkey screen parameter as 0 disabled or 1 enabled in the configuration files For Example During a call on a 6869i IP phone with the collapsed context user softkey screen parameter disabled and with softkey 1 configured as Park the softkey will not appear on page 1 The user has to press the More key to access it on pag...

Page 420: ...the phone For example the 6867i has a total of six physical top softkey buttons and four physical bottom softkey buttons By default when a total of six top softkeys and four bottom softkeys are configured the screen displays five top softkeys and three bottom softkeys along with More options to access the remaining softkeys By enabling the collapsed more softkey screen parameter in the scenario ab...

Page 421: ...n be used to store speeddial numbers that are dialed out when a user presses and holds the respective key These press and hold speeddial numbers can be configured using the IP phone UI the Mitel Web UI or by defining the pnhkeypadN value and pnhkeypadN line parameters in the configuration files CONFIGURING PRESS AND HOLD SPEEDDIAL KEYPAD KEYS You can program one speeddial number for each applicabl...

Page 422: ...gram 3 In the Value field enter the speeddial number 4 In the Line field select the line number you want the phone to use when dialing the speeddial number 5 Click Save Settings HARD KEY REPROGRAMMING Administrators have the ability to reprogram a number of the IP phone s hard keys depending on the model with any one of the phone s softkey functions ...

Page 423: ...ot supported 2 Hard keys are only configurable using the configuration files hardkey1 Default type line Default line 1 hardkey2 Default type line Default line 2 hardkey1 Default type line Default line 1 hardkey2 Default type line Default line 2 hardkey3 Default type redial hardkey4 Default type callers hardkey8 Default type conf hardkey9 Default type xfer hardkey5 Options Key hardkey6 Hold Key har...

Page 424: ...able using the configuration files hardkey1 Default type line hardkey2 Default type line hardkey3 Default type redial hardkey4 Default type callers hardkey5 Options Key hardkey6 Hold Key hardkey7 Goodbye Key hardkey8 Default type conf hardkey9 Default type xfer hardkey10 Default type directory hardkey11 Presence Key Default line 1 Default line 2 Default value N A hardkey1 Default type line hardkey...

Page 425: ...ve in red is not supported 2 Hard keys are only configurable using the configuration files hardkey1 Default type line hardkey2 Default type line hardkey3 Default type redial hardkey4 Default type callers hardkey5 Options Key hardkey6 Hold Key hardkey7 Goodbye Key Default line 1 Default line 2 Default value N A ...

Page 426: ...s depending on the model include none line speeddial dnd blf 6865i 6867i 6869i 6873i only list 6865i 6867i 6869i 6873i only acd 6865i 6867i 6869i 6873i only xml flash spre park pickup lcr callforward blfxfer 6865i 6867i 6869i 6873i only speeddialxfer speeddialconf speeddialmwi 6865i 6867i 6869i 6873i only directory filter 6865i 6867i 6869i 6873i only callers redial conf xfer icom services phoneloc...

Page 427: ... 6867i 6869i 6873i only redial filter 6865i 6867i 6869i 6873i only paging callcenter hardkeyN line The line associated with the hard key you are configuring The hardkeyN line parameter can be set for the following key types only speeddial blf 6865i 6867i 6869i 6873i only list 6865i 6867i 6869i 6873i only acd 6865i 6867i 6869i 6873i only park pickup lcr blfxfer 6865i 6867i 6869i 6873i only speeddia...

Page 428: ...pecified hard key on the IP phones When enabled the phone locks the key with the provisioned local settings and prevents users from changing or configuring the key Note If no settings are configured locally but the hardkeyN type is defined in a configuration file the phone will lock the key with the key type defined in the configuration file along with any values associated with the additional har...

Page 429: ...ed If play a ring splash is defined as 1 then the behavior is the same as Normal If play a ring splash is defined as 2 then the behavior is the same as Normal but the ring splash plays when idle and also during the active call state 8 In call delayed same as Normal delayed but ring splash plays when idle and also during the active call state use the ring splash delay parameter to define the delay ...

Page 430: ... Hard Key Mapping and 6873i Hard Key Mapping figures 2 Hard keys 1 and 2 on all 6800 Series SIP phones cannot be programmed as Line keys other than their default Line 1 and Line 2 3 When hard keys 1 and 2 on the 6863i and 6865i are remapped if applicable LED indication will follow the color cadence of the corresponding feature when the key is reprogrammed 4 When hard keys 1 to 4 on 6867i 6869i and...

Page 431: ...ified by the Administrator For example a phone has a Park key and a Pickup key already configured on the phone and the Administrator downloads a configuration file to the phone that has specific key types of None Line Speeddial and XML After the configuration file is downloaded the Park key list will show None Line Speeddial XML and Park the Pickup key list will show None Line Speeddial XML and Pi...

Page 432: ...then pause to let you enter the remaining phone number You can use this feature for numbers that contain long prefixes For example if you had the following Speeddial configuration in the configuration files softkey2 type speeddial softkey2 label Europe Office softkey2 value 1234567 softkey2 line 2 after you press softkey2 on the phone it dials the prefix number automatically and pauses for you to ...

Page 433: ...or s phone shows that the worker s phone is in use and busy BLF SETTING On the 6865i IP phone the LED lights next to each BLF programmable key illuminate steady to indicate the monitored line is off hook or unregistered The LED goes off when the line is idle When the monitored extension is ringing the LED flashes On the 6867i 6869i and 6873i the busy and idle states are indicated by the color of t...

Page 434: ...LED flashes You can configure a BLF List key on the IP Phones using the configuration files or the Mitel Web UI You can also specify a BLF list URI that the phone uses to access the required BLF list You can specify a BLF List URI using the list uri parameter in the configuration files or the BLF List URI field in the Mitel Web UI at the path Operation Softkeys Programmable Keys Expansion Module K...

Page 435: ...er must have the Busy Lamp Field service enabled for their user The user must add each desired extension to the Monitored Users List on the Busy Lamp Field service page and also enter in a list name for the monitored users BLF list on the same page Changes to the Monitored Users List are dynamic and the Mitel IP phones are automatically updated without requiring a restart Reference For sample BLF ...

Page 436: ...he Line field select a line number that is actively registered to the appropriate SIP proxy you are using 7 In the BLF List URI field enter the name of the BLF list defined on the BroadSoft Broad Works Busy Lamp Field page for your particular user For example sip 9 192 168 104 13 8 Select the line state idle connected incoming outgoing busy that you want to apply to the BLF softkey or programmable...

Page 437: ... 5 seconds before switching again When a user manually scrolls the pages by pressing the More key or the Function key for the page you want to display on the M685i no activity triggered page flipping should occur for 5 seconds after the manual switch If the phone softkeys are hidden by an overlay screen such as an XML UI object a menu e g the Services Directory or Received Callers List menu or if ...

Page 438: ...eds the maximum characters the respective phone s screen can display the phone adds an ellipsis i e at the end of the label indicating the label has been automatically truncated In the secondary display mode i e blf display label to max 1 the phone does not automatically truncate the label and simply displays as many characters as the area reserved for the label allows CONFIGURING BLF AND BLF LIST...

Page 439: ...es of question marks or configured symbol will be displayed on the screen indicating blank BLF List and or Favorite softkeys Alternatively applicable only to BLF List softkeys Administrators can configure the phone to replace the series of question marks with a series of different symbols by defining the keys noname symbol parameter with a desired character For example if keys noname symbol e is d...

Page 440: ...vent update from the line manager for BLF transitions to ringing state the ring splash value is checked to take the appropriate action The following alerting patterns are available for all applicable phones 0 Silence ring splash off 1 Normal same as current BLF ring splash 2 Normal delayed After a delay of x seconds the ring signal that is the same as the current BLF ring splash is played use the ...

Page 441: ...frequency interval for the active call state 11 In call low volume same as Low volume but ring splash plays when idle and also during the active call state 12 In call low volume delayed same as Low volume delayed but ring splash plays when idle and also during the active call state use the ring splash delay parameter to define the delay The following parameters are available allowing administrator...

Page 442: ...ile a call hold or call waiting reminder is playing the secondary in call ring splash will be played 500ms after the current event has ended The inverse is also true whereby call hold or call waiting reminders will be played 500ms after the BLF ring splash if they occur while a BLF ring splash is playing In scenarios where multiple keys are configured for periodic ring splashes and multiple BLF ta...

Page 443: ...inimum value for this parameter is 120 seconds 2 minutes and the maximum is 2147483647 seconds The default is 3600 1 hour The phone resubscribes to the BLF subscription service before the defined subscription period ends You can configure this feature using the configuration files or the Mitel Web UI CONFIGURING BLF SUBSCRIPTION PERIOD Use the following procedures to configure the BLF subscription...

Page 444: ...5i 6867i 6869i and 6873i only and Speeddial Xfer The BLF key allows one or more extensions to be monitored and once there is any state change with those extensions the key shows the status of the monitored lines The Xfer key allows a call to be transferred to other recipients blindly or consultatively The Speeddial key allows a number to be dialed quickly by pressing one key configured for speeddi...

Page 445: ...ine key again BLF Xfer and Call forward When the focused line is in the Ringing state pressing the BLF Xfer key forwards the call to the extension unconditionally disregarding the status of the monitored extension BLF Xfer and Speeddial When the focused line and the monitored extension are idle pressing the BLF Xfer key causes the phone to go offhook and dial the number of the extension SPEEDDIAL ...

Page 446: ...ine 1 Refer to the following in Appendix A to configure a BLF Xfer and Speeddial Xfer key on the IP phone using the configuration files To set a BLF Xfer and Speeddial Xfer key using the configuration files see Appendix A Softkey Programmable Key Keypad Key Expansion Module Key Hard Key Parameters on page A 221 SOFTKEY PARAMETERS PROGRAMMABLE KEY PARAMETERS EXPANSION MODULE PARAMETERS TOP SOFTKEY ...

Page 447: ...lick on Operation Expansion Keys 2 Choose a key that you want to assign the BLF Xfer key or a Speeddial Xfer key to and select BLF Xfer or Speeddial Xfer from the Type field 3 In the Label field enter a key label to assign to the BLF Xfer key for example BX35 4 In the Value field enter the monitored extension for example 35 5 In the Line field select the line for which you want to use the key func...

Page 448: ...he number when the far end is ringing The message Conf Unavailable briefly displays when a conference is already in progress The active call is not put on hold when the speeddial number is dialed This feature is not compatible with centralized conferencing The softkey programmable key is called Speeddial Conf in the Web UI drop down list In the configuration file use speeddialconf as the softkey t...

Page 449: ...tion Programmable Keys or Click on Operation Expansion Module Keys 2 In the Type field select Speeddial Conf from the list of options 3 In the Label field enter a key label to assign to the Speeddial Conf key for example Sales 4 In the Value field enter the number that the phone dials when the Speeddial Conf key is pressed for example 4556 5 In the Line field select the line for which you want to ...

Page 450: ... messages By configuring a programmable key top softkey or expansion module softkey as Speeddial MWI and defining call and voicemail URIs users can monitor and listen to pending messages on multiple voicemail accounts When new messages are pending on a monitored voicemail account the corresponding Speeddial MWI key s LED will blink 6865i 6867i and 6869i and the UI for top softkeys on the 6867i 686...

Page 451: ...rs can configure the key through the Mitel Web UI as well as the configuration files Configuring a Speeddial MWI Key Using the Mitel Web UI Use the following procedure to configure a Speeddial MWI key using the Mitel Web UI 1 Click on Operation Programmable Keys or Click on Operation Softkeys and XML Top Keys or Click on Operation Expansion Module N 2 Choose an available key and in the Type field ...

Page 452: ... for which you want to use the key functionality e g 3 The following parametersareexamplesyoucanusetoconfigureaSpeeddial MWIkeyusingtheconfiguration files For Top Softkeys topsoftkey1 type speeddialmwi topsoftkey1 label Peter topsoftkey1 value 33123456 3456 0000 domain sip voicemail_peter domain topsoftkey1 line 3 For Programmable Keys prgkey1 type speeddialmwi prgkey1 value 33123456 3456 0000 dom...

Page 453: ...esponding Line key Message Waiting Indicator MWI etc will behave normally Administrators can configure this feature by defining the discreet ringing parameter in the configuration files i e 0 the default disables this feature while 1 enables discreet ringing or by programming a key on the phone with the Discreet Ringing type feature using the Mitel Web UI After the key has been programmed users ca...

Page 454: ...ocedure to configure the Discreet Ringing Key using the Mitel Web UI 1 Click on Operation Softkeys and XML or Click on Operation Programmable Keys or Click on Operation Expansion Module Keys 2 Select a key that you want to use as a Discreet Ringing key 3 In the Type field select Discreet Ringing 4 Click Save Settings to save your settings MITEL WEB UI ...

Page 455: ... Drop Softkey Settings on page A 281 AUTOMATIC CALL DISTRIBUTION ACD FOR SYLANTRO BROAD WORKS SERVERS The IP phones support an Automatic Call Distribution ACD feature for Sylantro BroadWorks servers The ACD feature allows the server to distribute calls from a queue to registered IP phone users agents To use the ACD feature on an IP phone the administrator must first configure an ACD softkey or pro...

Page 456: ... to manually change the phone status to unavailable using the IP Phone UI ACD AUTO AVAILABLE TIMER Whenever the IP phone user answers a call or misses a call the server automatically changes the phone s status to unavailable The administrator can control how long the IP phone remains in the unavailable state by configuring an auto available timer When the timer expires the IP phone status is autom...

Page 457: ...nal Features 5 194 To configure an ACD key using the configuration files see Appendix A the section Softkey Programmable Key Keypad Key Expansion Module Key Hard Key Parameters on page A 221 CONFIGURATION FILES ...

Page 458: ...or Click on Operation Expansion Module N Depending on your phone model the key configuration screen displays 2 In the Type field select Auto Call Distribution 3 In the Label field specify a name for this ACD softkey The Label helps identify which queue you are subscribing to when you login This field does not apply to programmable keys For example Sales 4 In the Line field select the line which th...

Page 459: ...allow an IP phone user to log into the Customer Support phone queue The administrator assigns the label Support to the softkey so it is easily recognizable to the IP phone user When the IP phone user wants to subscribe to the Customer Support queue the user presses the Support key and can log in Once logged in to the queue you can make yourself available or unavailable to take calls by pressing th...

Page 460: ...s The default is 3600 1 hour Setting this parameter to a value lower than 3600 allows the configuredACD feature to become active more quickly after a software firmware upgrade or after a reboot of the IP phone If you enter a value lower than 120 for this parameter the default value 3600 will be used by the IP phone You can configure this feature using the configuration files or the Mitel Web UI CO...

Page 461: ... Settings to save your changes DO NOT DISTURB DND The IP phones have a feature you can enable called Do Not Disturb DND An Administrator or User can set Do Not Disturb based on the accounts on the phone all accounts or a specific account You can set specific modes for the way you want the phone to handle DND The three modes you can set on the phone for DND are Account Phone Custom MITEL WEB UI ...

Page 462: ...an configure the DND softkey and the DND mode Account Phone Custom using the configuration files or the Mitel Web UI Once you configure DND you can access the DND screen on the IP Phone UI Notes 1 If there is only one account configured on the phone then the mode setting is ignored and the phone behaves as if the mode was set to Phone 2 You must configure a DND key on the phone to be able to use t...

Page 463: ...softkey1 type dnd softkey1 states idle connected incoming outgoing busy In the above example softkey 1 is configured for DND for line 1 only with a custom configuration Pressing softkey 1 displays DND screens for which you can customize on the phone To set DND in the configuration files see Appendix A the sections DND Key Mode Settings on page A 185 Softkey Programmable Key Keypad Key Expansion Mo...

Page 464: ...ON for all accounts on the phone DND key toggles all accounts on the phone to ON or OFF Custom Sets the phone to display custom screens after pressing the DND key that list the account s on the phone The user can select a specific account for DND turn DND ON for all accounts or turn DND OFF for all accounts 3 Click Save Settings to save your changes The change takes effect immediately without a re...

Page 465: ... mode the first account allows you to change the DND status for all accounts 2 Number and name of accounts that display to this screen are dependent on the number and name of accounts configured on the phone In the screen in step 4 Screenname1 is configured on Line 1 Screenname2 is configured on Line 2 and Screenname3 is configured on Line 3 The name for the account is dependent on the name specif...

Page 466: ...ounts are configured on the phone Only account 1 has DND enabled while account 2 has DND disabled DND in Phone Mode Default 1 Press the DND key to turn on off DND for all accounts on the phone 2 Use the 3 and 4 navigation keys to scroll through each account Note If there is no DND key configured or if it is removed DND is disabled on the IP Phone Notes 1 If there is no DND key configured or if it ...

Page 467: ...making the change press 3 Done and then Confirm to save the change Pressing 0 Cancel cancels the attempted change CONFIGURING DND USING THE IP PHONE UI 6867I 6869I 6873I After you add a DND key to your phone you can toggle the DND state using this key on the phone Use the following procedure to enable disable DND on the IP phone The following procedures assume you have already configured a DND key...

Page 468: ...i 6869i 6873i From the Home screen press the DND softkey to toggle DND on or off for all accounts on the phone DND in Custom Mode 6867i 6869i 1 From the Home screen press the DND softkey The screen displays a list of the accounts on the phone and allows you to enable disable a specific account or all accounts 2 Use the 2 and 5 navigation keys to scroll through the accounts and press the button to ...

Page 469: ...reen displays a list of the accounts on the phone and allows you to enable disable a specific account or all accounts 2 Press the checkbox to enable DND for the respective account 3 Press the Save softkey to save your changes IP PHONE UI Note Press the All On or All Off softkeys to quickly enable or disable DND for all accounts 6873i DND Custom Mode ...

Page 470: ...m the group can pick up the held call As a multiple BLA group On one single phone multiple BLA DA can be associated with different line appearances Every BLA DA is independent from each other and follows the same rules as a single BLA group As multiple instances of a BLA DA A x line id parameter was defined in draft anil sip ping bla 02 txt to present the incoming call to or place an outgoing call...

Page 471: ...mber BLA Number Sylantro servers and ININ servers require specific configuration methods for per line configurations For Sylantro Server When configuring the BLA feature on a per line basis for a Sylantro server the value set for the sip lineN bla number parameter shall be the same value set for the sip lineN user name parameter for all the phones in the group For example if sip lineN user name is...

Page 472: ... Using the Configuration Files Use the following procedures to configure global BLA on the IP phone For specific global parameters you can set in the configuration files see Appendix A the section SIP Basic Global Settings on page A 72 Configuring Per Line BLA Using the Configuration Files Use the following procedures to configure per line BLA on the IP phone For specific per line parameters you c...

Page 473: ... 2 In the Line Mode field select the BLA option 3 In the Phone Number field enter the phone number of the IP phone 4 For global configuration of BLA In the BLA Number field enter the Bridge Line Appearance BLA number to be shared across all IP phones 5 For per line configuration of BLA In the BLA Number field enter the Bridge Line Appearance BLA number to be shared on a specific line 6 Click Save ...

Page 474: ...ration in the subscribe message received from the server If no value is specified in the Subscribe message received from the server the phone uses the default value of 300 seconds You can configure this parameter using the configuration files or the Mitel Web UI Configuring the BLA Subscription Period Use the following procedures to configure the BLA Subscription Period To configure the BLA subscr...

Page 475: ...erver If no value is specified the phone uses the default value of 300 seconds Valid values are 0 to 3700 Default is 300 seconds 3 Click Save Settings to save your changes USING A BLA LINE ON THE IP PHONE If you have either a global or per line BLA configuration and you want to share a call on the line with a BLA group you need to press the Hold button before sharing the call with the group For ex...

Page 476: ...nce as a BLA then there is no need for third party registration WhenconfiguringtheBLAfeatureonaper linebasisforthirdpartyregistrationandsubscription the third party name must be configured using the sip lineN bla number parameter For third party registration to work effectively one of the lines should register as generic with its own username For example Bob has Alice s appearance on his phone Bob...

Page 477: ...e following are limitations of the BLA Support for MWI feature The phone shows MWI for the first matching identity if more than one line with different user names has the same BLA account If a normal line has the same user name as the BLA user of another line the phone shows MWI only for the normal line Note The P Preferred Identity for BLA accounts is also sent for hold unhold messages Notes 1 If...

Page 478: ...o configure BLA support for MWI For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files see Appendix A the section BLA Support for MWI on page A 92 CONFIGURING BLA SUPPORT FOR MWI USING THE MITEL WEB UI Use the following procedure to configure BLA support for MWI 1 Click on Advanced Settings Global SIP Advanced SIP Settings CONFIGURATION FILES MITEL WEB UI ...

Page 479: ...rty Refer to the following example Notes 1 If you change the setting on this parameter you must reboot the phone for it to take affect 2 Both the sip explicit mwi subscription and sip mwi for bla account parameters must be enabled in order for the MWI subscription for BLA to occur 3 The MWI re subscription for the BLA account uses the value set for the sip explicit mwi subscription period paramete...

Page 480: ... SCA bridging Bridge active A bridged call is in progress Bridge held The 3rd party i e non SCA party in the bridge is on hold The following tables provide the key states and LED behavior in an SCA bridge call for users involved in an SCA call and users not involved in the SCA call Line Keys and Idle Screens Note Enabling disabling the beep is configurable on the server side Note A Call Info heade...

Page 481: ...d Red Held Slow Flashing Red Slow Flashing Red Hold private Slow Flashing Red Solid Red Bridge active Solid Red Solid Red Bridge held Slow Flashing Red Solid Red STATE LINE KEY PRESSED FOR LOCAL LINE KEY PRESSED FOR REMOTE Idle N A Attempt to seize the line Seized Hang up Ignore Progressing Hang up Ignore Alerting answer N A Active Hold Bridge Held Retrieve Bridge Hold private Retrieve Ignore Brid...

Page 482: ... 4 2 0 when the phone looses connection and is in local mode with the network device the phone switches to the generic line mode instead of the BroadSoft SCA line mode This ensures users are able to make and receive calls as the phone does not need to send the SUBSCRIBE message to get a dial tone to make a call Once the phone is connected to the network device again the phone leave local mode and ...

Page 483: ...loud Telepo servers The following paragraphs describe the static and programmable configuration of the call park and pickup feature PARK PICKUP STATIC CONFIGURATION The static method configures park and pickup on a global basis for all supported IP phones You can use the configuration files or the Mitel Web UI to configure a park pickup static configuration In the configuration files you use the f...

Page 484: ... table provides the values you enter for the sprecode and pickupsprecode parameters configuration files or Park Call and Pickup Parked Call fields Mitel Web UI Park Pickup Call Server Configuration Values Leave value fields blank to disable the park and pickup feature Configuring Park Pickup Static Configuration Using the Configuration Files Use the following parameters to configure park pickup st...

Page 485: ...iguration creates park and pickup keys softkeys programmable keys expansion module keys that you can configure on the IP phones For the 6867i 6869i and 6873i IP phones you can configure keys with park and pickup functionality and then specify a customized label to display on the Phone UI specify the state of the park and or pickup keys not applicable for MiCloud Telepo interoperability For the 686...

Page 486: ... Providers call manager For the MiCloud Telepo call manager two keys configured with BLF Xfer functionality one defined as myCalls and the other as callPark facilitates the call park retrieve method When the first BLF Xfer key defined as myCalls is pressed the phone will subscribe to the myCalls domain com URI and users will be able to pick up any authorized calls Pressing the second BLF Xfer key ...

Page 487: ...iders topsoftkeyN type blfxfer topsoftkeyN label Park topsoftkeyN value callPark topsoftkeyN type blfxfer topsoftkeyN label Pickup topsoftkeyN value myCalls SERVER PARK CONFIGURATION PICKUP CONFIGURATION Asterisk prgkeyN type park sip lineN park pickup config 70 70 asterisk prgkeyN type pickup sip lineN park pickup config 70 70 asterisk Sylantro prgkeyN type park sip lineN park pickup config 98 99...

Page 488: ...mple the following has been configured on the phone softkey1 type park softkey1 label parkCall softkey1 states connected softkey1 value broadworks 68 softkey2 type pickup softkey2 label pickupCall softkey2 states idle outgoing softkey2 value broadworks 88 sip park pickup config 70 70 asterisk sip line1 park pickup config 78 98 broadworks If the active call is using Line1 the phone will use the Bro...

Page 489: ...s and XML Park Pickup Call Server Configuration Values Use the following procedure to configure the park pickup call feature using the Mitel Web UI For the 6867i 6869i 6873i 1 Click on Advanced Settings Line 1 you can select any line 2 Under Advanced SIP Settings in the Park Pickup Config field enter the appropriate value based on the server in your network Note Applicable values depend on the ser...

Page 490: ...u can select any line 2 Under Advanced SIP Settings in the Park Pickup Config field enter the appropriate value based on the server in your network Notes 1 The Value and Line fields are already configured from the Park Pickup Config field 2 The park softkey has a default state of Connected 3 Leave this state enabled or to disable uncheck the check box Notes 1 The Value and Line fields are already ...

Page 491: ...nd apply the changes Configuring a Park Pickup Key Using Mitel Web UI for the MiCloud Telepo for Service Providers Call Manager Use the following procedure to configure a BLF Xfer key will call park pickup functionality using the Mitel Web UI 1 Click on Operation Programmable Keys or Click on Operation Softkeys and XML Top Keys or Click on Operation Expansion Module N Note The Value and Line field...

Page 492: ...ing a Call 1 While on a live call press the Park softkey 2 Perform the following for your specific server If the call is parked successfully the response is either a greeting voice confirming that the call was parked or a hang up occurs 3 If the call fails you can pick up the call using the next procedure and press the Park softkey again to retry step 2 IP PHONE UI ASTERISK Server announces the ex...

Page 493: ...oftkey or programmable key and a call comes into your phone after you are finished with the call and hangup you can press the key configured for lcr and the phone dials the last call you received When you configure an lcr softkey the label LCR displays next to that softkey on the IP phone When the Sylantro server detects an lcr request it translates this request and routes the call to the last cal...

Page 494: ...I only the account you configured is enabled All other accounts are grayed out but set to the same configuration Using the Mitel Web UI if you make changes to that initial account the changes apply to all accounts on the phone Custom mode The Custom mode allows you to configure CFWD for a specific account or all accounts You can configure a specific mode All Busy and or No Answer for each account ...

Page 495: ...on Programmable Keys Notes 1 In the configuration files the call forward key mode parameter in the section Configuring Call Forwarding on page 5 232 is in addition to the previous call forward parameter call forward disabled You can still use the previous call forwarding parameter if desired in the configuration files 2 In the IP Phone UI you can access the Call Forwarding features at the path Opt...

Page 496: ... key applies to the account in focus Phone The Phone mode allows you to set the same CFWD configuration for all accounts All Busy and or No Answer When you configure the initial account the phone applies the configuration to all other accounts In the Mitel Web UI only the account you configured is enabled All other accounts are grayed out but set to the same configu ration Using the Mitel Web UI i...

Page 497: ...f there is no CFWD key configured on the phone or it is removed you can still set the CFWD modes via the IP Phone UI at the path Options Call Forward 2 If there is only one account configured on the phone then the mode setting is ignored and the phone behaves as if the mode was set to Phone 3 When configuring a CFWD state All Busy No Answer for an account you must configure a CFWD number for that ...

Page 498: ...ount mode in step 4 you can enable disable each account or all accounts as applicable You can enter different phone number for each enabled state 2 If you selected Custom mode you can enable disable each account or all accountsasapplicable Youcanenterdifferentphonenumbersforeachenabled state 3 If you selected Phone mode all accounts are set to the same CFWD configuration All Busy and or No Answer ...

Page 499: ...you use the Mitel Web UI to change the Call Forward Key Mode to Phone all accounts synchronize to Account 1 Notes 1 If there is no CFWD key configured on the phone or it is removed you can still enable CFWD via the at the path Options Call Forward 2 If there is only one account configured on the phone then the mode setting is ignored and the phone behaves as if the mode was set to Phone 3 Using th...

Page 500: ... Forwards incoming calls to a specified number if DND has been enabled for that account OR if the account is currently engaged in another call No Answer Forwards incoming calls to a specified number if the call has not been answered for the specified number of rings You can also use the following keys if required All Off Disables all CFWD states for the current account in focus All On Enables all ...

Page 501: ...OFF 6 Press 4Set to save the change 7 In the CFWD State screen press the 2 navigation keys to scroll to the CFWD Number screen and press 4Change Enter a phone number to apply to the current state in focus When the phone is in the state you specified and a call comes into the phone it forwards the call to the number you specify 8 Press 4Set to save the change CFWD State Screen Cfwd All Use to view ...

Page 502: ...nd call forward is configured on the phone the phone rings the number of times you specify in the No Rings screen and then forwards the call if there is no answer 11 Press 4Set to save the change 12 Press 3Done to save all your changes Each time you press 3 Done the following screen displays 13 Press Confirm to confirm the change s each time the Apply Changes screen displays All changes are saved ...

Page 503: ...ou can enable disable a specific account on the phone with any or all of the following states However the configuration you set will apply to all accounts on the phone All Forwards all incoming calls for the respective account to the specified number Busy Forwards incoming calls to a specified number if DND has been enabled for that account OR if the account is currently engaged in another call IP...

Page 504: ...e screen Press 2Next to toggle the state of the CFWD state ON or OFF In the example in Step 4 you press 2Next to change the option to Off 6 Press the 4Set key to save the change 7 In the CFWD State screen press the 2 navigation key to scroll to the CFWD Number screen and press 4Change Note If CFWD All CFWD Busy and CFWD No Answer are all enabled and or if the account has DND enabled the CFWDAll se...

Page 505: ...ing calls Valid values are 1 to 20 Default is 3 When the phone receives an incoming call and call forward is configured on the phone the phone rings the number of times you specify in the No Rings screen and then forwards the call 12 Press 4Set to save the change 13 Press 3Done to save all your changes Each time you press 3Done the following screen displays 14 Press Confirm to confirm the change s...

Page 506: ...tions All Forwards all incoming calls for the respective account to the specified number Busy Forwards incoming calls to a specified number if DND has been enabled for that account OR if the account is currently engaged in another call No Answer Forwards incoming calls to a specified number if the call has not been answered for the specified number of rings You can also use the following keys if r...

Page 507: ...hange the option to Off 6 Press the 4Set key to save the change 7 In the CFWD State screen press the 2 navigation key to scroll to the CFWD Number screen and press 4Change 8 Enter a phone number to apply to the current state in focus When the phone is in the state you specified and a call comes into the phone it forwards the call to the number you specify 9 Press 4Set to save the change CFWD State...

Page 508: ...g call and call forward is configured on the phone the phone rings the number of times you specify in the No Rings screen and then forwards the call 12 Press 4Set to save the change 13 Press 3Done to save all your changes Each time you press3 Done the following screen displays 14 Press Confirm to confirm the change s each time the Apply Changes screen displays All changes are saved to the phone fo...

Page 509: ...een displays for the account you selected 5 Enter forwarding numbers using the dialpad keys for any of the following states All Forwards all incoming calls for the respective account to the specified number Busy Forwards incoming calls to a specified number if DND has been enabled for that account OR if the account is currently engaged in another call Note If the BroadSoft BroadWorks Executive and...

Page 510: ... go back to the Home screen 4 With the account in focus on Home screen press the configured Call Fwd softkey or press and press the Call Forward icon The Call Forward screen displays for the account you selected 5 Enter forwarding numbers using the dialpad keys for any of the following states Notes 1 Pressing the 2 navigation key moves the selection to the next field checkbox 2 If All and Busy and...

Page 511: ...ption and press the button or Select softkey The Call Forward screen displays and is applicable to all accounts configured on the phone 2 Enter forwarding numbers using the dialpad keys for any of the following states All Forwards all incoming calls for the respective account to the specified number Busy Forwards incoming calls to a specified number if DND has been enabled for that account OR if t...

Page 512: ...s applicable to all accounts configured on the phone 2 Enter forwarding numbers using the dialpad keys for any of the following states All Forwards all incoming calls for the respective account to the specified number Notes 1 Pressing the 2 navigation key moves the selection to the next field checkbox 2 If All and Busy and No Answer are all enabled and or if the account has DND enabled the All set...

Page 513: ...on or Select softkey The Call Forward screen displays 2 Press the 3 or 4 navigation keys to change to the desired account 3 Enter forwarding numbers using the dialpad keys for any of the following states Notes 1 If All and Busy and No Answer are all enabled and or if the account has DND enabled the All settings take precedence over Busy and No Answer 2 Pressing the CopyToAll key copies the call fo...

Page 514: ...ive Call Forward mode and press the button to enable the Call Forward mode 6 Press the Save softkey to save your changes CFWD in Custom Mode 6873i 1 Press the configured Call Fwd softkey or press and press the Call Forward icon The Call Forward screen displays Notes 1 Pressing the 2 navigation key moves the selection to the next field checkbox 2 If All and Busy and No Answer are all enabled and or...

Page 515: ...ther destination i e via call forward the phone displays the Caller ID phone number and or caller name of the new destination and the reason for the call diversion Similarly at the new destination the Caller ID of the original call destination displays CALL DIVERSION EXAMPLE 1 Tim calls Mark at x400 2 Mark s phone is busy 3 Mark s phone diverts the incoming call to another destination Roger x 464 ...

Page 516: ... IP phone will display the information stored in the directory instead of the display name of the INVITE The directory lookup suppression pattern allows for the customization of the name displayed on the IP phone s screen and suppression of the directory lookup This parameter is useful in such cases where a call manager will intentionally modify the display name according to a specific scenario Fo...

Page 517: ... header of the INVITE message for incoming calls When this feature is enabled the call destination name displays on the LCD of the phone This allows the user to easily determine the intended destination of an incoming call BEHAVIOR OF THE PHONE When this feature is enabled the phone behaves as follows Notes 1 Pattern matching is only applied for incoming calls and against the From header display n...

Page 518: ...iles When disabled the Received Callers List does not display on the IP phone UI and the Received Callers List key is ignored when pressed When enabled you can view scroll and delete line items in the Received Callers List from the IP phone UI You can also directly dial from a displayed line item in the Received Callers List You can download the Received Callers List to your PC for viewing using t...

Page 519: ...s ignored if pressed by the user Use the following procedures to enable disable the Missed Received Callers List on the IP phones For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files for enabling disabling the Missed Received Callers List see Appendix A the section Missed received Callers List Settings on page A 158 DOWNLOADING THE RECEIVED CALLERS LIST Use the following procedure to dow...

Page 520: ...Specifying URIs for these parameters cause the creation of an XML custom application instead of the standard function of the Received Callers List and Services keys An Administrator can configure these parameters using the configuration files only CREATING CUSTOMIZABLE RECEIVED CALLERS LIST AND SERVICES KEYS Use the following procedure to create customized Received Callers List and Services keys o...

Page 521: ... calls that have not been answered increment on the phone s idle screen as number New Calls As the number of unanswered calls increment the phone numbers associated with the calls are stored in the Missed Callers List The user can access the Missed Callers List and clear the call from the list Once the user accesses the Missed Callers List the number New Calls on the idle screen is cleared 6863i 6...

Page 522: ...ing disabling the Missed Calls Indicator see Appendix A the section Missed Calls Indicator Settings on page A 164 MISSED CALLS INDICATOR LINE APPLICABILITY Administrators can also select the specific lines on the phone to which the missed calls indicator is applicable This can be performed by defining the sip lineN missed calls enabled parameter in the configuration files 0 for disabled 1 for enab...

Page 523: ...0 2 UnderAdditional Settings for the Missed Calls option enable by checking the checkbox or disable by unchecking the box default is enabled 3 Click Save Settings 4 Repeat Steps 1 to 3 for any other lines you want to configure ...

Page 524: ...onfigure a Call History key on the top and bottom softkeys of the phone as well as expansion module softkeys using the Mitel Web UI Additionally Administrators can configure a Call History key on configurable hard keys and the top and bottom softkeys of the phone as well as expansion module softkeys by defining a key as callhistory in the configuration files Note This feature is applicable to the ...

Page 525: ...Web UI 1 Click on Operation Softkeys and XML Top Keys 6867i 6869i and 6873i or Click on Operation Expansion Module N M680i and M685i Top and Bottom Softkeys 2 Select a top or bottom softkey 6867i 6869i and 6873i 3 In the Type field select Call History 4 In the Label field enter a label to display on the phone for the key default is Call History 5 Click Save Settings Expansion Module Keys 6 Select ...

Page 526: ... edit existing contacts Users can also view contact details e g title company name numbers work and home addresses e mail addresses etc Downloading the Local Directory List Using the Mitel Web UI You can use the Mitel Web UI to download the Local Directory List from the IP phone to the configuration server Note For more detailed information about user related Directory functions see your Mitel Mod...

Page 527: ...st CSV BASED DIRECTORIES Two Comma Separated Value CSV based directory files can be created and utilized on the phone as per previous releases but the number of fields the phone can parse has been greatly expanded The phone can now handle CSV files with the following field values in the following order separated by commas First Name mandatory Last Name Company Job Title Work Address Street Work Ad...

Page 528: ...rectory list file that you can download from the configuration server directory 2 The name location of the second CSV based directory list file that you can download from the configuration server directory 1 name Specifies the folder name of the directory defined in the directory 1 parameter Can also be configured through the Phone UI see Enabling Disabling Directories and Renaming Labels Using th...

Page 529: ...aming Labels Using the Phone UI on page 5 275 for details CONFIGURATION FILES PARAMETER DESCRIPTION exchange server Specifies the user s Microsoft Exchange server IP address or Fully Qualified Domain Name FQDN exchange use ssl Specifies whether SSL Secure Sockets Layer should be enabled or disabled exchange path Configures a custom Exchange Web Services EWS path on the Exchange server hosting the ...

Page 530: ...nt of days that the phone waits between Microsoft Exchange directory resync operations exchange contacts resync max delay Specifies the maximum time in minutes the phone waits past the scheduled time before starting a Microsoft Exchange directory checksync CONFIGURATION FILES Parameter Description xsi ip Specifies the Xsi Enterprise Directory credentials if applicable and IP address or Fully Quali...

Page 531: ...Using the Phone UI on page 5 275 for details xsi group directory enabled Specifies whether or not the BroadSoft Xsi Group Directory should be enabled to be accessed on the phone Can also be configured through the Phone UI see Enabling Disabling Directories and Renaming Labels Using the Phone UI on page 5 275 for details xsi group common directory enabled Specifies whether or not the BroadSoft Xsi ...

Page 532: ... Renaming Labels Using the Phone UI on page 5 275 for details xsi group common directory name Specifies the folder name of the BroadSoft Xsi Group Common Directory when enabled Can also be configured through the Phone UI see Enabling Disabling Directories and Renaming Labels Using the Phone UI on page 5 275 for details xsi resync time Sets the time of day in a 24 hour period for the IP phone to up...

Page 533: ...ldap server Specifies the LDAP server hostname or IP address ldap user name Specifies the user s LDAP user name Can also be configured through the Phone UI see Entering Usernames Passwords and Connection Testing on page 5 276 for details ldap base dn Specifies the LDAP server base DN It is the description of the top level of the directory tree Usually if a company domain is company com the base DN...

Page 534: ...ribute list Specifies the LDAP last name e g Doe for the attribute list If this parameter contains more than one value only the first matching value will be selected in the record ldap company attribute list Specifies the LDAP company name e g Mitel for the attribute list If this parameter contains more than one value only the first matching value will be selected in the record ldap job title attr...

Page 535: ...p home phone 1 attribute list Specifies the LDAP home phone 1 e g 1 416 468 3266 for the attribute list If this parameter contains more than one value only the first matching value will be selected in the record ldap home phone 2 attribute list Specifies the LDAP home phone 2 e g 1 416 468 3267 for the attribute list If this parameter contains more than one value only the first matching value will...

Page 536: ... enable disable the Directory List on the IP phones For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files for enabling disabling the Directory List see Appendix A the section General Directory Settings on page A 155 Display and Sorting Administrators and users can configure the directory entries to display using the contact s first name and then last name or vice versa Moreover the option...

Page 537: ...d to the phone For the 6867i 6869i 1 Press on the phone to enter the Options List 2 Navigate to the Directory Settings option and press the button or Select softkey 3 With Display Name Order highlighted press the 4 key to move to selection column 4 Use the 5 and 2 keys to and choose the desired display name order 5 Press the 3 key to move to back to the options column and press the 2 key to highli...

Page 538: ...sing the Phone UI Use the following procedure on the phone s UI to enable disable directories and rename directory folder labels For the 6863i 6865i 1 Press the key on the phone to enter the Option List 2 Select Directory 3 Select External Sources 4 Navigate to the Directory Source you wish to enable disable e g LDAP and press the 4 Enter key 5 Navigate to the State setting and press the 4 Enter k...

Page 539: ...b 6 Press the Directory source label you wish to edit and enter in a new label 7 Press the Save softkey to save your changes Entering Usernames Passwords and Connection Testing Before a specific Directory can be loaded user credentials i e username and password for each respective external Directory source will need to be entered using the phone s UI by navigating to the Options Credentials menu F...

Page 540: ...s the button or Select softkey 3 Use the 3 and 4 keys to navigate to the desired Directory source tab e g LDAP Microsoft Exchange BroadSoft Xsi 4 Press the 2 key to highlight the Username field and using the dialpad keys enter in the username applicable to the Directory source 5 Press the 2 key to highlight the Password field and using the dialpad keys enter in the password applicable to the Direc...

Page 541: ...ease check your username password and or server configuration 10 Press the Save softkey to save your changes DIRECTORY SEARCH DYNAMIC THRESHOLD 6867I 6869I AND 6873I ONLY On the 6867i 6869i and 6873i IP phones contacts are listed and updated dynamically on screen depending on the letters that are entered into the search field This dynamic update is dependent on the directory search dynamic thresho...

Page 542: ...oming call s phone number is 5551234567 as the last 7 digits are a match the phone will display the directory entry s name i e John Smith on screen In previous releases the value defined for the directory digits match parameter corresponded to the maximum number of digits the phone would take into account to perform the directory lookup This means using the example above if an incoming call s phon...

Page 543: ...ers so the phone can dial out to connect to a voicemail server You associate the Voicemail numbers with the phone numbers configured on each line For each assigned Voicemail number there can be a minimum of 0 or a maximum of 1 Voicemail access phone number The Voicemail list displays a list of phone numbers assigned to the IP phone that has registered voicemail accounts associated with them The en...

Page 544: ...e2 vmail 95 Use the following procedure to configure voicemail using the configuration files For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files see Appendix A the section Voicemail Settings on page A 127 Note In the above example the user would dial 97 to access the voicemail account for line 1 and 95 to access the voicemail account for line 2 CONFIGURATION FILES Note You can also acce...

Page 545: ... s corresponding softkey will display as a gray circle only i e no indication of the number of pending messages Additionally the softkey s LED will be illuminated if available The parameter is set to 0 no visual indicators by default CONFIGURING SCA VOICEMAIL VISUAL INDICATORS Use the following procedure to configure the SCA voicemail visual indicators For specific parameters you can set in the co...

Page 546: ... plan parameter introduces new alphanumeric characters that control the masking of the PIN and The following is an example value of the new configuration parameter 11 1XXX 5555 72 1XXX 73 1XXX where 1XXX will mask any PINs that are 4 digits long and start with 1 This parameter value should lead to the following masking Entered digits 11 1234 5555 will lead to INVITE to this number but 11 5555 is s...

Page 547: ...cal list of menu items on the IP phones AastraIPPhoneTextScreen for Text screens AastraIPPhoneFormattedTextScreen for Text screens Creates a screen of text that wraps appropriately Creates a formatted screen of text specifies text alignment text size text static or scrolling AastraIPPhoneInputScreen for User Input screens AastraIPPhoneInputScreen Time and Date Attributes for User Input screens Cre...

Page 548: ... 286 Mitel Web UI See page 5 286 yes no Default no Note This value is case sensitive xml status scroll delay config files Status Scroll Delay seconds Web UI Allows you to set the time delay in seconds between the scrolling of each status message on the phone Use with Configuration files See page 5 287 Mitel Web UI See page 5 287 1 to 25 Default 5 XML Scroll Up and Scroll Down Tags Supports the new...

Page 549: ...t in the configuration files and Mitel Web UI override the attribute you specify for the AastraIPPhoneStatus object For example if the AastraIPPhoneStatus object has the attribute of Beep yes and you uncheck disable the XML Beep Support in the Mitel Web UI the phone does not beep when it receives an AastraIPPhoneStatus object Setting the BEEP option in the configuration files and the Mitel Web UI ...

Page 550: ...hout having to reboot the phone This feature involves creating XML scripts that push the changed configuration parameter s from the server to the IP phones You can use the AastraIPPhoneConfiguration object in the XML scripts to change configuration parameters or configure new parameters However since the IP phone does not save new parameters created in XML scripts to the local cfg file when the ph...

Page 551: ... initiating a request to an XML application from a softkey an HTTP server can push an XML object to the phone via HTTP Post When the phone sees a PUSH request containing an XML object it tries to authenticate the request It does so by checking the IP address or host name of the requesting host against a list of trusted hosts or domain names configured via the Mitel Web UI parameter called XML Push...

Page 552: ...ays on the IP phone for the softkey For example XML 5 In the Value field enter the IP address or qualified domain name of the XML application 6 In the XML Application URI field enter the HTTP server path or qualified domain name of the XML application you want to load to the IP phone For example you could enter an XML application called http 172 16 96 63 mitel internet php in the applicable field ...

Page 553: ...p 8 the illustration shows a host IP address of 10 50 10 53 10 50 10 54 in the applicable field 11 Click Save Settings to save your changes For the 6863i 6865i 1 Click on Operation Programmable Keys 2 Select an available key 3 In the Type field select XML from the list box 4 In the Value field enter the IP address or qualified domain name of the XML application 5 In the XML Application URI field e...

Page 554: ...MIZED SERVICE After you create save and configure the IP phone with an XML application the customized service is ready for you to use REFERENCE For more information about customizing the phones using XML objects contact Mitel Customer Support regarding the XML Development Guide Use the following procedure to use the XML feature on the IP phone For the 6863i 6865i 1 Press the programmable key confi...

Page 555: ...Startup Specifies the URI for which the phone executes a GET on when a startup event occurs Successful Registration Specifies the URI for which the phone executes a GET on when a successful registration event occurs Registration Event Specifies the URI for when registration events occur or when there are registration state changes Note If defined this action URI is also called upon at startup if t...

Page 556: ... For more information see Action URI Disconnected on page 5 302 XML SIP Notify Specifies the URI to be called when an empty XML SIP NOTIFY is received by the phone For more information see XML SIP Notify Events on page 5 306 Poll Specifies the URI to be called every action uri poll interval seconds For more information see Polling Action URIs on page 5 299 Poll Interval Specifies the interval in s...

Page 557: ...tion uri registered Successful Registration SIPUSERNAME SIPAUTHNAME PROXYURL LINESTATE LOCALIP action uri registration event Registration Event REGISTRATIONSTATE REGISTRATIONCODE action uri incoming Incoming Call REMOTENUMBER DISPLAYNAME SIPUSERNAME INCOMINGNAME LINESTATE CALLDURATION CALLDIRECTION LOCALIP action uri outgoing Outgoing Call REMOTENUMBER SIPUSERNAME LINESTATE LOCALIP action uri offh...

Page 558: ...RI Disconnected on page 5 302 action uri blf N A BLFNO BLFSTATE BLFTRANSFER action uri xml sip notify XML SIP Notify LOCALIP For more information see XML SIP Notify Events on page 5 306 action uri poll Poll For more information see Polling Action URIs on page 5 299 action uri poll interval Interval For more information see Polling Action URIs on page 5 299 VARIABLE DESCRIPTION SIPUSERNAME Username...

Page 559: ...ller SIPUSERNAME Username associated with registered phone incoming caller outgoing caller INCOMINGNAME Name associated with incoming caller CALLDURATION Note This variable allows for enhanced information in call records and billing applications Duration of last call This variable is associated with onhook CALLDIRECTION Note This variable allows for enhanced information in call records and billing...

Page 560: ...hone executes a GET on http 10 50 10 140 outgoing pl number 5551212 You can configure this feature via the configuration files or the Mitel Web UI Configuring XML Action URIs Use the following procedures to configure XML Action URIs using the configuration files or the Mitel Web UI For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files see Appendix A the section Action URI Settings on page...

Page 561: ...e Successful Registration parameter executes on the first successful registration of each unique line configured on the phone 4 Enter an XML URI in the Registration Event field for when the phone performs regis tration For example http 10 30 100 39 PHPtests actionuri php action RegEvt regstate REGISTRA TIONSTATE regcode REGISTRATIONCODE This parameter specifies the URI that the phone executes a GE...

Page 562: ...the section Action URI Disconnected on page 5 302 11 To configure an XML SIP Notify event see the section XML SIP Notify Events on page 5 306 12 Optional You can poll a URI at specific intervals on the phones For more information about polling Action URIs see Polling Action URIs on page 5 299 13 Click Save Settings to save your changes POLLING ACTION URIS Another way to reach a phone behind a fire...

Page 563: ...3 Configuring Polling Action URI via the Mitel Web UI Use the following procedure to configure polling Action URI using the Mitel Web UI 1 Click on Advanced Settings Action URI 2 In the Poll field enter a URI to be called every action uri pool interval seconds Enter the value in a URI format For example http myserver com myappli xml 3 In the Interval field enter the interval in seconds between cal...

Page 564: ...NSTATE REGISTRATIONCODE If theAdministrator enables this feature by specifying a connect URI when a call is connected the phone checks to see if the event has a Connect URI configured If the phones finds a configured URI it executes an XML script or the variable if defined Example In the configuration files you can enter the following action uri connected http www example com connect php An Admini...

Page 565: ...n when it goes into the connected state Leaving this field empty disables the Action URI Con nected feature For example http www example com connect php 3 Click Save Settings to save your settings ACTION URI DISCONNECTED The phones have a parameter action uri disconnected that allow a disconnect event to occur when the phone transitions from any active state outgoing incoming connected or calling ...

Page 566: ... fargo ana mitel com disconnected xml state LINESTATE and then Phone A calls Phone B Phone B answers and then hangs up Phone A executes a GET on http fargo ana mitel com disconnected xml state CONNECTED which is what the remote server receives An Administrator can enable the disconnect feature using the configuration files or the Mitel Web UI LINESTATE VALUE DESCRIPTION MEANING IN A DISCONNECTED U...

Page 567: ...guration files see Appendix A the section Action URI Settings on page A 167 1 Click on Advanced Settings Action URI Event 2 In the Disconnected field enter a valid URI for which the phone executes a GET on when it transitions from the incoming outgoing calling or connected state into the idle state Leaving this field empty disables the Action URI Disconnected feature For example CONFIGURATION FILE...

Page 568: ...i blf parameter supports the following variables Notes 1 This feature is applicable to the 6865i 6867i 6869i and 6873i SIP Phones 2 The parameter blf key mode must be defined as 2 in the configuration files to use the BLF Action URI feature 3 If the parameter blf key mode is defined as 2 but a BLFAction URI is not defined pressing a BLF or BLF Xfer key will follow the default BLF key mode behavior...

Page 569: ... xml with or without XML content An Administrator can enable disable the SIP NOTIFY event using a specific parameter in the configuration files sip xml notify event or the Mitel Web UI XML SIP Notify If XML content is provided in the SIP NOTIFY it is processed directly by the phone as it is done for an XML PUSH If the content is empty in the SIP NOTIFY the phone automatically triggers a new pre co...

Page 570: ...q 4 NOTIFY Max Forwards 70 Event aastra xml Content Type application xml Content Length 0 When the phone receives the SIP NOTIFY it will trigger the action uri xml sip notify parameter if it has been previously configured using the configuration files or the Mitel Web UI If the action uri xml sip notify parameter is not configured the phone does not do anything On the phone side a System Administr...

Page 571: ...ne the phone automatically uses the value you specify for the following parameter action uri xml sip notify For the specific parameter you can set in the configuration files see Appendix A the section Polling Action URI Settings on page A 173 Enabling Disabling XML SIP NOTIFY Using the Mitel Web UI Use the following procedure to enable disable the XML SIP NOTIFY feature in the Mitel Web UI 1 Click...

Page 572: ... by the phone the phone automatically uses the value you specify for the Action URI XML SIP Notify parameter at the path Advanced Settings Action URI Click on Advanced Settings Action URI 2 Specify a URI to be called when an empty XML SIP NOTIFY is received by the phone For example http myserver com myappli xml 3 Click Save Settings to save your changes Note To ensure the SIP NOTIFY is coming from...

Page 573: ...RI configured with variables in the form VARIABLENAME they are replaced with the value of the appropriate variable After all of the variables are bound the softkey executes a GET on the URI Example For example if the administrator specifies an XML softkey with the value http 10 50 10 140 script pl name SIPUSERNAME This softkey executes a GET on http 10 50 10 140 script pl name 42512 assuming that ...

Page 574: ...eys 2 Select an available key 3 In the Type field select XML from the list box 4 In the Value field enter the URI that the phone performs a GET on when the key is pressed For example http 10 50 10 140 script pl name SIPUSERNAME 5 Click Save Settings to save your changes For the 6867i 6869i 6873i CONFIGURATION FILES MITEL WEB UI Note You can use the following variables in the URI SIPUSERNAME SIPAUT...

Page 575: ...phones allow the redirecting of phone based hard keys to XML scripts This allows the server to provide the phone with Redial Transfer Xfer Conference Conf and Intercom Icom key features and the Voicemail option feature rather then accessing them from the phone side This feature allows you to access the redirected keys and voicemail option from the server using the IP Phone s Services Menu By defau...

Page 576: ... Key Redirection Settings for Redial Xfer Conf Icom Voicemail on page A 288 OPTIONS KEY REDIRECTION The IP phones allow the redirecting of the Options Key to an XML script This allows the server to provide the phone with available options rather then accessing them from the phone side You access the Options Key XML script by pressing the Options Key You can still access the Options Menu from the p...

Page 577: ...state which then destroys the XML application that was being displayed With the off hook interaction feature you can set an auto offhook parameter that determines whether or not the phone is prevented from entering the off hook dialing state if the handset is off hook and the call ends AnAdministrator can enable allow phone to enter the off hook dialing state or disable prevent the phone from ente...

Page 578: ...ure also allows you to still use any softkeys programmable key Extension Module Keys applicable to the XML application even though the phone is locked However any keys NOT associated with the XML application cannot be used when the phone is locked Also XML Get Requests override the locked feature on the phone so that any softkey pressed by the user that initiates a Get Request continues to get sen...

Page 579: ...he line not in focus plays busy tone 2 or more lines active and far end disconnects the line in focus displays disconnected screen plays busy tone displays Call Terminated message on the screen for 5 seconds When 5 second times out the busy tone stops the disconnected screen disappears 2 or more lines active and a line NOT in focus is disconnected by the far end no busy tone plays no disconnected ...

Page 580: ...splays or Select any Line key The busy tone stops and the call terminated screen no longer displays A dial screen displays CENTRALIZED CONFERENCING FOR SYLANTRO AND BROAD SOFT SERVERS The IP phones include support for centralized conferencing Ad Hoc conferencing for Sylantro andBroadSoftservers ThisfeatureprovidescentralizedconferencingontheSIPserver versus localized on the phone and allows IP pho...

Page 581: ...lized conferencing on a global or per line basis using the configuration files or the Mitel Web UI To use the centralized conferencing after it is enabled see your Model Specific SIP Phone User Guide CONFIGURING CENTRALIZED CONFERENCING USING THE CONFIGU RATION FILES You use the following parameters to configure centralized conferencing in the configuration files Global Parameter sip centralized c...

Page 582: ... the following actions If you have specified a proxy server registrar server then to reach the media server via the proxy server set this field to one of the following conf Sylantro server or Conference BroadSoft server By setting this field to conf or Conference you specify conf proxy_server _ad dress proxy_port For example if the proxy server address is 206 229 26 60 and the port used is 10060 t...

Page 583: ...wing actions If you have specified a proxy server registrar server then to reach the media server via the proxy server set this field to one of the following conf Sylantro server or Conference BroadSoft server By setting this field to conf or Conference you specify conf proxy_server _ad dress proxy_port To reach the media server using a different address port than that specified by the proxy set t...

Page 584: ... 3911 which allows an additional caller to join an active call between two parties if the caller knows the dialog information This feature begins a conference using a join header as described in RFC 3911 The SIP Join feature provides the following Security via the whitelist which is a feature that already exists on the phone Initiates an offhook action uri when it is answered Initiates an onhook a...

Page 585: ...tomatically dials out if the number matches the local dial plan or if it reaches the set digit timeout Live dial mode without dial plan matching When a user initiates a conference call or transfer they hear a dial tone before dialing begins The phone does not match the number to the local dial plan and automatically dials out only if it reaches the set digit timeout or if the number matches a numb...

Page 586: ...r the configured username and password that is sent to the HTTP HTTPS server for digest authentication by the server By default username is aastra and password is aastra You can enter the username and password in two ways Using the configuration files you can change the default values for the following parameters http digest username specifies the username to use for HTTP HTTPS digest authenticati...

Page 587: ... Phone UI s idle screen 4 Press the Log In key to displays the username password screen 5 Enter a username in the Username field up to 40 characters and a password in the Password field up to 20 characters 6 After entering the username and password press Submit The phone attempts to authenticate with the server If successful the phone reboots and loads the user configuration If unsuccessful the ph...

Page 588: ... List 1 and List 2 Page 2 List 3 and List 4 Page 3 List 5 and List 6 To use the M685i press the function key for the page you want to display to the LCD page 1 page2 or page 3 and press the applicable softkey You can customize the headings on each M685i Expansion Module screen using the configuration files by defining the following parameters Expansion Module 1 3 pages expmod1page1left expmod1page...

Page 589: ...pmod3page3right The following is an example of configuring Expansion Module 1 column headings expmod1page1left Personnel Ext expmod1page1right Operations Ext expmod1page2left Marketing Ext expmod1page2right Logistics Ext expmod1page3left Engineering Ext expmod1page3right Shipping Ext CUSTOMIZING THE M685I EXPANSION MODULE COLUMN DISPLAY For specific parameters you can set in the configuration file...

Page 590: ...Chapter 6 CONFIGURING ADVANCED OPERATIONAL FEATURES ...

Page 591: ... discovery Using mDNS page 6 14 As Feature Event Subscription page 6 14 Blacklist Duration page 6 17 Whitelist Proxy page 6 18 Transport Layer Security TLS page 6 21 802 1x Support page 6 24 Symmetric UDP Signaling page 6 30 Symmetric TLS Signaling page 6 31 Removing UserAgent and Server SIP Headers page 6 31 GRUU and sip instance Support page 6 32 Multi Stage Digit Collection Billing Codes Suppor...

Page 592: ...for Username Prompts page 6 51 Active Voice over IP VoIP Recording page 6 52 BroadSoft Xsi Features page 6 55 Feature Re Branding Support for BroadSoft Based Service Providers page 6 74 Interoperability Support for XMPP Based BroadSoft UC ONE Services page 6 76 BroadSoft BroadWorks Executive and Assistant Services page 6 90 Visitor Desk Phone Support page 6 99 Option to Enable Disable RTCP page 6 ...

Page 593: ...e Recovery Mode Allows you to enable or disable Web recovery mode and set the maximum boot count on the IP phone Auto discovery Using mDNS The IP phones automatically perform an auto discovery of all servers on a network using mDNS When the IP phone discovers a TFTP server it is automatically configured by that TFTP server As Feature Event Subscription Allows you to enable or disable a specific li...

Page 594: ...RFC3891 Switching Between Early Media and Local Ringing The phones support switching between early media and local ring tone Configurable Codec Negotiation Behavior Allows you to enable or disable the microphone during early media Configurable Codec Negotiation Behavior Allows Administrators to change the phone s codec negotiation behavior so that the phone will indicate only one preferred codec i...

Page 595: ...eypad input order during username prompts from uppercase letters digit lower case letters to digit uppercase letters lower case letters Active Voice over IP VoIP Recording When using the IP phones with a Mitel call manager supporting voice recording and a recording system with the predefined subset of the SIP interface administrators can configure the phones to send duplicate copies of the transmi...

Page 596: ... the ability to immediately reboot the phone or reload all the parameter settings in the configuration files without rebooting based upon a check sync NOTIFY message with a reboot variable defined MiCloud Telepo Music on Hold Support Allows Administrators the ability to configure the phones to utilize music on hold functionality when using the MiCloud Telepo for Service Providers call manager UAC ...

Page 597: ...the phones when the remote ACS boots the phones they contact the ACS and establish the configuration automatically In addition to configuring the phone with TR 069 you can also do the following Reboot the phone Reset to factory defaults Update the firmware of the device Backup restore configuration Upload the log file REFERENCE For more information about TR 069 see the TR 069 Configuration Guide U...

Page 598: ...Disturb Forwarding Failed Diverted To enable uaCSTA support Administrators must define the csta parameter as 1 in the configuration files as well as define the csta proxy csta port and csta password parameters The csta proxy corresponds to the IP address or FQDN of the CTSA proxy server the ctsa port corresponds to the CTSA proxy server s port number and the ctsa password corresponds to the passwo...

Page 599: ...call server Aastra Mac mac address Aastra Line line number The MAC address is sent in uppercase hex numbers for example 00085D03C792 The line number is a number between 1 and 24 The following parameters allow you to enable disable the sending of MAC address and line number to the call server sip send mac sip send line These parameters are disabled by default The parameters are configurable via the...

Page 600: ...IND TRANSFER The SIP message sequence for Blind Transfer avoids the transfer target having two simultaneous calls Prior to release 1 4 a CANCEL message was sent to the transfer target if it was in a ringing state after sending a REFER to the transferee to complete the transfer In the 1 4 and later releases the CANCEL is now sent before the REFER message The following parameter allows the system ad...

Page 601: ...rspan call manager and a remote phone was defined with an overriding caller ID semi attended transfers to the remote phones would be sent to the destinations of the overriding caller ID and not the intended remote phones Administrators utilizing the phones with the Mitel Clearspan platform can correct this by defining the sip refer to from contact parameter as 1 i e enabled in the respective confi...

Page 602: ...ble or disable this feature sip update callerid This parameter is configurable via the configuration files only CONFIGURING UPDATE CALLER ID DURING A CALL For the specific parameter you can set in the configuration files for enabling disabling the update of caller ID during a call seeAppendixA the section Update Caller ID Setting on page A 286 BOOT SEQUENCE RECOVERY MODE You can force the IP phone...

Page 603: ... feature is called as feature event and works with the DND CFWD and ACD keys This feature is configurable using the configuration files or the Mitel Web UI HOW IT WORKS ON THE PHONE UI When you enable the as feature event on the phone AND you activate a DND CFWD and or ACD key pressing the key performs as follows Note After the phone has been successfully recovered through the web recovery mode th...

Page 604: ... side ACD when you press the ACD softkey the screen that displays is dependent on the state of the ACD subscription Possible state for ACD are Logged Out User has the option of logging in Logged In User has the option of logging out or making the phone unavailable Unavailable User has the option of logging out or making the phone available CONFIGURING AS FEATURE EVENT SUBSCRIPTION USING THE CON FI...

Page 605: ...ription Using the Mitel Web UI Use the following procedure to enable disable the server side as feature event on the IP Phone using the Mitel Web UI 1 Click on Advanced Settings LineN Advanced SIP Settings 2 Enable the As Feature Event Subscription field by checking the check box Disable this field by unchecking the box 3 Click Save Settings to save your changes 4 Click on Advanced Settings Global...

Page 606: ...ges to any servers on the blacklist If all servers are on the blacklist then the IP phone attempts to send the message to the first server on the list You can specify how long failed servers remain on the blacklist in the IP phone s configuration file or in the Mitel Web UI The default setting is 300 seconds 5 minutes If you set the duration to 0 seconds then you disable the blacklist feature CONF...

Page 607: ...anges WHITELIST PROXY To protect your IP phone network you can configure a Whitelist Proxy feature that screens incoming call requests received by the IP phones When this feature is enabled an IP phone accepts call requests from a trusted proxy server only The IP phone rejects any call requests from an untrusted proxy server The whitelist is dynamically updated i e the phones are able to refresh a...

Page 608: ...vers CONFIGURING WHITELIST PROXY USING THE CONFIGURATION FILES You use the following parameter to configure the whitelist proxy feature using the configuration files sip whitelist For the specific parameters you can set in the configuration files for setting Whitelist Proxy see Appendix A the section Whitelist Proxy Setting on page A 288 Notes 1 200 OK responses to INVITE requests for an IP call 2...

Page 609: ...b UI 1 Click on Advanced Settings Global SIP Advanced SIP Settings 2 The Whitelist Proxy field is disabled by default To enable this field check the box When this feature is enabled an IP phone accepts call requests from a trusted proxy server only The IP phone rejects any call requests from an untrusted proxy server 3 Click Save Settings to save your changes MITEL WEB UI ...

Page 610: ... take more time when placing each call Thus the IP phones also have a feature that allows you to setup the connection to the server once and re use that one connection for all calls from the phone It is called Persistent TLS The setup connection for Persistent TLS is established during the registration of the phone If the phones are set to use Persistent TLS and a call is made from the phone this ...

Page 611: ...es the IP phones use the SIP URI scheme when TLS or persistent TLS is enabled Enabling the parameter i e defining the parameter as 1 ensures the phones use the SIPS URI scheme in such scenarios The SIPS URI scheme is used by default CONFIGURING TLS USING THE CONFIGURATION FILES You use the following parameters to configure TLS in the configuration files sip transport protocol sips persistent tls s...

Page 612: ...o use Use the following procedure to configure TLS using the Mitel Web UI 1 Click on Advanced Settings Global SIP Advanced SIP Settings 2 In the Transport Protocol field select TLS or Persistent TLS 3 Click Save Settings to save your changes 4 Click on Advanced Settings TLS Support MITEL WEB UI Note If configuring Persistent TLS you must go to Advanced Settings Global SIP Basic Network Settings an...

Page 613: ... and offers the capability to permit or deny network connectivity control LAN access and apply traffic policy based on user or endpoint identity This feature supports both the EAP MD5 and EAP TLS protocols If802 1xonthephoneisenabled a 802 1xAuthenticating messagedisplaysduringstartup of the phone If the 802 1x failed to authenticate with the server the phone continues its normal startup process u...

Page 614: ...he 802 1x feature on the IP phone using the configuration files the IP Phone UI or the Mitel Web UI CONFIGURING THE 802 1X PROTOCOL USING THE CONFIGURATION FILES You use the following parameters to configure the 802 1x Protocol on your phone using the configuration files For EAP MD5 use eap type identity md5 password pc port passthrough enabled For EAP TLS use eap type identity 802 1x root and int...

Page 615: ... phone to use MD5 authentication or Select EAP TLS to configure the phone to use TLS authentication 7 Press Set 8 To configure MD5 select EAP MD5 Settings 9 Select Identity 10 Enter the identity or username used for authenticating the phone 11 Press Set 12 Enter the password used for authenticating the phone 13 Press Set CONFIGURATION FILES Note If configuring 802 1x using the IP Phone UI the cert...

Page 616: ... authentication 6 In the EAP TLS Settings Identity field enter a username used for authenticating the phone 7 In the EAP TLS Settings MD5 Password field enter the password used for authenti cating the phone 8 Press the Save softkey 9 Restart the phone for the selection to take affect IP PHONE UI Note The 802 1x Protocol is disabled by default If you select EAP TLS authentication you must use the c...

Page 617: ...Identity field enter a username used for authenticating the phone 8 In the EAP TLS Settings MD5 Password field enter the password used for authenti cating the phone 9 Press the Save softkey 10 Restart the phone for the selection to take affect IP PHONE UI Note If required swipe left on the screen to navigate to the second page of options Note The 802 1x Protocol is disabled by default If you selec...

Page 618: ...t To configure EAP MD5 2 In the EAP Type field select EAP MD5 Valid values are Disabled Default EAP MD5 and EAP TLS 3 In the Identify field enter an Identity for the IP phone for which you are configuring 802 1x 4 For example phone1 5 In the MD5 Password field enter a password used for the MD5 authentication of the phone 6 For example password1 7 Click Save Settings to save your changes To configu...

Page 619: ...ens for UDP messages using port 5060 You can manually disable symmetric UDP signaling using the IP phone s configuration file When you disable symmetric UDP signaling then the IP phone chooses a random source port for UDP messages The IP phone also chooses a random source port for UDP messages to the registrar if you configure a backup registrar server Likewise the IP phone chooses a random source...

Page 620: ...G USING THE CONFIGURA TION FILES You use the following parameter to enable or disable Symmetric TLS Signaling in the configuration files sips symmetric tls signaling For the specific parameter you can set in the configuration files see Appendix A the section Symmetric TLS Signaling Setting on page A 292 REMOVING USERAGENT AND SERVER SIP HEADERS Currently the phone always configures the SIP UserAge...

Page 621: ...nes GRUU Draft 15 is not compatible with versions prior to GRUU Draft 10 Phones do not support temporary or phone created GRUUs Enabling Disabling GRUU and sip instance Support Use the following procedure to enable disable GRUU and sip instance support For the specific parameter you can set in the configuration files see Appendix A the section GRUU and sip instance Support on page A 292 MULTI STAG...

Page 622: ...d billing code The user dials the phone number When prompted for billing codes user dials the billing code For example suppose the IP phone user is using billing code 300 and dialing the external number 617 238 5500 The IP user then enters the number using the following format 6172385000 300 Using mandatory billing codes if the user is configuring a Speeddial number then they enter the number usin...

Page 623: ...ers in the Internet The IP Phones may be configured to issue requests for DNS records using one of three methods In the first method the IP phones issue requests for A records from the DNS server In the second method the IP phones issue requests for SRV records from the DNS server In the third method the IP phones issue requests for NAPTR records from the DNS server However the IP phones do not us...

Page 624: ...ill use _sip _udp abc mitel com for the SRV lookup 3 If the NAPTR record is returned test mitel com SIP D2T _sip _tcp test mitel com where the service type TCP mismatches the phone configured transport protocol UDP the phone will ignore this value and use the default value _sip _udp test aastra com for the SRV lookup Note The phone does not use the service type sent by the NAPTR response to switch...

Page 625: ... the following procedure to enable disable out of order SIP requests For the specific parameter you can set in the configuration files see Appendix A the section Ignore Out of Order SIP Requests on page A 294 EARLY ONLY PARAMETER IN REPLACES HEADER RFC3891 The phones support the early only parameter in the Replaces header as referenced in RFC3891 When the phone receives a Replaces header with the ...

Page 626: ...e Appendix A the section Enable Microphone During Early Media on page A 211 CONFIGURABLE CODEC NEGOTIATION BEHAVIOR By default when the phone receives an SDP Offer with several codecs defined for the media stream the phone will reply with an SDP Answer containing all the codecs present in the Offer as per RFC 3264 A configuration parameter sip single codec reply in sdp is available that allows Adm...

Page 627: ... restriction was active and a user dialed a number that was not allowed the PBX sent a certain status code 4xx and the phone displayed Call Failed or Busy which was not very informative to the user Now when an outgoing call fails with a status code 4xx or 5xx the phone will look for the Reason Header RFC 3326 in the status message and display the Reason Header to the user The reason text is displa...

Page 628: ...ify opt headers ENABLING DISABLING OPTIONAL ALLOW AND ALLOW EVENT HEADERS Use the following procedure to enable disable Allow and Allow Event headers For the specific parameter you can set in the configuration files see Appendix A the section Optional Allow and Allow Event Headers on page A 294 CONFIGURABLE SIP P ASSERTED IDENTITY PAI The IP Phones support a private extension to SIP for Asserted I...

Page 629: ... URI field is unavailable the phone will use the URI information contained in the tel URI field 3 Use tel URI only The phone will use the URI information contained in the tel URI field if available and ignore the information contained in the sip URI field if available 4 tel URI preferred The phone will use the URI information contained in the tel URI field If the tel URI field is unavailable the p...

Page 630: ...NG THE ROUTE HEADER IN THE SIP PACKET Use the following procedure to enable disable the addition of the Route header in the SIP packet For the specific parameter you can set in the configuration files see Appendix A the section Route Header in SIP Packet on page A 295 CONFIGURATION FILES ...

Page 631: ...50 91 2 f Unknown sip Unknown 10 50 91 2 tag as19d00fc8 t sip 1106 10 50 110 54 5060 transport udp tag 916699998 i 73cad5456806f3a7768d17e8617279d7 10 50 91 2 CSeq 102 OPTIONS By default the IP Phones use the long format However an Administrator can provision the short compact format using the configuration files The Mitel Web UI does not support this configuration feature ENABLING DISABLING THE C...

Page 632: ...s the URI the event is discarded If you are in the process of changing the softkey or programmable key setting or the key is disabled while the event is being processed the request is discarded The phone maps key events to its physical keys and not to its mapped logical keys The following table identifies the XML URIs for pressing buttons on the phone CONFIGURATION FILES XML KEY URI DESCRIPTION LI...

Page 633: ...e expansion module VOLUME KEY Key VolDwn Volume Decrease Key Key VolUp Volume Increase Key FEATURE KEYS Key Xfer Transfer Key Key Conf Conference Key Key Services Services Key Key Intercom Intercom Key Key Headset Headset Key Note For Headset URI key the behavior will be as if the speaker headset key is pressed and does not switch to headset for headset key event or to speaker for speaker key even...

Page 634: ...dbye GoodBye Key NAVIGATION KEYS Key NavUp Navigation Up Key Key NavDwn Navigation Down Key Key NavLeft Navigation Left Key Key NavRight Navigation Right Key FUNCTION KEYS ONLY IF PHYSICALLY CONFIGURED ON THE PHONE OR EXPANSION MODULE KeyPark Park Softkey KeyPickup Pickup Softkey Notes 1 If the URI key is a valid key the phone executes the key regardless of the current state on the phone 2 Park an...

Page 635: ...ird party hosting provider delivers SIP services but does not have local access or control of the LAN side DNS infrastructure CONFIGURING DNS HOST FILE PRE CACHING FROM THE CONFIGU RATION SERVER The DNS host file must reside on the same server as the configuration files startup cfg tuz etc and the filename to download is specified within the configuration Use the following parameter to configure t...

Page 636: ...rver1 server2 or server3 or if the local LAN DNS server fails to respond CONFIGURING DNS SERVICE SRV RECORDS PRE CACHING In addition to using a host file to resolve host names to IP addresses an Administrator can also configure DNS SRV records Service Records for geographic redundancy and failover between application servers in the network The SIP registration and SIP proxy features on the phones ...

Page 637: ...box2 example com sip dns srv4 name _sip _udp example com sip dns srv4 priority 20 sip dns srv4 weight 10 sip dns srv4 port 5060 sip dns srv4 target backupbox example com The first three records SRV 1 2 and 3 share a priority of 10 so the weight field s value is used by the phones to load balance across the three target host names Bigbox will get 60 of the load and smallbox1 and smallbox2 will each...

Page 638: ...alid values are 0 to 65535 Default is 0 For example sip dns srv1 priority 10 After this parameter is downloaded from the configuration server to the phone the phone uses the DNS server with the lowest numbered priority first to perform DNS lookups 4 Enter the parameter sip dnx srvX weight where X is a value from 1 to 4 Enter a value for the DNS server weight Valid values are 0 to 65535 Default is ...

Page 639: ...following parameters are available to be defined in the configuration files SIP SERVICES sip services transport protocol sip services port The above parameters are used to specify the transport protocol and port used for SIP services RTCP SUMMARY REPORTS sip rtcp summary reports transport protocol The above parameter is used to specify the transport protocol used for RTCP summary reports CONFIGURA...

Page 640: ...lt keypad input order during username prompts changes from uppercase letters to the respective digit and then to lowercase letters with each successive press of the key For example when pressing 2 on the keypad the following will be input with each successive press When the username alphanumeric input order parameter is defined as 1 the respective digit will be available as the first input option ...

Page 641: ... system and when the session is established the IP phone will duplicate all of its incoming and outgoing RTP SRTP packets and send them to the voice recording system where they can be archived and analyzed as required Administrators must configure a whitelist for voice recording system authentication using the recorder addressN parameters where N is a number from 1 to 6 These parameters are Note T...

Page 642: ...on authentication using the recording destinationN parameters where N is a number from 1 to 6 These parameters are used to specify trusted IP addresses corresponding to the destination where the RTP SRTP packets should be sent The IP phone will check to see if the destination IP addresses are trusted before sending the duplicated RTP SRTP packets If all of these parameters are left undefined no au...

Page 643: ...audible locally remotely or both WARNING THE RECORDING ICON IS DISPLAYED ON THE IP PHONES TO INDICATE THE RECORDING SESSION IS ACTIVE AND THAT A DUPLICATE COPY OF THE RTP SRTP STREAM IS TO BE SENT FROM THE PHONE TO THE RECORDING SERVER THE OVERALL RECORDING AND ITS QUALITY IS DEPENDENT ON THE RECORDING SERVER AND THE NETWORK Note In addition to the aforementioned parameters corresponding to the ac...

Page 644: ...d user credentials i e username and password for BroadSoft Xsi will need to be entered using the phone s UI by navigating to the Options Credentials menu For the 6867i 6869i and 6873i this menu also allows users to test their connection to the Xsi server Use the following procedure on the phone s UI to enter user credentials and test the connection to the Xsi server For the 6863i 6865i 1 Press on ...

Page 645: ...st softkey to begin testing A green will appear if there are no issues with the connection to the server A red will appear if issues are found If there are issues with your connection please check your username password and or server configuration 9 Press the Save softkey to save your changes For the 6873i 1 Press on the phone to enter the Options List 2 Press the Credentials icon 3 Use the right ...

Page 646: ... features and services Global example xsi allow sip authentication 1 sip xsi user name 5553456 xsi broadworks net sip auth name 5553456 sip password 123456 Per line example xsi allow sip authentication 1 sip line1 xsi user name 5553456 xsi broadworks net sip line1 auth name 5553456 sip line1 password 123456 sip line2 xsi user name 5551234 xsi broadworks net sip line2 auth name 5551234 sip line2 pa...

Page 647: ... to the same value as the sip auth name and sip lineN auth name 3 If using a per line XSI SIP authentication configuration depending on which line is in focus on the phone the Xsi features will reflect the account that has been configured for that line For example with Xsi Basic Calls Logs enabled pressing the Callers List key on the phone when Line 3 is in focus on the phone will display the call...

Page 648: ...quired and password on the phone through the Options Credentials menu For Speed Dial 8 functionality a Speed Dial 8 key should be configured for easy access to the Speed Dial 8 menu Users andAdministrators can configure a Speed Dial 8 key using the Web UI selecting a desired key changing the type to Speeddial and then entering xsi speeddial8 in the Value field Creating a Speed Dial 8 key Key Using...

Page 649: ...speeddial8 in the respective configuration file Notes 1 Speed Dial 8 key Label and Line values are optional 2 For details on how to configure speeddial keys using the configuration files see Programmable Key Settings on page 232 Softkey Settings on page 222 and Top Softkey Settings on page 238 ...

Page 650: ...w button or Details softkey All phone users can dial out by pressing the button Line button button or simply by picking up the handset the Outgoing Redial List for the 6867i 6869i and 6873i also offers a Dial softkey To specifically enable the Basic Call Log service Administrators must define the xsi calllogs enabled parameter in the respective configuration file and users must enter in their user...

Page 651: ...800 series SIP phones support the joining and unjoining of BroadSoft BroadWorks call centers using the BroadSoft BroadWorks Xsi API To specifically enable call center join unjoin capabilities on the phone Administrators must define the xsi call center parameter in the respective configuration file as 1 Keys programmable keys 6865i top softkeys 6867i 6869i and 6873i hard keys all phone models and e...

Page 652: ...od1 key1 type callcenter expmod1 key1 label Sales CC expmod1 key1 value salesCC expmod1 key2 type callcenter expmod1 key2 label Support CC expmod1 key2 value supportCC When the keys have been configured using the configuration files and the phone has been booted the phone will indicate the Call Center join status through the configured keys LEDs not applicable to the 6873i The 6867i 6869i and 6873...

Page 653: ...Advanced Operational Features 6 64 Sales CC Support CC 6865i Example Joined Unjoined Joined Unjoined 6869i Example Also applicable to 6867i ...

Page 654: ...lows Pressing the desired call center key will toggle between joining and unjoining the respective call center STATUS LED STATE M680I AND ALL PHONES EXCEPT 6873I SOFTKEY ICON STATE 6867I 6869I 6873I AND M685I Joined On Unjoined Off Status Not Synchronized Off Call Center ID Misconfigured Off Joined Unjoined 6873i Example ...

Page 655: ... the ability to enable and disable Remote Office functionality as well as change the Remote Office number SIP URI through the phone s native UI Configuring the Remote Office Service Using the Phone UI Use the following procedure on the phone s UI to configure Remote Office service For the 6867i 6869i 1 Press on the phone to enter the Options List 2 Navigate to the BroadSoft Call Settings Remote Of...

Page 656: ...ng Personal service is supported by the 6800 series SIP phones The BroadWorks Simultaneous Ring Personal service allows users the ability to define up to 10 phone numbers or SIP URIs and independently set which phone numbers should ring when a call is incoming to their primary phone To specifically enable Simultaneous Ring Personal support on the phone Administrators must define the xsi simultaneo...

Page 657: ... the service 4 Press the 2 key to highlight the Do Not Ring if on a Call field and press the button to enable this functionality 5 Press the 2 key to highlight the Phone Num SIP URI field and using the dialpad keys enter the phone number or SIP URI you want to apply simultaneous ring functionality to 6 Press the 2 key to highlight the corresponding Phone Num SIP URI checkbox and press the button t...

Page 658: ...5 Press a Phone Num SIP URI field and using the on screen keyboard or dialpad keys enter the phone number or SIP URI you want to apply simultaneous ring functionality to 6 Repeat Step 5 for any additional phone numbers or SIP URIs you want to configure 7 Press the checkboxes beside any desired Phone Num SIP URI fields to enable simultaneous ring functionality for the respective phone numbers SIP U...

Page 659: ...adSoft Anywhere devices will be alerted when a group page is incoming Phone Numbers The list of phone numbers locations the respective user will use to call the BroadWorks Anywhere portal The portal will allow users to route calls only if it is accessed by one of the configured known numbers locations These numbers locations can be defined and enabled disabled individually by navigating to the pho...

Page 660: ... will prompt for an answer confirmation when an incoming call is answered by the respective location Configuring the BroadSoft Anywhere Service Using the Phone UI Use the following procedure on the phone s UI to configure the BroadSoft Anywhere service For the 6867i 6869i 1 Press on the phone to enter the Options List 2 Navigate to the BroadSoft Call Settings BroadSoft Anywhere option and press th...

Page 661: ...ersion Inhibitor checkbox and press the button to enable the feature When enabled the respective location will be prevented from redi recting or forwarding incoming calls to another even if call forward is activated 12 Press the 2 key to highlight the Answer Confirmation checkbox and press the button to enable the feature When enabled the BroadWorks call manager will prompt for an answer confirmat...

Page 662: ... theAlert Locations for Click to Dial checkbox if desired to enable this functionality 5 Press the Alert Locations for Group Paging checkbox if desired to enable this functionality To add or edit a phone number 6 Press the desired Phone Number field and press the Edit softkey 7 Using the on screen keyboard or dialpad keys enter or edit the phone number Note If required swipe right to switch pages ...

Page 663: ...ey to save your changes ENABLING XSI FEATURES USING THE CONFIGURATION FILES You use the following procedure to enable Xsi feature support For the specific parameter you can set in the configuration files see Appendix A the section Xsi Feature Settings on page A 304 FEATURE RE BRANDING SUPPORT FOR BROADSOFT BASED SER VICE PROVIDERS The 6800 series SIP phones support the configuration of a number of...

Page 664: ...me whereby the full short and platform name values are delimited by a semi colon For example defining the parameter as broadsoft branding Mitel MTL MiVoice would result in the references BroadWorks SCA BSFT Call Settings and BroadWorks Anywhere being displayed as Mitel SCA MTL Call Settings and MiVoice Anywhere respectively If any or all of the three name values are not defined the corresponding r...

Page 665: ... are able to view all their UC ONE contacts by accessing a Contacts List If applicable contacts are categorized into groups that are definable through the UC ONE desktop client Contact details e g presence information names and user IDs phonenumbers addresses etc arealsoviewablethroughtheContactsListbynavigating to the Details screen of the respective contact Favorites UC ONE contacts that are def...

Page 666: ... instant messaging and presence imp user name imp password imp ip imp port Notes 1 Aside from changing your own presence state status using the My Status feature any other changes that need to be made e g adding removing or editing contacts or groups editing free text uploading avatar images etc must be made using the BroadSoft UC ONE desktop client Release 4 2 0 SP2 may be compatible with various...

Page 667: ...ontacts on the idle home screen Contacts My Status and Favorite softkeys must be configured Contacts My Status and Favorite Softkeys 6869i Example Contacts My Status and Favorite Softkeys 6873i Example Any number of favorite softkeys can be configured limited only by the number of available top softkeys on the respective phone If the number of UC ONE favorite contacts exceed the number of Favorite...

Page 668: ...he following procedure to configure a Contacts key using the Mitel Web UI 1 Click on Operation Softkeys and XML Bottom Keys or Top Keys 2 Select a top or bottom softkey 3 In the Type field select Contacts 4 In the Label field enter a label to display on the phone for the key default is Contacts 5 Click Save Settings Note The keys noname hidden parameter originally applicable to BLF List softkeys i...

Page 669: ...3 In the Type field select My Status 4 Click Save Settings Configuring a Favorite Key Using the Mitel Web UI Use the following procedure to configure a Contacts key using the Mitel Web UI 1 Click on Operation Softkeys and XML Top Keys 2 Select a top softkey 3 In the Type field select Favorite 4 Repeat Steps 2 and 3 for any other softkeys you would like to configure as a Favorite softkey 5 Click Sa...

Page 670: ...G YOUR OWN PRESENCE INFORMATION ON THE PHONE If a My Status softkey has been configured on your phone the softkey will reflect your current presence state status On the 6867i and 6869i the label and presence state indicator can be seen from the idle home screen 6869i Example On the 6873i in addition to the presence state indicator and the label the My Status softkey will also display status text e...

Page 671: ... UC ONE desktop client if applicable To Change Your Presence Status Using the IP Phone UI For the 6867i and 6869i 1 Press the softkey configured with My Status functionality 6869i Example 2 Use the 2 and 5 navigation keys to select the desired presence state status 3 Press the Save softkey For the 6873i 1 Press the softkey configured with My Status functionality 2 Press the desired presence state ...

Page 672: ...e 6873i in addition to the presence status indicators and the names the Favorite softkeys will also display status text either the default status text or the free text that has been entered in the UC ONE desktop client by your favorite contacts At any time pressing a populated Favorite softkey will initiate a call to the respective UC ONE contact using the contact s Work Extension number If a Work...

Page 673: ...Contacts List Use the following IP Phone UI procedure to view your UC ONE contacts presence information and call a contact using the Contacts List For the 6867i and 6869i 1 Press the softkey configured with Contact List functionality 6869i Example Notes 1 The Contacts List is a read only application The UC ONE desktop client must be used if you would like to make any changes to your contacts or yo...

Page 674: ...ber If a Work Extension number is not defined the phone will dial out using the Work Phone number then the Mobile Phone number and then lastly the Personal Phone number whichever is defined first based on the described order 6 Press the Quit softkey to exit the Contacts List For the 6873i 1 Press the softkey configured with Contact List functionality 2 In the left group column press a group to vie...

Page 675: ...ailed Information and Call a Contact s Secondary Phone Number Use the following IP Phone UI procedure to view your UC ONE contacts detailed information and call a contact s secondary phone number using the Contacts List For the 6867i and 6869i 1 Press the softkey configured with Contact List functionality 6869i Example 2 Use the 2 and 5 navigation keys to select the desired group 3 With the desire...

Page 676: ...formation about the selected contact If available the contact s display name first and last name presence information phone numbers address and Email address are displayed 6869i Example 6 To call the contact use the 2 and 5 navigation keys to scroll through the list of phone numbers and then press the Dial softkey to initiate a call to the selected phone number 7 Press the Close softkey to exit th...

Page 677: ...Contact List functionality 2 In the left group column press a group to view the contacts within the selected group and then press a contact to select the desired contact 3 Press the right arrow button or the Details softkey to display more detailed information about the selected contact ...

Page 678: ... s display name first and last name presence information phone numbers address and Email address are displayed 4 To call the contact press the desired phone number and then press the Dial softkey to initiate a call to the selected phone number 5 Press the Close softkey to exit the Details screen ...

Page 679: ...mma For example if the Alerting Custom Calling Line ID Name setting in the BroadWorks Web portal is defined as F Filtrage Dupont Francois the From header of a filtered call sent by the BroadWorks SIP INVITE message will look similar to From F Filtrage Dupont Francois sip 5551234567 as aastra com user phone The sip execassist filter call prefix parameter in this scenario could be defined as sip exe...

Page 680: ...one The Executive s phone requires that only one Filter softkey be configured The Filter softkey s value can either be left undefined which will toggle the Executive Call Filtering settings on the call manager via the SIP SUBSCRIPTION NOTIFY mechanism or it can be defined using the following values which will toggle the settings via an FAC call Executive Call Filtering Activation FAC e g 61 Used w...

Page 681: ... followed by a semi co lon e g 61 61 6 In the Line field select the line for which you want to use the key functionality 7 Click Save Settings to save your settings Configuring the Filter Softkey on the Executive s Phone Using the Configuration Files To configure the Filter softkey on the Executive s phone using the configuration files you must enter filter for the key type For the label 6867i 686...

Page 682: ...softkeys are configured with key values pressing the respective Filter softkey will activate Executive Call Filtering for the applicable Executive and the softkey s corresponding LED will be lit When the same Filter softkey is pressed again Executive Call Filtering for the applicable Executive will deactivate and the softkey s corresponding LED will turn off Alternatively a single Filter softkey c...

Page 683: ...ly enter key labels to assign to the Filter key e g Filter Stefan for a specific Executive or simply Filter for a generic Filter key with no defined value Defining the value is optional If you choose to assign a Filter softkey and define values for each Executive enter in the respective Executive s phone or extension number e g 4100 For the line setting enter the line number for which you want to ...

Page 684: ...tkeys can be configured to efficiently utilize the Executive Assistant Initiate Call function With a Speeddial softkey configured for this feature Assistants can initiate a call on behalf of an Executive whereby the call will appear to the target as one originated by the Executive himself herself The Speeddial softkey s value can be defined using the following syntax Executive Assistant Initiate C...

Page 685: ...In the Line field select the line for which you want to use the key functionality 7 Click Save Settings to save your settings Configuring the Initiate Call Softkey on the Assistant s Phone Using the Configuration Files To configure the Initiate Call Speeddial softkeys on theAssistant s phone using the configuration files you must enter speeddial for the key types For the labels 6867i 6869i and 687...

Page 686: ...peeddial softkey3 label Init3 softkey3 value 644052 4059 softkey3 line 1 For Top Softkeys topsoftkey1 type speeddial topsoftkey1 label Init topsoftkey1 value 64 topsoftkey1 line 1 topsoftkey2 type speeddial topsoftkey2 label Init2 topsoftkey2 value 644052 topsoftkey2 line 1 topsoftkey3 type speeddial topsoftkey3 label Init3 topsoftkey3 value 644052 4059 topsoftkey3 line 1 For Programmable Keys prg...

Page 687: ...pe speeddial expmod1 key1 label Init expmod1 key1 value 64 expmod1 key1 line 1 expmod1 key2 type speeddial expmod1 key2 label Init2 expmod1 key2 value 644052 expmod1 key2 line 1 expmod1 key2 type speeddial expmod1 key2 label Init3 expmod1 key2 value 644052 4059 expmod1 key2 line 1 ...

Page 688: ...60 sip registrar ip 100 200 50 60 sip registrar port 5060 sip screen name Visitor sip user name 5000 sip dtmf method 1 sip xml notify event 1 user config URL http 100 200 50 79 vdp Note For VDP functionality the phone must be configured to accept XML SIP NOTIFY messages This can be enabled by defining the sip xml notify event parameter as 1 in the respective configuration file or by placing a chec...

Page 689: ...creen Configuring the User Configuration Server URL Use the following parameter to configure the user configuration server URL For the specific parameter you can set in the configuration files see Appendix A the section Visitor Desk Phone Settings on page A 313 CONFIGURATION FILES 6867i Visitor Account Example 6869i Visitor Account Example 6863i 6865i Visitor Account Example Visitor 12 Jul 12 49pm...

Page 690: ...ame and user cfg file name must match and the password corresponds to the server password credential When the user s credentials are confirmed this triggers the call manager to send an unsolicited NOTIFY message containing an XML body that includes the subscriberLogin messageType with valid username and password values The phone then contacts the configuration server defined by the user config url...

Page 691: ...If using the Login key method Administrators can define in the configuration files a programmable key top or bottom softkey or expansion module key type as hotdesklogin or configure a Login key using the Web UI Creating a Login Key Using the Mitel Web UI Use the following procedure to create a Login key using the phone s Web UI 1 Click on Operation Programmable Keys 6863i 6865i or Softkeys and XML...

Page 692: ...ir account These security features ensure that accounts are only logged in to and logged out of when initiated by the respective user USER CONFIGURATION UPLOAD FUNCTIONALITY Any changes made to a user s profile while he she is logged in are saved to the user _local cfg file periodically The time period between the saves is configurable using the user config upload and user config upload delta para...

Page 693: ...ttings on page A 313 OPTION TO ENABLE DISABLE RTCP The rtcp enable parameter is available allowingAdministrators the ability to manually enable or disable RTCP Defining the parameter as 0 disables the feature while 1 enables the feature RTCP is enabled i e 1 by default Enabling Disabling RTCP Functionality Use the following procedure to manually enable disable RTCP functionality For the specific p...

Page 694: ...e section Advanced SIP Settings on page 98 REMOTE REBOOTING AND DYNAMIC RELOADING OF THE CONFIG URATION FILES Upon a check sync NOTIFY message with a reboot parameter defined the phone will depending on the reboot parameter definition either immediately reboot the phone or reload all the settings in the configuration files without rebooting Feature behavior is as follows If a check sync NOTIFY con...

Page 695: ...ties The audio stream will be offered in all cases when a remote party is placed on hold i e when placed on hold directly when placed on hold while performing a transfer or conference or when the local party switches lines Enabling Music on Hold Functionality Use the following procedure to enable music on hold feature For the specific parameters you can set in the configuration files see Appendix ...

Page 696: ...hat do not adhere to RFC3711 ROC processing the srtp loose roc parameter has been introduced By default i e when the parameter is not defined or if the parameter is defined as 0 the phone strictly adheres to RFC3711 and does not reset the ROC to zero after a re INVITE Enabling this parameter i e by defining the parameter as 1 the phone loosely adheres to RFC3711 and resets the ROC to zero after a ...

Page 697: ...guring ROC Reset Behavior Use the following procedure to configure the ROC reset behavior For the specific parameters you can set in the configuration files see Appendix A the section ROC Reset Behavior Settings on page 317 CONFIGURATION FILES ...

Page 698: ...Chapter 7 ENCRYPTED FILES ON THE IP PHONE ...

Page 699: ...ovides methods an administrator can use to store encrypted files to a server TOPICS This chapter covers the following topics TOPIC PAGE Encrypted Files on the IP Phone page 7 3 Configuration File Encryption Method page 7 3 Procedure to Encrypt Configuration Files page 7 4 Vendor Configuration File Encryption page 7 6 ...

Page 700: ...the IP phones download it and use it locally to decrypt the configuration information from the startup tuz and mac tuz files Because only the encrypted versions of the configuration files need to be stored on the server no plain text configuration or passwords are sent across the network thereby ensuring security of the configuration data To make changes to the configuration files the SystemAdmini...

Page 701: ...ks Corporation Usage anacrypt infile cfg d dir p password m i v h ANACRYPT SWITCH DESCRIPTION infile cfg d dir Specifies that all cfg files in dir should be encrypted p password Specify password used to generate keys m Generate MAC tuz files that are phone specific This switch generates files that are only usable for phones with firmware version 2 2 0 and above v1 Specifies the version of encrypti...

Page 702: ...bcd v3 Example 3 Encrypting a mac cfg file with password 1234abcd for firmware version 3 3 1 and above C anacrypt 00085d000000 cfg p 1234abcd v3 Example 4 Encrypting a mac cfg file with password 1234abcd using MAC encryption for firmware version 3 3 1 and above C anacrypt 00085d000000 cfg m p 1234abcd v3 Notes 1 Configuration files that are encrypted using v3 encryption can only be decoded by phon...

Page 703: ...to the phone After the phone receives the file it updates the encryption key This method of encryption does not affect the implementation of the Mitel method of file encryption You can set the phone specific encryption key using the configuration files only For more information about configuration file encryption contact Mitel Technical Support CONFIGURING VENDOR CONFIGURATION FILE ENCRYPTION Use ...

Page 704: ...Chapter 8 UPGRADING THE FIRMWARE ...

Page 705: ...rmation about upgrading the IP phone firmware TOPICS This chapter covers the following topics TOPIC PAGE Upgrading the Firmware page 8 3 Using the Firmware Update Page in the Mitel Web UI page 8 3 Using the Restart Feature page 8 5 Using the Auto Resync Feature page 8 6 ...

Page 706: ...to restart the phone The phone automatically looks for firmware updates and configuration files during the boot process Setting an Auto Resync feature to automatically update the firmware configuration files or both at a specific time in a 24 hour period Feature can be enabled using the configu ration files or the Mitel Web UI USING THE FIRMWARE UPDATE PAGE IN THE MITEL WEB UI You can use the Mite...

Page 707: ...ist to use for downloading the new firmware Valid values are TFTP FTP HTTP HTTPS 4 Inthe Server field entertheIPaddressindotteddecimalformat oftheTFTPconfiguration server or the domain name of the FTP HTTP or HTTPS configuration servers dependent on the protocol you selected in step 3 For example 432 221 45 6 5 In the Path field enter the path location on the protocol server for where the new firm...

Page 708: ...Firmware Upgrade Successful USING THE RESTART FEATURE Restarting the phone forces the phone to check for both firmware and configuration files stored on the configuration server RESTARTING THE PHONE USING THE IP PHONE UI For the 6863i 6865i 1 Press on the phone to enter the Options List 2 Select Restart Phone 3 Press to confirm For the 6867i 6869i 1 Press on the phone to enter the Options List 2 S...

Page 709: ...feature using the Mitel Web UI or using the configuration files startup cfg model cfg and mac cfg An Administrator can enable Auto Resync using the configuration files or the Mitel Web UI In the configuration files you set the following parameters auto resync mode Determines whether the configuration server automatically updates the phone s configuration files only the firmware only both the firmw...

Page 710: ...C During an auto resync the IP phones have the ability to initiate a comparison of its local directory files with those located on the configuration server and automatically update the local directory files if changes are detected If the auto resync mode is set to Configuration Files 1 or Both 3 either through the IP phone s Web UI or configuration files when the phone reaches the configured auto ...

Page 711: ...dates the configuration files on the IP phone automatically at the specified time if the files on the server have changed Firmware Updates the firmware on the IP phone automatically at the specified time if the files on the server have changed CONFIGURATION FILES Notes 1 If a user is accessing the Mitel Web UI they are not informed of an auto reboot 2 Any changes made using the Mitel Web UI or the...

Page 712: ... the time you designated Notes 1 If a user is accessing the Mitel Web UI they are not informed of an auto reboot 2 Any changes made using the Mitel Web UI or the IP phone UI are not overwritten by an auto resync update Auto resync affects the configuration files only However the settings in the Mitel Web UI take precedence over the IP phone UI and the configuration files 3 The resync time is based...

Page 713: ...Chapter 9 TROUBLESHOOTING ...

Page 714: ...play page 9 12 Error Messages Display page 9 14 Warning Message Display page 9 15 Configuration and Crash File Retrieval page 9 16 Tcpdump Network Packet Capture Support page 9 19 Troubleshooting Solutions page 9 21 Why does my phone display Application missing page 9 21 Why does my phone display the No Service message page 9 22 Why does my phone display Bad Encrypted Config page 9 22 Why is my ph...

Page 715: ...ory Block Size Mitel Technical Support can then use the information gathered to perform troubleshooting tasks LOG SETTINGS Using the configuration files or the Mitel Web UI you can specify the location where log information will be stored for troubleshooting purposes In the configuration files you use the following parameters to configure log settings log server ip The IP address of the log server...

Page 716: ...pport purposes Mitel recommends Administrators leave the debug level at its default for normal production use Enabling all the debug levels on the phone may impact performance and normal operation of the phone MITEL WEB UI PARAMETERS CONFIGURATION FILE PARAMETERS LINMGR Line Manager information log module linemgr UI User Interface UI related log module user interface MISC Miscellaneous log module ...

Page 717: ...he above example fatal errors general errors and warnings are logged for the line manager user interface and SIP call control modules Example 2 Functions and Info 16 32 48 log module dis 48 log module net 48 log module snd 48 In the above example functions and general information are logged for the display drivers network and sound modules Example 3 log module rtpt 0 log module ind 65535 In the ab...

Page 718: ...e and troubleshoot as necessary In the Support Information section you can Get local cfg Get server cfg Get user cfg if logged on using the Visitor Desk Phone feature see Visitor Desk Phone Support on page 99 for details Get user _local cfg if logged on using the Visitor Desk Phone feature see Visitor Desk Phone Support on page 99 for details Show Task and Stack Status Mitel Technical Support uses...

Page 719: ...owing procedures to perform troubleshooting on the IP phone via the configuration files or the Mitel Web UI For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files see the section Log Settings on page A 318 CONFIGURATION FILES Free Memory Max Memory Block Size ...

Page 720: ... i e the server to which log information will be transmitted 3 In the Log Port field enter the port number associated with the IP address specified in the Log IP field This port passes the information from the IP phone to the IP address location 4 Click Save Settings to save your settings 5 Click on Operation Reset 6 In the Restart Phone field click Restart to restart the IP phone MITEL WEB UI ...

Page 721: ...ield click Restart to restart the IP phone To perform support tasks 12 To store the local configuration file to the specified location click on Save As in the Get local cfg field 13 To store the server configuration file to the specified location click on Save As in the Get server cfg field 14 To display task and stack status information as well as Free Memory and Maximum Block Free Memory on the ...

Page 722: ...led When the phone detects a failure i e a crash it automatically reboots You can view a WatchDog crash file using the Mitel Web UI at the path Advanced Settings Troubleshooting You can enable disable the WatchDog task using the configuration files or the Mitel Web UI ENABLING DISABLING WATCHDOG Use the following procedure to enable disable the WatchDog For specific parameters you can set in the c...

Page 723: ...lick on Advanced Settings Troubleshooting Enable Disable WatchDog Task 2 The WatchDog field is enabled by default To disable the WatchDog task click in the Enabled box to clear the check mark 3 Click Save Settings to save your changes View the Crash Log 4 To view a crash log in the Get a Crash Log field click the SAVE AS button You can open the file immediately or you can save the Crash Log to you...

Page 724: ...ported in this release and a description of what the codes mean REBOOT CODE DESCRIPTION WEBUI Restart Reboot prompted by pressing the Restart button in the Operation Reset Phone menu of the Web UI or by changing the network configuration settings through the Web UI AutoResync ForceResync Reboot triggered by an external event primarily when a reboot is prompted by the processing of a NOTIFY message...

Page 725: ...enu of the phone s native UI XMLCommand Reset Reboot prompted by the processing of a Reset XML command XMLCommand FastReboot Reboot prompted by the processing of a FastReboot XML command XMLCommand ClearLocal Reboot prompted by the processing of a ClearLocal XML command PHONEAPP DHCP_NEW Reboot prompted by the IP address of the phone dynamically changing via DHCP Note In this scenario reboot infor...

Page 726: ... also displays After a reboot the previous error messages are discarded and if applicable new error messages display If there are no error messages during startup or after a reboot the message No Error Messages displays on the screen Error messages display in the language currently set on the phone The following table identifies the possible error messages that may display POSSIBLE ERROR MESSAGE D...

Page 727: ...t generated during startup 1 Click on Advanced Settings Troubleshooting Error Messages 2 Scroll down to the Error Messages section to view the error messages that may have generated during startup or reboot of the IP Phone WARNING MESSAGE DISPLAY Previously when a phone fails to download from the first configuration server as listed in the Fully Qualified Domain Name FQDN server list it attempts t...

Page 728: ...ate_Time_crash gz MAC ID_Date_Time_summary log and MAC ID_Date_Time_reboot log The following table identifies the methods you can use to retrieve support information from the phone to the pre defined server when the above configuration parameters are enabled Notes 1 The phone performs the generation and sending of Support Information in the background This feature does not affect the use or operat...

Page 729: ...C ID_Date_Time_crash gz that contains information about a current phone error crash caus ing a reboot of the phone The MAC address date and time are specified in the file name to identify the phone sending the information and the date and time the crash occurred The crash file is compressed as in gzip format for example 00033D000111_2010 02 27_0204pm_crash gz summary log File in the format MAC ID_...

Page 730: ...ftkey The following prompt displays Upload System Info Files 4 Press Yes The phone immediately generates the applicable Support Information files server cfg local cfg and or crash gz and sends the files to the pre defined server The message Files Sent displays GENERATINGANDSENDINGSUPPORTINFORMATIONFROMTHEMITEL WEB UI Use the following procedure to generate and send Support Information files to the...

Page 731: ...NG TCPDUMP CAPTURE FUNCTIONALITY USING THE MITEL WEB UI Use the following procedure to configure enable Tcpdump capture functionality using the Web UI 1 Click on Advanced Settings Capture Notes 1 Tcpdump capture functionality in this release supports phone side capture and storage for troubleshooting issues that are of a consistent and reproducible nature For larger or long duration capture Admini...

Page 732: ...060 2 Use a colon i e or hyphen i e to set a range For example 5000 6000 or 5000 6000 will capture traffic from ports 5000 through to 6000 3 Use a semi colon i e to add individual ports For example 5000 6000 7000 will capture traffic from ports 5000 6000 and 7000 4 Ranges and individual ports can be combined For example 5000 7000 8000 will capture traffic from ports 5000 through to 7000 as well as...

Page 733: ...nable to receive an IP from the DHCP server or has lost its record of its static IP the phone auto assigns itself the default IP 192 168 0 50 To recover the firmware for your phone in this circumstance please perform the following 1 Launch your web browser on your computer 2 In the URL type http IP Address where IP Address is the IP Address displayed on the phone Your browser launches the Mitel IP...

Page 734: ...Advanced Settings Global SIP is correct Check the sip registrar ip parameter in the configuration files is correct WHY DOES MY PHONE DISPLAY BAD ENCRYPTED CONFIG The IP phone displays Bad Encrypted Config because encrypted configuration files are enabled but the decryption process has failed Specific cases where decryption fails are REASON The site specific password in security tuz does not match ...

Page 735: ...or qualified domain name for the TFTP server into your IP phone configuration Additionally the phone may not be receiving the TFTP IP address if there are other DHCP servers within the same broadcast domain providing different Option 66 TFTP server settings See DHCP on page 4 for more information on option precedence For procedures on configuring the TFTP server using the IP phone UI and the Mitel...

Page 736: ...Restart phone 3 Select Yes to restart the phone or Select No to go back to the Options Screen For the 6873i 1 Press on the phone to enter the Options List 2 Press the Restart icon The following prompt displays Restart phone 3 Select Yes to restart the phone or Select No to go back to the Options Screen 1 Click on Operation Reset Phone 2 Click Restart to restart the phone IP PHONE UI Note To cancel...

Page 737: ...ghted press the Select softkey The Factory Default prompt displays 5 Select Yes to factory default the phone The phone immediately sets the phone to factory defaults and automatically restarts the phone For the 6873i 1 Press on the phone to enter the Options List 2 Press the Advanced softkey 3 Enter the Administrator password and press the blue Enter key Default is 22222 4 Press the Reset icon 5 W...

Page 738: ...se local config prompt displays Press to confirm For the 6867i 6869i 1 Press on the phone to enter the Options List 2 Press theAdvanced softkey and enter yourAdministrator password using the keypad keys Default is 22222 3 Select Reset 4 Select Erase Local Config 5 With Erase Local Config highlighted press the Select softkey The Erase Local Configuration prompt displays 6 Select Yes to erase the lo...

Page 739: ...removes the last customized configuration settings made on the phone HOW TO RESET A USER S PASSWORD For the 6863i 6865i 1 Press on the phone to enter the Options List 2 Select User Password 3 Enter the current user password 4 Press Enter 5 Enter the new user password 6 Press Enter 7 Re enter the new user password 8 Press Enter A message Password Changed displays on the screen Note If required swip...

Page 740: ...displays on the screen For the 6873i 1 Press on the phone to enter the Options List 2 Press the Lock icon 3 Press the Password icon 4 Enter the current password in the Current Password field 5 Enter the new password in the New Password field 6 Enter the new password again in the Re enter Password field 7 Press the Save softkey A message Password Changed displays on the screen 1 Click on Operation ...

Page 741: ... and press Enter The phone unlocks 6867I 6869I Lock the phone 1 Press on the phone to enter the Options List 2 Select Lock Phone Lock The prompt Lock the phone displays 3 Select Yes to lock the phone Unlock the phone 1 Press on the phone to enter the Options List An Enter Unlock Password prompt displays 2 Enter the user or administrator password and press Enter Default is 22222 A prompt Unlock the...

Page 742: ...er or administrator password and press Enter Default is 22222 A prompt Unlock the Phone displays 3 Select Yes to unlock the phone 1 Click on Operation Phone Lock Lock the phone 2 In the Lock the Phone field click Lock The phone locks dynamically and displays the following message Phone is locked Unlock the phone 3 Click on Operation Phone Lock 4 In the Unlock the Phone field click Unlock The phone...

Page 743: ...Appendix A CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS ...

Page 744: ...ings page A 19 User Dial Plan Setting page A 19 Mitel Web UI Settings page A 20 Secure Web Service Settings page A 20 Configuration Server Settings page A 21 Multiple Configuration Server Settings page A 30 Rport Setting page A 31 Local SIP UDP TCP Port Setting page A 31 Local SIP TLS Port page A 32 SIP Keep Alive Support page A 32 HTTPS Client and Server Settings page A 33 HTTPS Server Certificat...

Page 745: ...ference page A 95 SIP Join Feature for 3 Way Conference page A 95 Conference Transfer in Live Dial Mode page A 96 HTTP HTTPS Authentication Support for BroadSoft CMS page A 96 Advanced SIP Settings page A 98 As Feature Event Subscription Settings page A 105 Transport Layer Security TLS Settings page A 106 802 1x Support Settings page A 112 RTP Codec DTMF Global Settings page A 117 Autodial Setting...

Page 746: ...page A 180 Preferred Line and Preferred Line Timeout page A 182 Goodbye Key Cancels Incoming Call page A 183 Stuttered Dial Tone Setting page A 184 Message Waiting Indicator Settings page A 184 Message Waiting Indicator Request URI Setting page A 184 DND Key Mode Settings page A 185 Priority Alert Settings page A 186 Bellcore Cadence Settings page A 191 SIP Diversion Display page A 193 Display Nam...

Page 747: ...Top Softkey Settings page A 238 Press and Hold Speeddial Keypad Key Settings page A 246 Expansion Module Key Settings for M680i and M685i page A 247 Hard Key Settings page A 254 Customizing the Key Type List page A 259 Locking Keys page A 261 Locking the SAVE and DELETE Keys page A 264 Enabling Disabling Ability to Add Edit Speeddial Keys page A 265 BLF List URI Settings page A 265 BLF Page Switch...

Page 748: ... of Order SIP Requests page A 294 Optional Allow and Allow Event Headers page A 294 P Asserted Identity PAI page A 295 Route Header in SIP Packet page A 295 Compact SIP Header page A 296 Rejection of INV or BYE page A 296 Configuration Encryption Setting page A 296 DNS Host File page A 297 DNS Server Query page A 297 DNS Maximum Cache TTL Settings page A 299 SIP Services RTCP Summary Reports Trans...

Page 749: ...About this Appendix A 7 Troubleshooting Parameters page A 318 Log Settings page A 318 WatchDog Settings page A 320 Crash File Retrieval page A 321 TOPIC PAGE ...

Page 750: ...s Reference For information about configuration file precedence see Chapter 1 the section Configuration File Precedence on page 1 25 This section includes the following types of configurable parameters Operational Basic and Advanced Parameters on page A 9 Mapping Key Settings on page A 216 Softkey Programmable Key Keypad Key Expansion Module Key Hard Key Parameters on page A 221 Advanced Operation...

Page 751: ...ARAMETER options simple menu CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Allows you to enable a simplified options menu or enable the full menu on the IP Phone UI WARNING WHEN USING THE SIMPLIFIED MENU YOU CANNOT CHANGE THE NETWORK SETTINGS FROM THE IP PHONE UI IF THE NETWORK SETTINGS BECOME MISCONFIGURED YOU MUST USE THE MITEL WEB UI TO CONFIGURE THE NETWORK SETTINGS OR FACTORY ...

Page 752: ...late the IP address or qualified domain name for the TFTP server your DHCP server must support Option 66 FORMAT Integer DEFAULT VALUE 1 enabled RANGE 0 disabled 1 enabled EXAMPLE dhcp 1 PARAMETER ip CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION This parameter assigns a static IP address to the IP phone device Note For DHCP to automatically populate this parameter your DHCP server m...

Page 753: ...ngs on the IP phone a domain name value can be entered instead of an IP address With the help of the DNS servers the domain names for such parameters can then be resolved to their corresponding IP addresses Note For DHCP to automatically populate this parameter your DHCP server must support Option 66 FORMAT IP address DEFAULT VALUE 0 0 0 0 RANGE N A EXAMPLE dns1 192 168 0 5 PARAMETER dns2 CONFIGUR...

Page 754: ...0Mbps 5 Half Duplex 100Mbps 6 Half Duplex 1000Mbps applicable for the 6865i 6867i 6869i and 6873i IP phones only EXAMPLE ethernet port 0 4 PARAMETER ethernet port 1 CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION The send TX and receive RX method to use on Ethernet port 1 to transmit and receive data over the LAN FORMAT Integer DEFAULT VALUE 0 RANGE 0 Auto Negotiate 1 Full Duplex 10M...

Page 755: ...E pc port passthru enabled 1 PARAMETER hostname CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Specifies the hostname DHCP Option 12 that the phone sends with the DHCP Request packet Note If you change this parameter you must restart your phone for the change to take affect FORMAT String DEFAULT VALUE model MAC IP Address RANGE Up to 64 alpha numeric characters Note The value for th...

Page 756: ...Integer DEFAULT VALUE 0 Disabled RANGE 0 1 0 Disabled Sends only the identifier value 1 Enabled Sends the identifier value firmware version and bootrom version EXAMPLE dhcp opt60 extended vendor class 1 PARAMETER dhcp userclass CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Specifies the User Class DHCP Option 77 that the phone sends to the configuration server with the DHCP Request...

Page 757: ...olean DEFAULT VALUE 0 disabled RANGE 0 1 0 disabled 1 enabled EXAMPLE use dhcp option 120 1 PARAMETER dhcp config option override CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION The value specified for this parameter overrides the precedence order for determining a configuration server Note You must restart the IP Phone for this parameter to take affect FORMAT Integer DEFAULT VALUE 0...

Page 758: ...E 1 enabled RANGE 0 1 0 disabled 1 enabled EXAMPLE dhcp option 132 vlan id enabled 0 PARAMETER admin password CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Allows you to set a new administrator password for the IP phone Note The IP phones support numeric characters only in passwords If you enter a password with alpha characters the phone uses the default password instead FORMAT Int...

Page 759: ... password is entered correctly the user is allowed to gain access to the Options Menu and no more password prompts display for other password protected screens If the user fails to enter the correct password in three attempts access to the Options Menu is denied and the IP phone returns to the idle screen Note The password to enter is the administrator password configured for that phone FORMAT Boo...

Page 760: ...umber 112 An international emergency telephone number for GSM mobile phone networks In all European Union countries it is also the emergency telephone number for both mobile and fixed line telephones 110 A police and or fire emergency number in Asia Europe Middle East and South America Dial plan characters Length bytes 911 14 4xx 18 x xx 35 911 999 112 110 450 54 911 112 011XX 101XX 1 2 3 XXXXXXXX...

Page 761: ... Additionally the only way the call can be terminated is if the emergency services agent ends the call FORMAT Boolean DEFAULT VALUE 0 disabled RANGE 0 1 0 disabled 1 enabled EXAMPLE emergency call connection hold enabled 1 PARAMETER sip user parameter dial plan CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION The dial plan that the network uses to distinguish between a real PSTN numbe...

Page 762: ...1 PARAMETER web interface blacklist duration CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Specifies the maximum amount of time in seconds that the IP of the phone s Web UI attacker will remain on the blacklist FORMAT Integer DEFAULT VALUE 3600 1 hour RANGE 0 9999999 seconds Note A value 0 will disable the blacklist feature EXAMPLE web interface blacklist duration 600 PARAMETER sec...

Page 763: ...eter to change the IP address or domain name of the TFTP server This will become effective after this configuration file has been downloaded into the phone Note For DHCP to automatically populate this parameter your DHCP server must support Option 66 FORMAT IP address or qualified domain name DEFAULT VALUE 0 0 0 0 RANGE N A EXAMPLE tftp server 192 168 0 130 PARAMETER tftp path CONFIGURATION FILES ...

Page 764: ... tftp path CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Specifies a path name for which the configuration files reside on an alternate TFTP server for downloading to the IP Phone Note Enter the path name in the form folderX folderX folderX For example ipphone 6867i configfiles FORMAT String DEFAULT VALUE N A RANGE Up to 256 alphanumeric characters EXAMPLE alternate tftp path confi...

Page 765: ... ftp server 192 168 0 131 PARAMETER ftp path CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Specifies a path name for which the configuration files reside on an FTP server for downloading to the IP Phone Note Enter the path name in the form folderX folderX folderX For example ipphone 6867i configfiles FORMAT String DEFAULT VALUE N A RANGE Up to 256 alphanumeric characters EXAMPLE ft...

Page 766: ...e has been downloaded into the phone Optional You can also assign an HTTP relative path to the HTTP server See the next parameter http path Note For DHCP to automatically populate this parameter your DHCP server must support Option 66 FORMAT IP address or fully qualified Domain Name DEFAULT VALUE 0 0 0 0 RANGE N A EXAMPLE http server 192 168 0 132 PARAMETER http path CONFIGURATION FILES startup cf...

Page 767: ...as been downloaded into the phone Optional You can also assign an HTTPS relative path to the HTTPS server See the next parameter https path Note For DHCP to automatically populate this parameter your DHCP server must support Option 66 FORMAT IP address or Fully Qualified Domain Name DEFAULT VALUE 0 0 0 0 RANGE N A EXAMPLE https server 192 168 0 143 PARAMETER https path CONFIGURATION FILES startup ...

Page 768: ... startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Specifies the HTTPS port that the server uses to load the configuration to the phone over HTTPS Note For DHCP to automatically populate this parameter your DHCP server must support Option 66 FORMAT Integer DEFAULT VALUE 443 RANGE 1 through 65535 EXAMPLE https port 1025 ...

Page 769: ...anged Both 3 Updates the configuration files and firmware automatically at the specified time if the files on the server have changed Notes If a user is accessing the Mitel Web UI they are not informed of an auto reboot Any changes made using the Mitel Web UI or the IP phone UI are not overwritten by an auto resync update Auto resync affects the configuration files only However the settings in the...

Page 770: ...esync time can be entered as 02 56 Auto Resync adds as a default 15 minutes of random time to the configured time For example if the auto resync time parameter is set to 02 00 the event takes place any time between 02 00 and 02 15 This max delay can be configured using the auto resync max delay parameter below When the language on the phone is set to French or Spanish you must enter the time in th...

Page 771: ...RIPTION Specifies the amount of days that the phone waits between checksync operations Note A value of 0 causes the phone to checksync every time the clock reads the proper time A value of 1 forces the phone to wait 24 hours prior to doing the first checksync FORMAT Integer DEFAULT VALUE 0 RANGE 0 364 EXAMPLE auto resync days 1 ...

Page 772: ...g DESCRIPTION Specifies either a full or partial URL of a server other than the original configuration server from which the phones in the network get their firmware Note The default method for the update of firmware to the phones is from the original configuration server The Administrator must specify a correct server URL for the phones to get their firmware information from that server If the UR...

Page 773: ...GE 0 disable 1 enable EXAMPLE sip rport 1 PARAMETER sip local port CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Specifies the local source port UDP TCP from which the phone sends SIP messages FORMAT Numeric DEFAULT VALUE 5060 RANGE Greater than 1024 and less than 65535 Notes It is recommended that you avoid the conflict RTP port range in case of a UDP transport By default the IP p...

Page 774: ...SIP messages When symmetric TLS is enabled the IP phone uses port 5061 as the persistent TLS connection source port When symmetric TLS signaling is disabled the IP phone chooses a random persistent TLS connection source port from the TCP range i e 49152 65535 for TLS messages after each reboot regardless of whether the parameter sip outbound support is enabled or disabled EXAMPLE sip local tls por...

Page 775: ...ate using SSL 3 0 only SSL 3 0 is a commonly used protocol for managing the security of a message transmission on the Internet TLS Preferred The phone will initially attempt to communicate using TLS 1 0 If the TLS protocol is rejected the phone will automatically switch to the SSL 3 0 protocol FORMAT Alphanumeric characters DEFAULT VALUE TLS Preferred RANGE TLS 1 0 TLS 1 1 TLS 1 2 SSL 3 0 TLS Pref...

Page 776: ...DEFAULT VALUE 0 disables blocking of XML HTTP POSTs RANGE 0 disables blocking of XML HTTP POSTs 1 enables blocking of XML HTTP POSTs EXAMPLE https block http post xml 1 PARAMETER https validate certificates CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Enables or disables the HTTPS validation of certificates on the phone When this parameter is set to 1 the HTTPS client performs val...

Page 777: ...to accepting the certificate Note If the https validate expires parameter is set to enable the clock on the phone must be set for the phone to accept the certificates FORMAT Boolean DEFAULT VALUE 1 enabled RANGE 0 disabled 1 enabled EXAMPLE https validate expires 0 PARAMETER https validate hostname CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Enables or disables the HTTPS validati...

Page 778: ...wnload a certificate from another specified server To download a specific file the string value MUST HAVE A FILENAME at the end of the string For example https user certificates ftp admin admin 1 2 3 4 50 path phonesHTTPSUserCert pem where path is the directory and phonesHTTPSUserCert pem is the filename If you do not specify a filename the download fails See examples for each below FORMAT Alphanu...

Page 779: ...IPTION Enables or disables VLAN on the IP phones This is a global setting FORMAT Boolean DEFAULT VALUE 0 false RANGE 0 false 1 true EXAMPLE tagging enabled 1 PARAMETER priority non ip CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Specifies the priority value for non IP packets This is a global setting FORMAT Integer DEFAULT VALUE 5 RANGE 0 to 7 EXAMPLE priority non ip 7 ...

Page 780: ... the configured VLAN ID before being forwarded to the PC port Example You enable tagging on the phone port as normal but set the vlan id to 4095 and the vlan id port 1 to any ID from 1 to 4094 The following example sets the PC port to be on VLAN 3 but the LAN port is configured as untagged tagging enabled 1 vlan id 4095 vlan id port 1 3 Alternatively setting the vlan id to any ID from 1 to 4094 an...

Page 781: ... SIP RTP and RTCP packets You enter the tos priority map value as follows DSCP_1 Priority_1 DSCP_2 Priority_2 DSCP_64 Priority_64 where the DSCP value range is 0 63 and the priority range is 0 7 Mappings not enclosed in parentheses and separated with a comma or with values outside the ranges are ignored FORMAT Integer DEFAULT VALUE 3 based on the default ToS DSCP SIP setting of 26 5 based on the d...

Page 782: ...an id port 1 to 4095 and the vlan id to any ID from 1 to 4094 The following example sets the LAN port to be on VLAN 3 but the PC port is configured as untagged tagging enabled 1 vlan id 3 vlan id port 1 4095 Alternatively setting the vlan id port 1 to any ID from 1 to 4094 and vlan id to 4095 will allow frames from the PC port containing a VLAN ID to be untagged before being forwarded to the LAN p...

Page 783: ...SCRIPTION Specifies the hostname server for which to send collect the RTCP summary reports You must restart the phone after setting a value for this parameter FORMAT username server Note Hostname server string must not exceed 128 characters in length DEFAULT VALUE N A RANGE N A EXAMPLE sip rtcp summary report collector collector example org PARAMETER sip rtcp summary report collector port CONFIGUR...

Page 784: ...T Boolean DEFAULT VALUE 0 disabled RANGE 0 disabled 1 enabled EXAMPLE sip line1 rtcp summary reports 1 PARAMETER sip lineN rtcp summary report collector where N line number CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Per line parameter specifying the hostname of the server receiving the RTCP summary reports Note You must restart the phone after setting a value for this parameter ...

Page 785: ...after setting a value for this parameter FORMAT Integer DEFAULT VALUE 0 RANGE 0 to 65536 EXAMPLE sip line1 rtcp summary report collector port 5060 PARAMETER tos sip CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION The Differentiated Services Code Point DSCP for SIP packets FORMAT Integer DEFAULT VALUE 26 RANGE 0 63 EXAMPLE tos sip 3 PARAMETER tos rtp CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg mo...

Page 786: ...PTION This parameter changes the time to 12 hour or 24 hour format Use 0 for the 12 hour format and 1 for the 24 hour format FORMAT Integer DEFAULT VALUE 0 RANGE 0 12 hr format 1 24 hr format EXAMPLE time format 0 PARAMETER date format CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION This parameter allows the user to change the date to various formats FORMAT Integer DEFAULT VALUE 0 RA...

Page 787: ... PARAMETER dst config CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Enables disables the use of daylight savings time FORMAT Integer DEFAULT VALUE 3 RANGE 0 OFF 1 30 min summertime 2 1 hr summertime 3 automatic EXAMPLE dst config 0 ...

Page 788: ...one using the additional parameters in the section Custom Time Zone and DST Settings on page A 53 When DHCP Option 2 is enabled on the phone the phone still uses the custom timezone configuration settings to control daylight savings time The default behavior for the phone is to use the NTP server from Option 42 or current configuration setting and the current timezone settings FORMAT Text DEFAULT ...

Page 789: ... Dubai AG Antigua AI Anguilla AL Tirane AN Curacao AR Buenos Aires AR Saudi Arabia AS Pago Pago AT Vienna AU Lord Howe AU Tasmania AU Melbourne AU Sydney AU Broken Hill AU Brisbane AU Lindeman AU Adelaide AU Darwin AU Perth AW Aruba AZ Baku CET GST AST AST CET AST ART ART BST CET LHS EST EST EST CST EST EST CST CST WST AST AZT ...

Page 790: ...anaus BR Eirunepe BR Rio Branco BS Nassau BY Minsk BZ Belize EET AST CET EET AST BOT FNT BRT BRT BRT BRS BRT BRS AMS AMT AMT AMT ACT ACT EST EET CST CA Newfoundland CA Atlantic CA Eastern CA Saskatchewan CA Central CA Mountain CA Pacific CA Yukon CH Zurich CK Rarotonga CL Santiago CL Easter CN Beijing CO Bogota CR Costa Rica CU Havana CY Nicosia CZ Prague NST AST EST EST CST MST PST PST CET CKS CL...

Page 791: ... Belfast GD Grenada GE Tbilisi GF Cayenne GI Gibraltar GP Guadeloupe GR Athens GS South Georgia GT Guatemala GU Guam GY Guyana GMT GMT AST GET GFT CET AST EET GST CST CST GYT HK Hong Kong HN Tegucigalpa HR Zagreb HT Port au Prince HU Budapest HKS CST CET EST CET IE Dublin IS Reykjavik IT Rome GMT GMT CET JM Jamaica JP Tokyo EST JST KY Cayman EST LC St Lucia LI Vaduz LT Vilnius LU Luxembourg LV Rig...

Page 792: ...da MX Monterrey MX Mazatlan MX Chihuahua MX Hermosillo MX Tijuana CET EET CET AST AST CET MUT CST CST CST CST MST MST MST PST NI Managua NL Amsterdam NO Oslo NR Nauru NU Niue NZ Auckland NZ Chatham CST CET CET NRT NUT NZS CHA OM Muscat GST PA Panama PE Lima PL Warsaw PR Puerto Rico PT Lisbon PT Madeira PT Azores PY Asuncion EST PES CET AST WET WET AZO PYS TIME ZONE NAME TIME ZONE CODE ...

Page 793: ... YEK OMS NOV KRA IRK YAK VLA SAK MAG PET ANA SA Saudi Arabia SE Stockholm SG Singapore SI Ljubljana SK Bratislava SM San Marino SR Paramaribo SV El Salvador AST CET SGT CET CET CET SRT CST TR Istanbul TT Port of Spain TW Taipei EET AST CST UA Kiev US Eastern US Central US Mountain US Pacific US Alaska US Aleutian US Hawaii UY Montevideo EET EST CST MST PST AKS HAS HST UYS VA Vatican VE Caracas CET...

Page 794: ... s IP address or qualified domain name If the time server is enabled the value for time server1 will be used to request the time Note For DHCP to automatically populate this parameter your DHCP server must support Option 42 FORMAT IP address or qualified domain name DEFAULT VALUE 1 mitel pool ntp org RANGE N A EXAMPLE time server1 192 168 0 5 PARAMETER time server2 CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg ...

Page 795: ...eter your DHCP server must support Option 42 FORMAT IP address or qualified domain name DEFAULT VALUE 3 mitel pool ntp org RANGE N A EXAMPLE time server3 192 168 0 5 Note To use the parameters in this section the time zone name parameter must be set to Custom See page A 46 for more information PARAMETER time zone minutes CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION The number of m...

Page 796: ...minus 3 5 hours Newfoundland Standard Time North America 180 GMT minus 3 hours 150 GMT minus 2 5 hours Newfoundland daylight time 120 GMT minus 2 hours 60 GMT minus 1 hour 0 GMT 0 hours Greenwich Mean Time 60 GMT 1 hour Central European Time 120 GMT 2 hours Eastern European Time Europe 180 GMT 3 hours 210 GMT 3 5 hours 240 GMT 4 hours 270 GMT 4 5 hours 300 GMT 5 hours 330 GMT 5 5 hours 345 GMT 5 7...

Page 797: ...ive date CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Specifies how to interpret the start day month and week parameters absolute 0 or relative 1 FORMAT Boolean DEFAULT VALUE N A RANGE 0 absolute 1 relative EXAMPLE dst start relative date 1 PARAMETER dst end relative date CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Specifies how to interpret the end day month and...

Page 798: ...A RANGE 1 January 2 February 3 March 4 April 5 May 6 June 7 July 8 August 9 September 10 October 11 November 12 December EXAMPLE dst start month 7 PARAMETER dst end month CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION The month that DST ends Valid values are 1 to 12 January to December FORMAT Integer DEFAULT VALUE N A RANGE 1 January 2 February 3 March 4 April 5 May 6 June 7 July 8 ...

Page 799: ... ends Valid values are 1 to 31 FORMAT Integer DEFAULT VALUE N A RANGE 1 31 EXAMPLE dst end day 31 PARAMETER dst start hour CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION The hour that DST starts Valid values are an integer from 0 midnight to 23 FORMAT Integer DEFAULT VALUE N A RANGE 0 midnight to 23 EXAMPLE dst start hour 0 PARAMETER dst end hour CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg mode...

Page 800: ... RANGE 1 January 2 February 3 March 4 April 5 May 6 June 7 July 8 August 9 September 10 October 11 November 12 December EXAMPLE dst start month 6 PARAMETER dst end month CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION The month that DST ends Valid values are 1 to 12 January to December FORMAT Integer DEFAULT VALUE N A RANGE 1 January 2 February 3 March 4 April 5 May 6 June 7 July 8 A...

Page 801: ...t start day in the month 5 fifth full week of month 5 fifth last occurrence dst start day in the month EXAMPLE dst start week 1 PARAMETER dst end week CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION The week in the specified month in which DST ends Valid value is a positive or negative integer from 1 to 5 FORMAT Integer DEFAULT VALUE N A RANGE 1 first full week of month 1 last occurr...

Page 802: ...E dst start day 1 PARAMETER dst end day CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION The day of the specified week in the specified month that DST ends on Valid values are an integer from 1 to 7 FORMAT Integer DEFAULT VALUE N A RANGE 1 Sunday 2 Monday 3 Tuesday 4 Wednesday 5 Thursday 6 Friday 7 Saturday EXAMPLE dst end day 7 PARAMETER dst start hour CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg...

Page 803: ... setting sets the phone to turn off the backlight after a period of inactivity You can set the amount of time before the backlight goes off using the Backlight on Time option bl on time parameter FORMAT Integer DEFAULT VALUE 1 Auto RANGE 0 Off Turns the backlight off constant 1 Auto Turns the backlight off after a period of inactivity Note In the IP Phone UI the options for this parameter are Off ...

Page 804: ...odel cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Specifies the brightness level when the phone is active FORMAT Integer DEFAULT VALUE 3 RANGE 1 5 EXAMPLE brightness level 5 PARAMETER inactivity brightness level CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Specifies the brightness level when the phone is inactive FORMAT Integer DEFAULT VALUE 1 RANGE 0 4 where 0 represents screen off EXAMPLE inactivity...

Page 805: ...T String up to 256 characters DEFAULT VALUE NA RANGE tftp server image png ftp server image jpg http server image png https server image jpg EXAMPLE background image http 10 30 100 233 pics image png Note Applicable to the 6867i 6869i and 6873i IP Phones only PARAMETER idle screen mode CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Used to switch between the two Home Idle screen mod...

Page 806: ...7i 6869i and 6873i IP phones FORMAT String DEFAULT VALUE blue RANGE blue white black EXAMPLE idle screen font color white Note Applicable to the 6867i 6869i and 6873i IP Phones only PARAMETER screen save time CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Specifies the amount of time in seconds the phone must be idle before the 6867i 6869i 6873i IP phone s screen saver initiates FOR...

Page 807: ... PNG files are supported JPG strongly recommended due to smaller file size and faster loading time There should be no frame around the image FORMAT String up to 256 characters DEFAULT VALUE N A RANGE tftp server image jpg ftp server image jpg http server image jpg https server image jpg EXAMPLE screen saver background image http 192 168 0 22 pics image jpg PARAMETER screen saver refresh timer CONF...

Page 808: ...s List and or Outgoing Redial List entry the generic blue figure image is shown Pictures must be in png format and 150 pixels wide x 150 pixels tall For the 6867i 6869i 6873i the png can be 24 bit or 32 bit The filenames for pictures must be stored using the phone number as the filename for example 9995551234 png Notes Entering no value for this parameter disables this feature The image server uri...

Page 809: ...n Guide FORMAT Boolean DEFAULT VALUE 0 RANGE 0 disable DHSG support is OFF 1 enable DHSG support is ON EXAMPLE dhsg 1 PARAMETER live dialpad CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Turns the Live Dialpad feature ON or OFF With live dial pad ON the IP phone automatically dials out and turns ON Handsfree mode as soon as a dial pad key or softkey is pressed With live dial pad OF...

Page 810: ...UE 0 Disabled RANGE 0 1 0 Disabled 1 Enabled EXAMPLE live keyboard 1 PARAMETER keyboard script CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Specifies the URI to be called when an alphabetic key on a K680i keyboard attached to a 6867i or 6869i SIP phone is pressed If this parameter is not defined or left blank the phone s native Directory search function will be launched Note The L...

Page 811: ...xxx when a user has to dial 9 to get and outside line and needs a secondary dialtone presented You can configure prefix dialling by adding a prepend digit to the dial string For example if you add a prepend map of 2 9 XXXXXXXXX 91 the IP phone adds the digits 91 to any 10 digit number beginning with any digit from 2 to 9 that is dialed out Other examples of prepend mappings are 1X 9 Prepends 9 to ...

Page 812: ...roxy in the dial string When disabled default the hash pound key acts as a dial plan terminator FORMAT Boolean DEFAULT VALUE 0 Disabled RANGE 0 Disabled used as a dial plan terminator 1 Enabled sent as 23 in dial string EXAMPLE sip dial plan terminator 1 PARAMETER sip digit timeout CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Represents the time in seconds between consecutive key ...

Page 813: ...ished since the phone uses the local port 5061 for connection If the Global SIP parameter TLS is set on the phone more than one connection can be setup since the phone uses a random local port for connection This parameter must be enabled for this feature to start keep alive for a particular transport FORMAT Boolean DEFAULT VALUE 0 RANGE 0 disabled 1 enabled EXAMPLE sip outbound support 1 PARAMETE...

Page 814: ... second line on the screen of the phone Notes If other status messages display on the phone such as Network Disconnected the Screen Name 2 value does not display Symbol characters are allowed such as If the text is longer than the display width than the display truncates the text to fit the display FORMAT Alphanumeric characters DEFAULT VALUE N A RANGE Up to 20 alphanumeric characters EXAMPLE sip ...

Page 815: ...hanumeric characters EXAMPLE sip display name Joe Smith PARAMETER sip auth name CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Used in the username field of the Authorization header field of the SIP REGISTER request FORMAT Text DEFAULT VALUE N A RANGE Up to 20 alphanumeric characters EXAMPLE sip auth name 5553456 PARAMETER sip password CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac c...

Page 816: ... PARAMETER sip bla number CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Allows you to assign a phone number that is shared across all IP phones FORMAT Integer DEFAULT VALUE N A RANGE N A EXAMPLE sip bla number 1010 PARAMETER sip mode CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Allows you to configure the mode of the line Applicable values are Generic Normal line B...

Page 817: ...nfigured The phone can only transfer the currently active call or accept transferred calls if there is no active calls If call waiting is disabled intercom calls are treated as regular incoming calls and are rejected pre dialing with live dial pad disabled still accepts incoming calls the Missed Calls List does not get updated with details of calls the Blind Transfer feature on the phone may not w...

Page 818: ...one is audible only once on the active call FORMAT Integer DEFAULT VALUE 0 RANGE 0 4294967295 EXAMPLE call waiting tone period 30 PARAMETER sip proxy ip CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION The IP address of the SIP proxy server for which the IP phone uses to send all SIP requests A SIP proxy is a server that initiates and forwards requests generated by the IP phone to the...

Page 819: ...NGE N A EXAMPLE sip backup proxy port 5060 PARAMETER sip outbound proxy CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION This is the address of the outbound proxy server All SIP messages originating from the phone are sent to this server For example if you have a Session Border Controller in your network then you would normally set its address here FORMAT IP Address or fully qualified...

Page 820: ...ill active and you can dial using username ip address of the phone If the Registrar IP address is set to 0 0 0 0 for a per line basis i e line 1 line 2 etc then the register request is not sent the No Service message does not display and the message waiting indicator MWI does not come on FORMAT IP address or fully qualified Domain Name DEFAULT VALUE 0 0 0 0 RANGE N A EXAMPLE sip registrar ip 192 1...

Page 821: ...the backup register request is not sent the No Service message does not display and the message waiting indicator MWI does not come on FORMAT IP address or fully qualified Domain Name DEFAULT VALUE 0 0 0 0 RANGE N A EXAMPLE sip backup registrar ip 192 168 0 102 PARAMETER sip backup registrar port CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION The backup registrar s typically the bac...

Page 822: ...igure the sip backup outbound proxy on a global basis FORMAT IP address or fully qualified Domain Name DEFAULT VALUE 0 0 0 0 RANGE N A EXAMPLE sip backup outbound proxy drax us mitel com PARAMETER sip backup outbound proxy port CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION The backup outbound proxy port on the backup outbound proxy server to which the IP phone sends all SIP message...

Page 823: ...xt DEFAULT VALUE N A RANGE Up to 20 alphanumeric characters EXAMPLE sip line1 screen name Joe Smith PARAMETER sip lineN screen name 2 where N line number CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Used to display text on a second line on the screen of the phone Notes If other status messages display on the phone such as Network Disconnected the Screen Name 2 value does not displ...

Page 824: ... characters EXAMPLE sip line1 user name 1010 PARAMETER sip lineN display name where N line number CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Used in the display name field of the From SIP header field Some IP PBX systems use this as the caller s ID and some may overwrite this with the string that is set at the PBX system FORMAT Text DEFAULT VALUE N A RANGE Up to 20 alphanumeric ...

Page 825: ...p lineN password where N line number CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION The password that will be used to register at the registrar FORMAT Text DEFAULT VALUE N A RANGE Up to 20 alphanumeric characters EXAMPLE sip line1 password 12345 ...

Page 826: ... the value set for the sip lineN bla number parameter shall be the same value set for the sip lineN user name parameter without the incremented digit added to the phone For example if the sip lineN user name for the first phone is 10101 and the sip lineN user name for the second phone is 10102 etc you would configure BLA on a per line basis for the ININ server as follows sip line1 user name 10101 ...

Page 827: ...ws you to configure the mode of the line Applicable values are Generic Normal line BroadSoft SCA Shared Call Line Appearances SCA line for BroadWorks network call activity can go to more than one phone BLA Bridged Line Appearance BLA line FORMAT Integer DEFAULT VALUE 0 RANGE Valid values are 0 Generic 1 BroadSoft SCA 2 Reserved 3 BLA EXAMPLE sip line1 mode 2 ...

Page 828: ...the user is on a call any further incoming calls will receive busy unless Call Forward Busy or Call Forward No Answer and Busy is configured on the phone It will then forward the call according to the rule configured The phone can only transfer the currently active call or accept transferred calls if there is no active calls If call waiting is disabled intercom calls are treated as regular incomin...

Page 829: ...VALUE 0 0 0 0 RANGE N A EXAMPLE sip line1 proxy ip 192 168 0 101 PARAMETER sip lineN proxy port where N line number CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION The proxy server s port number FORMAT Integer DEFAULT VALUE 0 RANGE N A EXAMPLE sip line1 proxy port 5060 PARAMETER sip lineN backup proxy ip where N line number CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTIO...

Page 830: ...s is the address of the outbound proxy server All SIP messages originating from the phone are sent to this server For example if you have a Session Border Controller in your network then you would normally set its address here FORMAT IP Address or fully qualified Domain Name DEFAULT VALUE 0 0 0 0 RANGE N A EXAMPLE sip outbound proxy 10 42 23 13 PARAMETER sip lineN outbound proxy port where N line ...

Page 831: ... can dial using username ip address of the phone If the Registrar IP address is set to 0 0 0 0 for a per line basis i e line 1 line 2 etc then the register request is not sent the No Service message does not display and the message waiting indicator MWI does not come on FORMAT IP address or fully qualified Domain Name DEFAULT VALUE 0 0 0 0 RANGE N A EXAMPLE sip line1 registrar ip 192 168 0 101 PAR...

Page 832: ...egister request is not sent the No Service message does not display and the message waiting indicator MWI does not come on FORMAT IP address or fully qualified Domain Name DEFAULT VALUE 0 0 0 0 RANGE N A EXAMPLE sip line1 backup registrar ip 192 168 0 102 PARAMETER sip lineN backup registrar port where N line number CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION The backup registrar...

Page 833: ...p outbound proxy on a per line basis FORMAT IP address or fully qualified Domain Name DEFAULT VALUE 0 0 0 0 RANGE N A EXAMPLE sip line1 backup outbound proxy drax us mitel com PARAMETER sip lineN backup outbound proxy port where N line number CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION The backup outbound proxy port on the backup outbound proxy server to which the IP phone sends ...

Page 834: ...be enabled in order for the MWI subscription for BLA to occur The MWI re subscription for the BLA account uses the value set for the sip explicit mwi subscription period parameter to re subscribe Whether or not the sip mwi for bla account parameter is enabled the priority for displaying MWI does not change FORMAT Boolean DEFAULT VALUE 0 disabled RANGE 0 disabled 1 enabled EXAMPLE sip mwi for bla a...

Page 835: ...P phone as follows To disable centralized conferencing leave this field empty blank To enable SIP centralized conferencing then do one of the following actions If you have specified a proxy server registrar server then to reach the media server via the proxy server set this field to one of the following conf Sylantro server or Conference BroadSoft server By setting this field to conf you specify c...

Page 836: ...registrar server then to reach the media server via the proxy server set this field to one of the following conf Sylantro server or Conference BroadSoft server By setting this field to conf you specify conf proxy_server _address proxy_port For example if the proxy server address is 206 229 26 60 and the proxy port used is 10060 then by setting this parameter to conf you are specifying the followin...

Page 837: ...rate with Genband Call Manager for ad hoc conference FORMAT Boolean DEFAULT VALUE 0 disabled RANGE 0 disabled 1 enabled EXAMPLE custom adhoc conference 1 PARAMETER sip join support CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Enables or disables the phone to allow a conference to be set up with a join header as described in RFC 3911 FORMAT Boolean DEFAULT VALUE 0 disabled RANGE 0 ...

Page 838: ...ut 2 Live dial mode without dial plan matching When a user initiates a conference call or transfer they hear a dial tone before dialing begins The phone does not match the number to the local dial plan and automatically dials out only if it reaches the set digit timeout or if the number matches a number defined in the emergency dial plan EXAMPLE confxfer live dial 2 PARAMETER http digest username ...

Page 839: ...ial characters such as _ etc You must reboot the phone after setting the HTTP HTTPS digest authentication parameters FORMAT String DEFAULT VALUE aastra RANGE Up to 20 alphanumeric characters EXAMPLE http digest password mypassword PARAMETER http digest force login CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Enables and disables the display of a LOGIN key on the phone s idle scree...

Page 840: ...le 1 enable EXAMPLE sip explicit mwi subscription 1 PARAMETER sip explicit mwi subscription period CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION The requested duration in seconds before the MWI subscription times out The phone re subscribes to MWI before the subscription period ends FORMAT Integer DEFAULT VALUE 86400 RANGE 30 2147483647 EXAMPLE sip explicit mwi subscription period ...

Page 841: ... cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION The time in seconds that the IP phone uses to send periodic re INVITE requests to keep a session alive The proxy uses these re INVITE requests to maintain the status of the connected sessions See RFC4028 for details The minimum session timer is 90 FORMAT Integer DEFAULT VALUE 0 RANGE 0 90 EXAMPLE sip session timer 90 PARAMETER sip T1 timer CONFIGURATION FILES sta...

Page 842: ...to a request FORMAT Integer Default Value 0 Range N A Example sip T2 timer 8 PARAMETER sip transaction timer CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION The amount of time in milliseconds that the phone allows the callserver registrar proxy to respond to SIP messages that it sends If the phone does not receive a response in the amount of time designated for this parameter the pho...

Page 843: ...rsistent TLS you MUST specify the Trusted Certificates the Root and Intermediate Certificates the Local Certificate and the Private Key are optional This parameter implies keep alive mechanism For more information about Persistent TLS see Transport Layer Security TLS Settings on page A 106 FORMAT Integer DEFAULT VALUE 1 UDP RANGE Valid values are 0 User Datagram Protocol UDP and Transmission Contr...

Page 844: ...p cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION The threshold value in seconds prior to expiration that the phone renews registrations The phone will automatically send registration renewals half way through the registration period unless half way is more than the threshold value For example if the threshold value is set to 60 seconds and if the registration period is 600 seconds the renewal REGISTER message ...

Page 845: ...plicable for all event packages this parameter controls how long the phone delays then retries a subscription when a SUBSCRIBE request is responded with error codes other than 408 timeout or 503 service unavailable Note If set to 0 or an invalid value is set the parameter will not take effect FORMAT Seconds DEFAULT VALUE 0 RANGE 1 3600 EXAMPLE sip subscription failed retry timer 30 PARAMETER sip b...

Page 846: ... in seconds that the phone waits to receive a BLA subscribe message from the server If you specify zero 0 the phone uses the value specified for the BLA expiration in the subscribe message received from the server If no value is specified the phone uses the default value of 300 seconds FORMAT Integer DEFAULT VALUE 300 RANGE 0 3700 Note Whensettozero 0 thephoneusesBLAexpiryvaluespecified in subscri...

Page 847: ...CD features FORMAT Boolean DEFAULT VALUE 0 disable RANGE 0 disable 1 enable EXAMPLE sip line1 as feature event subscription 1 PARAMETER sip as feature event subscription period CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Specifies the amount of time in seconds between re subscribing If the phone does not re subscribe in the time specified for this parameter it loses subscription ...

Page 848: ...he server once and re uses that connection for all calls from the phone The setup connection for Persistent TLS is established during the registration of the phone If the phones are set to use Persistent TLS and a call is made from the phone this call and all subsequent calls use the same authenticated connection This significantly reduces the delay time when placing a call Notes There can be only...

Page 849: ...3600 Note The real time interval will vary between 80 and 100 of the configured value Example sip persistent tls keep alive 60 PARAMETER sip send sips over tls CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Allows administrators the ability to manually configure the IP phones to use either the SIP or SIPS URI scheme when TLS or persistent TLS is enabled FORMAT Integer DEFAULT VALUE ...

Page 850: ...ver To download a certificate from another specified server To download a specific file the string value MUST HAVE A FILENAME at the end of the string For example sips root and intermediate certificates ftp admin admin 1 2 3 4 50 path phonesRootCert pem where path is the directory and phonesRootCert pem is the filename If you do not specify a filename the download fails See examples for each below...

Page 851: ...ftp admin admin 1 2 3 4 50 path phonesLocalCert pem where path is the directory and phonesLocalCert pem is the filename If you do not specify a filename the download fails See examples for each below Note The certificate file must use the format pem To create specific certificate files to use on your IP phone contact Mitel Technical Support FORMAT filename pem DEFAULT VALUE N A RANGE N A EXAMPLE T...

Page 852: ...ple sips private key ftp admin admin 1 2 3 4 50 path phonesPrivatekey pem where path is the directory and phonesPrivateKey pem is the filename If you do not specify a filename the download fails See examples for each below Note The key file must use the format pem To create specific private key files to use on your IP phone contact Mitel Technical Support FORMAT filename pem DEFAULT VALUE N A RANG...

Page 853: ...erver To download a certificate from another specified server To download a specific file the string value MUST HAVE A FILENAME at the end of the string For example sips trusted certificates ftp admin admin 1 2 3 4 50 path phonesTrustedCert pem where path is the directory and phonesTrustedCert pem is the filename If you do not specify a filename the download fails See examples for each below Note ...

Page 854: ...nd intermediate certificates use 1 root and 0 or 1 intermediate certificates 802 1x local certificate use 1 local certificate 802 1x private key 1 private key that corresponds to local certificate 802 1x trusted certificates 0 or more trusted certificates a maximum of 2 pc port passthrough enabled PARAMETER pc port passthru enabled CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Enab...

Page 855: ...he phone Note The value you enter for this parameter also displays in the Mitel Web UI at the path Advanced Settings 802 1x Support General Identity FORMAT String DEFAULT VALUE N A RANGE N A EXAMPLE identity phone1 PARAMETER md5 password CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Specifies the password used for the MD5 authentication of the phone Note The value you enter for thi...

Page 856: ...min admin 1 2 3 4 50 path phones802RootCer t pem where path is the directory and phones802RootCert pem is the filename If you do not specify a filename the download fails See examples for each below FORMAT String DEFAULT VALUE N A RANGE N A EXAMPLE The following example downloads no 802 1x root and intermediate certificate file 802 1x root and intermediate certificates The following example downlo...

Page 857: ...ilename If you do not specify a filename the download fails See examples for each below FORMAT String Default Value N A Range N A Example The following example downloads no local certificate file 802 1x local certificate The following example downloads the local certificate file from the original configuration server 802 1x local certificate phones802LocalCert pem The following example uses FTP to...

Page 858: ... admin 1 2 3 4 50 path phones802Trusted Cert pem where path is the directory and phones802TrustedCert pem is the filename If you do not specify a filename the download fails See examples for each below FORMAT String DEFAULT VALUE N A RANGE N A EXAMPLE The following example downloads no 802 1x trusted certificate file 802 1x trusted certificates The following example downloads the 802 1x trusted ce...

Page 859: ...equests The following DTMF tones are supported Support signals 0 9 Support durations up to 5 seconds FORMAT Integer DEFAULT VALUE 3000 RANGE N A EXAMPLE sip rtp port 3000 PARAMETER rtp symmetric port CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION By default the phones support symmetrical RTP port handling i e the phone will only play an RTP stream if it comes from a source port that...

Page 860: ...period in seconds whereby if no audio stream i e RTP packets is received in the defined amount of time the phone will send a BYE request thus releasing the call and returning the home idle screen FORMAT Integer DEFAULT VALUE 0 Disabled RANGE 0 2147483647 seconds EXAMPLE sip no rtp timeout 240 PARAMETER sip use basic codecs CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Enables or di...

Page 861: ...tet align 1 in SDP negotiate mode for incoming calls 2 Disable octet aligned mode and add octet align 0 in SDP negotiate mode for incoming calls EXAMPLE sip amr codec payload format 1 PARAMETER sip amr codec mode set CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Specifies the list of mode sets supported and also the preferred mode to use if multiple modes are supported by both side...

Page 862: ... kbps 4 15 85 kbps 5 18 25 kbps 6 19 85 kbps 7 23 05 kbps 8 23 85 kbps EXAMPLE sip amr wb codec mode set 2 1 0 PARAMETER sip out of band dtmf CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Enables or disables out of band DTMF Enabling this parameter forces the IP phone to use out of band DTMF according to RFC2833 Note See Out of Band DTMF and DTMF Method on page 4 91 for DTMF behavi...

Page 863: ... G 726 40 97 G726 24 8000 G 726 24 98 G726 16 8000 G 726 16 110 G711u 16000 G711u 16K 111 G711a 16000 G711a 16K 112 L16 8000 L16 8K 113 L16 16000 L16 16K 115 G726 32 8000 G 726 32 118 AMR AMR Licensed feature 119 AMR WB G 722 2 AMR WB Licensed feature 121 G 722 1 G 722 1 Leave blank for all codecs All Codec 1 only Basic Codec 1 only None Codecs 2 through 10 only ptime in milliseconds 5 10 15 20 90...

Page 864: ...njunction with the sip out of band dtmf parameter FORMAT Boolean DEFAULT VALUE 0 RTP RANGE 0 RTP 1 SIP INFO 2 BOTH EXAMPLE sip dtmf method 1 PARAMETER sip srtp mode CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION This parameter determines if SRTP is enabled on this IP phone as follows If set to 0 then disable SRTP If set to 1 then SRTP calls are preferred If set to 2 then SRTP calls ...

Page 865: ...silence suppression 0 PARAMETER sip remove silence suppression offer CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Specifies whether or not the silence suppression attribute should be included in the Session Description Protocol SDP offer If enabled the silence suppression attribute will be removed from the SDP offer If disabled the attribute will not be removed from the SDP offer ...

Page 866: ...GE 0 RTP 1 SIP INFO 2 BOTH EXAMPLE sip line1 dtmf method 1 PARAMETER sip lineN srtp mode where N line number CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION This parameter determines if SRTP is enabled on this line as follows If set to 1 then use the global setting for this line This is the default setting If set to 0 then disable SRTP If set to 1 then SRTP calls are preferred If set...

Page 867: ...er 8500 PARAMETER sip autodial timeout CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Globally specifies the time in seconds that the phone waits to dial a pre configured number after the handset is lifted from the IP phone cradle If this parameter is set to 0 hotline the phone immediately dials a pre configured number when you lift the handset If this parameter is set to a value gr...

Page 868: ... DEFAULT VALUE 1 RANGE Any valid SIP number EXAMPLE sip line1 autodial number 8500 PARAMETER sip lineN autodial timeout where N line number CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION On a per line basis this parameter specifies the time in seconds that the phone waits to dial a pre configured number after the handset is lifted from the IP phone cradle If this parameter is set to...

Page 869: ...f voicemails exceeds the limit Registered account numbers URIs that exceed the length of the screen either with or without the voicemail icon and the message count are truncated with an ellipse character at the end of the number URI string FORMAT String DEFAULT VALUE N A RANGE 0 99 EXAMPLE sip line1 vmail 97 Note In the above example the user would dial 97 to access the voicemail account PARAMETER...

Page 870: ...ing on SCA configured lines Applicable to the 6867i 6869i and 6873i model IP phones as well as expansion modules FORMAT Integer DEFAULT VALUE 0 RANGE 0 2 0 Do no display any visual indicators 1 Display a gray circle for the 6867i 6869i 6873i and the number of pending messages inside the circle and illuminate the softkey s LED 2 Display only a gray circle for the 6867i 6869i 6873i no indication of ...

Page 871: ...cific file the string value MUST HAVE A FILENAME at the end of the string For example directory 1 tftp 10 30 102 158 path companylist csv where path is the directory and companylist csv is the filename If you do not specify a filename the download fails See examples for each below FORMAT Alphanumeric characters DEFAULT VALUE N A RANGE N A EXAMPLE Example The following example downloads no director...

Page 872: ...e string value MUST HAVE A FILENAME at the end of the string For example directory 1 tftp 10 30 102 158 path companylist csv where path is the directory and companylist csv is the filename If you do not specify a filename the download fails See examples for each below FORMAT Alphanumeric characters DEFAULT VALUE N A RANGE N A EXAMPLE Example The following example downloads no directory directory 1...

Page 873: ...FIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Specifies the folder name of the directory defined in the directory 2 parameter FORMAT Alphanumeric characters DEFAULT VALUE Personal RANGE N A EXAMPLE directory 1 name Friends PARAMETER directory 1 enabled CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Specifies whether or not the directory defined in the directory 1 parame...

Page 874: ...Enabled EXAMPLE directory 2 enabled 1 PARAMETER exchange server CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Specifies the user s Microsoft Exchange server IP address or Fully Qualified Domain Name FQDN FORMAT IP address or FQDN DEFAULT VALUE 0 0 0 0 RANGE N A EXAMPLE exchange server mail acme com PARAMETER exchange use ssl CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIP...

Page 875: ... RANGE N A EXAMPLE exchange path custom_ews exchange asmx PARAMETER exchange user name CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Specifies the user s Microsoft Exchange user name FORMAT String DEFAULT VALUE N A RANGE N A EXAMPLE exchange user name jdoe PARAMETER exchange contacts enabled CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Specifies whether or not the ...

Page 876: ...s with TFTP FTP HTTP and HTTPS servers Notes The resync time is based on the local time of the IP phone The value of 00 00 is 12 00 A M When entering a value for this parameter using the configuration files the value can be entered using minute values from 00 to 59 for example the auto resync time can be entered as 02 56 Resync adds up to 15 minutes random time to the configured time For example i...

Page 877: ...ck reads the proper time A value of 1 forces the phone to wait 24 hours prior to doing the first checksync FORMAT Integer DEFAULT VALUE 0 RANGE 0 364 EXAMPLE exchange contacts resync days 1 PARAMETER exchange contacts resync max delay CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Specifies the maximum time in minutes the phone waits past the scheduled time before starting a Microso...

Page 878: ...rprise Directory feature and not applicable to user related Xsi features such as Speed Dial 8 Basic Call Logs Hide Number and other Xsi directories Credentials for the user related Xsi features require encryption and therefore must be entered through the phone s Options List Credentials menu FORMAT String DEFAULT VALUE N A RANGE N A EXAMPLES xsi ip xsp xsi broadworks net or xsi ip johndoe mitel123...

Page 879: ...name CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Specifies the user name used for authentication of the Xsi account FORMAT username server DEFAULT VALUE N A RANGE N A EXAMPLE xsi user name xsi xsi broadworks net PARAMETER xsi personal contacts enabled CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Specifies whether or not the BroadSoft Xsi Personal Contacts directo...

Page 880: ... common directory enabled CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Specifies whether or not the BroadSoft Xsi Enterprise Common Directory should be enabled to be accessed on the phone FORMAT Boolean DEFAULT VALUE 0 RANGE 0 Disabled 1 Enabled EXAMPLE xsi enterprise common directory enabled 1 PARAMETER xsi group directory enabled CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg...

Page 881: ...nal contacts name CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Specifies the folder name of the BroadSoft Xsi Personal Contacts when enabled FORMAT Alphanumeric characters DEFAULT VALUE Personal Contacts RANGE N A EXAMPLE xsi personal contacts name Xsi Personal PARAMETER xsi enterprise directory name CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Specifies the folde...

Page 882: ...on PARAMETER xsi group directory name CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Specifies the folder name of the BroadSoft Xsi Group Directory when enabled FORMAT Alphanumeric characters DEFAULT VALUE Group Directory RANGE N A EXAMPLE xsi group directory name Xsi Group PARAMETER xsi group common directory name CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Specif...

Page 883: ...onfigured time For example if the resync time parameter is set to 02 00 the event takes place any time between 02 00 and 02 15 When the language on the phone is set to French or Spanish you must enter the time in the format 00h00 configuration files only FORMAT hh mm 00h00 for French and Spanish configuration files DEFAULT VALUE 02 30 RANGE hh 00 to 23 mm 00 to 59 EXAMPLE xsi resync time 03 24 PAR...

Page 884: ...T VALUE 30 RANGE 0 1439 EXAMPLE xsi resync max delay 20 PARAMETER ldap enabled CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Specifies whether or not the LDAP Directory should be enabled to be accessed on the phone FORMAT Boolean DEFAULT VALUE 0 RANGE 0 Disabled 1 Enabled EXAMPLE ldap enabled 1 PARAMETER ldap name CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Specif...

Page 885: ...ORMAT String hostname or IP address DEFAULT VALUE N A RANGE N A EXAMPLE ldap server ldap company com no authentication and using default port 389 ldap server user password ldap company com 3268 authentication and using port 3268 PARAMETER ldap user name CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Specifies the user s LDAP user name FORMAT String DEFAULT VALUE N A RANGE N A EXAMPL...

Page 886: ...e to the configured time For example if the resync time parameter is set to 02 00 the event takes place any time between 02 00 and 02 15 When the language on the phone is set to French or Spanish you must enter the time in the format 00h00 configuration files only FORMAT hh mm 00h00 for French and Spanish configuration files DEFAULT VALUE 02 00 RANGE hh 00 to 23 mm 00 to 59 EXAMPLE ldap resync tim...

Page 887: ...name of a record are empty FORMAT String DEFAULT VALUE N A RANGE N A EXAMPLE ldap cn attribute display PARAMETER ldap dn attribute CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Used to perform the search request for the detailed view of an LDAP contact FORMAT String DEFAULT VALUE N A RANGE N A EXAMPLE ldap dn attribute customDN PARAMETER ldap search filter CONFIGURATION FILES start...

Page 888: ...ORMAT String list base onelevel subtree DEFAULT VALUE N A RANGE base onelevel subtree EXAMPLE ldap search scope onelevel PARAMETER ldap search timeout CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Used to set the request timeout for LDAP requests FORMAT Integer seconds DEFAULT VALUE 20 RANGE 1 to 120 EXAMPLE ldap search timeout 30 PARAMETER ldap network timeout CONFIGURATION FILES ...

Page 889: ...AP directory uses ISO 8859 1 encoding EXAMPLE ldap use ISO 8859 1 encoding 1 PARAMETER ldap first name attribute list CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Specifies the LDAP first name e g John for the attribute list If this parameter contains more than one value only the first matching value will be selected in the record FORMAT String list of attribute names separated by...

Page 890: ...tring list of attribute names separated by a comma DEFAULT VALUE N A RANGE N A EXAMPLE ldap company attribute list organization bname PARAMETER ldap job title attribute list CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Specifies the LDAP job title e g Vice President for the attribute list If this parameter contains more than one value only the first matching value will be selected...

Page 891: ...cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Specifies the LDAP business city e g Concord for the attribute list If this parameter contains more than one value only the first matching value will be selected in the record FORMAT String list of attribute names separated by a comma DEFAULT VALUE N A RANGE N A EXAMPLE ldap business city attribute list wcity bcity PARAMETER ldap business state attribute list CONFIGURATION ...

Page 892: ...p cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Specifies the LDAP business country e g Canada for the attribute list If this parameter contains more than one value only the first matching value will be selected in the record FORMAT String list of attribute names separated by a comma DEFAULT VALUE N A RANGE N A EXAMPLE ldap business country attribute list bcountry wcountry PARAMETER ldap home street attribute...

Page 893: ...ESCRIPTION Specifies the LDAP home state e g Texas for the attribute list If this parameter contains more than one value only the first matching value will be selected in the record FORMAT String list of attribute names separated by a comma DEFAULT VALUE N A RANGE N A EXAMPLE ldap home state attribute list hstate pstate PARAMETER ldap home postal code attribute list CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg...

Page 894: ...fg DESCRIPTION Specifies the LDAP business phone 1 e g 1 905 760 4200 for the attribute list If this parameter contains more than one value only the first matching value will be selected in the record FORMAT String list of attribute names separated by a comma DEFAULT VALUE N A RANGE N A EXAMPLE ldap business phone 1 attribute list wphone1 bphone1 PARAMETER ldap business phone 2 attribute list CONF...

Page 895: ... cfg DESCRIPTION Specifies the LDAP home phone 2 e g 1 416 468 3267 for the attribute list If this parameter contains more than one value only the first matching value will be selected in the record FORMAT String list of attribute names separated by a comma DEFAULT VALUE N A RANGE N A EXAMPLE ldap home phone 2 attribute list hphone2 pphone2 PARAMETER ldap mobile phone attribute list CONFIGURATION ...

Page 896: ...up cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Specifies the LDAP business fax e g 1 905 760 4233 for the attribute list If this parameter contains more than one value only the first matching value will be selected in the record FORMAT String list of attribute names separated by a comma DEFAULT VALUE N A RANGE N A EXAMPLE ldap business fax attribute list fax bfax PARAMETER ldap email 1 attribute list CONFIG...

Page 897: ... Specifies the LDAP email 3 e g j doe mitel com for the attribute list If this parameter contains more than one value only the first matching value will be selected in the record FORMAT String list of attribute names separated by a comma DEFAULT VALUE N A RANGE N A EXAMPLE ldap email 3 attribute list email3 mail3 PARAMETER directory disabled CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRI...

Page 898: ...DESCRIPTION Specifies the order in which the phone should sort directory contacts when displayed on screen FORMAT Integer DEFAULT VALUE 0 RANGE 0 1 0 By First Name 1 By Last Name EXAMPLE directory sort preference 1 PARAMETER directory search dynamic threshold CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Specifies the threshold value where the contact search is no longer dynamic fo...

Page 899: ...greater than or equal to the defined value and the respective last digits of the phone number match those of a directory entry the phone will display the directory entry s name on screen 3 If the incoming call s phone number is less than the defined value the phone will not perform a directory lookup and will display the information provided in the SIP header EXAMPLE directory digits match 9 PARAM...

Page 900: ...led 1 PARAMETER services script CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Allows you to specify a specific URI for accessing services after pressing the Services key When this parameter is set it overrides the standard function of the Services key FORMAT Alphanumeric characters DEFAULT VALUE N A RANGE N A EXAMPLE services script http 10 50 100 234 test xml PARAMETER callers lis...

Page 901: ...orwarding If this parameter is set to 0 a user and administrator can configure Call Forwarding via the Mitel Web UI and the IP Phone UI using the Call Forward options If this parameter is set to 1 all Call Forward options are removed from the Mitel Web UI and the IP Phone UI preventing the ability to configure Call Forwarding FORMAT Boolean DEFAULT VALUE 0 false RANGE 0 false 1 true EXAMPLE call f...

Page 902: ...ly to all accounts on the phone custom The Custom mode allows you to configure CFWD for a specific account or all accounts You can configure a specific mode All Busy and or No Answer for each account independently or all accounts On the 6863i and 6865i you can set all accounts to ALL On or ALL Off On the 6867i 6869i and 6873i you can set all accounts to All On All Off or copy the configuration for...

Page 903: ...up cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Allows a pattern based configuration of the PIN suppression FORMAT Alphanumeric characters Symbol Description 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Digit symbol X Match any digit symbol wildcard Other keypad symbol can terminate a dial string Expression inclusive OR 0 or more of the preceding digit sym bol or expression Symbol inclusive OR Used only with represent a range of acc...

Page 904: ...ween the transmission of LLDP Data Unit LLDPDU packets The value of zero 0 disables this parameter FORMAT Integer DEFAULT VALUE 30 RANGE 0 2147483647 EXAMPLE lldp interval 60 PARAMETER use lldp elin CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Enables or disables the use of an Emergency Location Identification Number ELIN received from LLDP as a caller ID for emergency numbers Add...

Page 905: ...e the time out interval This parameter is only valid during the phone bootup process FORMAT Integer DEFAULT VALUE 32 seconds RANGE 0 65535 seconds EXAMPLE lldp startinterval 7 PARAMETER lldp optional inventory management tlv CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Implements either all of the LLDP MED Inventory Management TLV sets or none of the sets FORMAT Integer DEFAULT VA...

Page 906: ...meter is set to 1 the indicator is disabled and will NOT increment as unanswered calls come into the IP phone FORMAT Boolean DEFAULT VALUE 0 false RANGE 0 false 1 true EXAMPLE missed calls indicator disabled 1 PARAMETER sip lineN missed calls enabled where N line number CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Specifies whether missed calls on the defined line should increment...

Page 907: ...sponse it blocks the phone until it is rebooted If you enter a value greater than 0 for this parameter the phone times out and will not be blocked FORMAT Integer DEFAULT VALUE 0 never timeout RANGE 0 to 2147483647 seconds EXAMPLE xml get timeout 20 PARAMETER xml application URI CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION This is the XML application you are loading into the IP pho...

Page 908: ...AMPLE xml application title Traffic Reports PARAMETER xml application post list CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION The HTTP server that is pushing XML applications to the IP phone FORMAT IP address in dotted decimal format and or Domain name address DEFAULT VALUE N A RANGE N A EXAMPLE xml application post list 10 50 10 53 dhcp10 53 ana mitel com PARAMETER xml beep notifi...

Page 909: ...er DEFAULT VALUE 5 RANGE 1 to 25 EXAMPLE xml status scroll delay 3 PARAMETER action uri startup CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Specifies the URI for which the phone executes a GET on when a startup event occurs This parameter can use any of the following variables DISPLAYNAME SIPUSERNAME SIPAUTHNAME PROXYURL LINESTATE LOCALIP REGISTRATIONSTATE REGISTRATIONCODE FORMAT...

Page 910: ...gistered php auth name SIPAUTHNAME PARAMETER action uri registration event CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Specifies the URI that the phone executes a GET on when a registration event change occurs This parameter uses the following variables to determine the state of the event REGISTRATIONSTATE REGISTRATIONCODE Note If defined this action URI is also called upon at st...

Page 911: ... Fully qualified URI DEFAULT VALUE N A RANGE Up to 128 ASCII characters EXAMPLE action uri incoming http 10 50 10 140 incoming php number REMOTENUMBER PARAMETER action uri outgoing CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Specifies the URI for which the phone executes a GET on when an outgoing call event occurs This parameter can use the following variables REMOTENUMBER SIPUSE...

Page 912: ...racters EXAMPLE action uri offhook http 10 50 10 140 offhook PARAMETER action uri onhook CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Specifies the URI for which the phone executes a GET on when an onhook event occurs This parameter can use the following variables LOCALIP CALLDURATION CALLDIRECTION LINESTATE Note The LocalIP CallDuration and CallDirection variables allow for enhan...

Page 913: ...STATE REGISTRATIONCODE FORMAT String DEFAULT VALUE N A RANGE Any valid URI EXAMPLE action uri connected http fargo ana mitel com connected xml state LINESTATE PARAMETER action uri disconnected CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Specifies the URI that the phone executes a GET on when it transitions from the incoming outgoing calling or connected state into the idle state ...

Page 914: ...g mac cfg DESCRIPTION Enables or disables the phone to accept or reject an aastra xml SIP NOTIFY message Note To ensure the SIP NOTIFY is coming from a trusted source it is recommended that you enable the Whitelist feature Whitelist Proxyparameter ontheIPphone Ifenabled andthephonereceives a SIP NOTIFY from a server that is NOT on the whitelist i e untrusted server the phone rejects the message FO...

Page 915: ...the URI to be called every action uri poll interval seconds FORMAT HTTP s server path or Fully Qualified Domain Name DEFAULT VALUE N A RANGE N A EXAMPLE action uri poll http myserver com myappli xml PARAMETER action uri poll interval CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Specifies the interval in seconds between calls from the phone to the action uri poll FORMAT Integer DEF...

Page 916: ...defined rings excluding silence or one of 8 custom ringtones FORMAT Integer DEFAULT VALUE 0 Tone 1 RANGE Configuration Files 0 Tone 1 1 Tone 2 2 Tone 3 3 Tone 4 4 Tone 5 5 Silent 6 Tone 7 7 Tone 8 8 Tone 9 9 Tone 10 10 Tone 11 11 Tone 12 12 Tone 13 13 Tone 14 14 Tone 15 15 Tone 6 100 Custom Ring Tone 1 101 Custom Ring Tone 2 102 Custom Ring Tone 3 103 Custom Ring Tone 4 104 Custom Ring Tone 5 105 ...

Page 917: ... FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Globally sets a tone set for a specific country FORMAT Text DEFAULT VALUE US RANGE Australia Brazil Canada Europe generic tones France Germany Italy Italy2 Malaysia Mexico Russia Slovakia United Kingdom UK US EXAMPLE tone set Germany ...

Page 918: ...ne can be one of 15 pre defined rings excluding silence or one of 8 custom ringtones FORMAT Integer DEFAULT VALUE 1 Global RANGE 1 Global 0 Tone 1 1 Tone 2 2 Tone 3 3 Tone 4 4 Tone 5 5 Silent 6 Tone 7 7 Tone 8 8 Tone 9 9 Tone 10 10 Tone 11 11 Tone 12 12 Tone 13 13 Tone 14 14 Tone 15 15 Tone 6 100 Custom Ring Tone 1 101 Custom Ring Tone 2 102 Custom Ring Tone 3 103 Custom Ring Tone 4 104 Custom Rin...

Page 919: ...t the destination phone after the timeout expires For incoming calls the terminating phone will send a SIP 486 Busy Here to stop the ringback at the originating phone after the timeout expires FORMAT Integer DEFAULT VALUE 300 RANGE 0 86400 seconds EXAMPLE ringback timeout 600 PARAMETER custom ringtone N where N 1 to 8 CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Specifies the loca...

Page 920: ...dministrator Web UI unavailable in User Web UI 2 Unavailable in both Administrator and User Web UIs EXAMPLE ringtone webui lock 2 PARAMETER ring audibly enable CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Enables disables the feature whereby the ring tone of an incoming call is played through the IP phone s speaker if a user is on an active call Notes Feature compatibility is depe...

Page 921: ...n DEFAULT VALUE 0 disabled RANGE 0 1 0 disabled 1 enabled EXAMPLE no service congestion tone 1 PARAMETER sip ignore status code CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Specifies the status code that is sent in the response to the server when a user ignores an incoming call FORMAT Integer DEFAULT VALUE 486 RANGE Valid SIP final negative response code Refer to RFC3261 EXAMPLE s...

Page 922: ...SCRIPTION Enables or disables the reminder ring splash timer to start as soon as you put a call on hold even when no other calls are active on the phone When enabled the phone initiates a reminder ring splash periodically for the single call on hold When disabled no reminder ring splash is audible FORMAT Boolean DEFAULT VALUE 0 RANGE 0 disable 1 enable EXAMPLE call hold reminder 1 ...

Page 923: ...nable EXAMPLE call hold reminder during active calls 1 PARAMETER call hold reminder timer CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Specifies the time delay in seconds that a ring splash is heard on an active call when another call was placed on hold For example if a call comes into Line 1 and then a call comes into Line 2 and you answer Line 2 Line 1 is automatically placed on...

Page 924: ... determined by the call hold reminder timer parameter and then the ring splash is heard again after 60 seconds determined by this parameter Notes You must enable the call hold reminder and or call hold reminder during active calls parameter s and the call hold reminder timer parameter for this parameter to work A value of 0 prevents additional rings FORMAT Integer DEFAULT VALUE 60 RANGE 0 42949672...

Page 925: ...le this parameter 1 enable the Goodbye key rejects the incoming call When you disable this parameter 0 disable the Goodbye key hangs up the active call For the 6867i 6869i and 6873i If you enable this parameter and the phone receives another call when an active call is already present the phone displays answer and ignore You can press the required softkey as applicable For the 6863i and 6865i If y...

Page 926: ...to 3 the LED illuminates if a voicemail is pending on line 3 If you set this parameter to 0 the LED illuminates if a voicemail is pending on any line on the phone Note To enable MWI for all lines in the configuration files set this parameter to zero 0 The enable MWI for all lines in the Mitel Web UI select All in the Message Waiting Indicator Line field FORMAT Integer DEFAULT VALUE 0 all lines RAN...

Page 927: ...rb DND account Sets DND for a specific account DND key toggles the account in focus on the IP Phone UI to ON or OFF phone Sets DND ON for all accounts on the phone DND key toggles all accounts on the phone to ON or OFF custom Sets the phone to display custom screens after pressing the DND key that list the account s on the phone The user can select a specific account for DND turn DND ON for all ac...

Page 928: ...ty alerting enabled CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Enables and disables distinctive ringing on the IP phone for incoming calls and call waiting calls FORMAT Boolean DEFAULT VALUE 1 true RANGE 0 false 1 true EXAMPLE priority alerting enabled 0 PARAMETER alert auto call distribution CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION When an alert acd keyword...

Page 929: ...GE 0 Normal ringing default 1 Bellcore dr2 2 Bellcore dr3 3 Bellcore dr4 4 Bellcore dr5 5 Silent EXAMPLE alert community 1 3 PARAMETER alert community 2 CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION When an alert community 2 keyword appears in the header of the INVITE request the configured Bellcore ring tone is applied to the IP phone FORMAT Integer DEFAULT VALUE 0 Normal ringing ...

Page 930: ... ringing RANGE 0 Normal ringing default 1 Bellcore dr2 2 Bellcore dr3 3 Bellcore dr4 4 Bellcore dr5 5 Silent EXAMPLE alert community 3 1 PARAMETER alert community 4 CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION When an alert community 4 keyword appears in the header of the INVITE request the configured Bellcore ring tone is applied to the IP phone FORMAT Integer DEFAULT VALUE 0 Nor...

Page 931: ...ANGE 0 Normal ringing default 1 Bellcore dr2 2 Bellcore dr3 3 Bellcore dr4 4 Bellcore dr5 5 Silent EXAMPLE alert external 4 PARAMETER alert emergency CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION When an alert emergency keyword appears in the header of the INVITE request the configured Bellcore ring tone is applied to the IP phone FORMAT Integer DEFAULT VALUE 0 Normal ringing RANGE...

Page 932: ...al ringing RANGE 0 Normal ringing default 1 Bellcore dr2 2 Bellcore dr3 3 Bellcore dr4 4 Bellcore dr5 5 Silent EXAMPLE alert group 4 PARAMETER alert internal CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION When an alert internal keyword appears in the header of the INVITE request the configured Bellcore ring tone is applied to the IP phone FORMAT Integer DEFAULT VALUE 0 Normal ringin...

Page 933: ...alert priority 4 PARAMETER bellcore cadence dr2 CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Sets the cadence for Bellcore dr2 Note You can define up to 8 cadence rings The value of 1 indicates do not repeat FORMAT Integer DEFAULT VALUE 800 400 800 4000 RANGE N A EXAMPLE bellcore cadence dr2 800 400 800 4000 PARAMETER bellcore cadence dr3 CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg ...

Page 934: ...lue of 1 indicates do not repeat FORMAT Integer DEFAULT VALUE 300 200 1000 200 300 4000 RANGE N A EXAMPLE bellcore cadence dr4 300 200 1000 200 300 300 200 4000 PARAMETER bellcore cadence dr5 CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Sets the cadence for Bellcore dr5 Note You can define up to 8 cadence rings The value of 1 indicates do not repeat FORMAT Integer DEFAULT VALUE 50...

Page 935: ...etting a value for this parameter FORMAT Boolean DEFAULT VALUE 1 RANGE 0 disabled 1 enabled EXAMPLE sip diversion display 0 PARAMETER sip lineN diversion display where N line number CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION If enabled when an outgoing call is being diverted to another destination the phone displays the Caller ID of the new destination and the reason for the cal...

Page 936: ...tion name 1 PARAMETER directory lookup suppression pattern CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Allows a pattern based configuration whereby if the configured pattern is found in the From header display name of an incoming call the phone bypasses the local directory lookup and shows the display name as intended by the call manager i e as specified in the From header Patter...

Page 937: ...loading language packs see Loading Language Packs on page 5 52 FORMAT Integer DEFAULT VALUE 0 RANGE 0 to 4 all phones EXAMPLE language 1 PARAMETER web language CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION The language you want to display for the Mitel Web UI Valid values for all phones are 0 English default 1 4 The values 1 4 are dependent on the Language N parameter For example i...

Page 938: ...is parameter allows users to enter text and characters in the IP Phone UI and in XML applications via the keypad on the phone or for the 6873i on screen keyboard in the language s specified FORMAT Text DEFAULT VALUE English RANGE Valid values are English French Français German Deutsch Greek 6867i 6869i and 6873i only ελληνικά 6867i 6869i and 6873i only Italian Italiano Spanish Español Portuguese P...

Page 939: ...ang_da txt Danish lang_el txt Greek 6867i 6869i and 6873i only lang_es txt Spanish lang_es_mx txt Mexican Spanish lang_eu txt Euskera lang_fi txt Finnish lang_fr txt French lang_fr_ca txt Canadian French lang_gl txt Galego lang_hu txt Hungarian lang_it txt Italian lang_nl txt Dutch lang_nl_nl txt Dutch Netherlands lang_no txt Norwegian lang_pl txt Polish ASCII lang_pl_pl txt Polish UTF 8 lang_pt t...

Page 940: ...e end of the string For example language 1 ftp admin admin 1 2 3 4 50 path lang_de txt where path is the directory and lang_de txt is the filename If you do not specify a filename the download fails See examples for each below FORMAT lang_ ISO 639 _ ISO 3166 txt or lang_ ISO 639 txt Note For valid values for ISO 639 and ISO 3166 see Language Codes from Standard ISO 639 on page A 199 and Country Co...

Page 941: ... English en Czech UTF 8 cs Czech ASCII cs_op Catalan ct Valencian ct_va Welsh cy German de Danish da Greek el Spanish es Mexican Spanish es_mx Euskera eu Finnish fi French fr Canadian French fr_ca Galego gl Hungarian hu Italian it Dutch nl Dutch Netherlands nl_nl Norwegian no Polish ASCII pl Polish UTF 8 pl_pl Portuguese pt Portuguese Brazilian pt_br Romanian ro Russian ru Slovak UTF 8 sk Slovak A...

Page 942: ... ANTARCTICA ANTIGUA AND BARBUDA ARGENTINA ARMENIA ARUBA AUSTRALIA AUSTRIA AZERBAIJAN AF AX AL DZ AS AD AO AI AQ AG AR AM AW AU AT AZ BAHAMAS BAHRAIN BANGLADESH BARBADOS BELARUS BELGIUM BELIZE BENIN BERMUDA BHUTAN BOLIVIA BOSNIA AND HERZEGOVINA BOTSWANA BOUVET ISLAND BRAZIL BRITISH INDIAN OCEAN TERRITORY BRUNEI DARUSSALAM BULGARIA BURKINA FASO BURUNDI BS BH BD BB BY BE BZ BJ BM BT BO BA BW BV BR IO...

Page 943: ...A CUBA CYPRUS CZECH REPUBLIC KH CM CA CV KY CF TD CL CN CX CC CO KM CG CD CK CR CI HR CU CY CZ DENMARK Dhcp see Chapter 4 the section DHCP Time Offset Option 2 Support on page 5 23 DJIBOUTI DOMINICA DOMINICAN REPUBLIC DK DP DJ DM DO ECUADOR EGYPT EL SALVADOR EQUATORIAL GUINEA ERITREA ESTONIA ETHIOPIA EC EG SV GQ ER EE ET FALKLAND ISLANDS MALVINAS FAROE ISLANDS FIJI FINLAND FRANCE FRENCH GUIANA FRE...

Page 944: ...D GP GU GT GG GN GW GY HAITI HEARD ISLAND AND MCDONALD ISLANDS HOLY SEE VATICAN CITY STATE HONDURAS HONG KONG HUNGARY HT HM VA HN HK HU ICELAND INDIA INDONESIA IRAN ISLAMIC REPUBLIC OF IRAQ IRELAND ISLE OF MAN ISRAEL ITALY IS IN ID IR IQ IE IM IL IT JAMAICA JAPAN JERSEY JORDAN JM JP JE JO KAZAKHSTAN KENYA KIRIBATI KOREA DEMOCRATIC PEOPLE S REPUBLIC OF KOREA REPUBLIC OF KUWAIT KYRGYZSTAN KZ KE KI K...

Page 945: ...S LR LY LI LT LU MACAO MACEDONIA THE FORMER YUGOSLAV REPUBLIC OF MADAGASCAR MALAWI MALAYSIA MALDIVES MALI MALTA MARSHALL ISLANDS MARTINIQUE MAURITANIA MAURITIUS MAYOTTE MEXICO MICRONESIA FEDERATED STATES OF MOLDOVA REPUBLIC OF MONACO MONGOLIA MONTENEGRO MONTSERRAT MOROCCO MOZAMBIQUE MYANMAR MO MK MG MW MY MV ML MT MH MQ MR MU YT MX FM MD MC MN ME MS MA MZ MM COUNTRY COUNTRY CODE ...

Page 946: ...ER NIGERIA NIUE NORFOLK ISLAND NORTHERN MARIANA ISLANDS NORWAY NA NR NP NL AN NC NZ NI NE NG NU NF MP NO OMAN OM PAKISTAN PALAU PALESTINIAN TERRITORY OCCUPIED PANAMA PAPUA NEW GUINEA PARAGUAY PERU PHILIPPINES PITCAIRN POLAND PORTUGAL PUERTO RICO PK PW PS PA PG PY PE PH PN PL PT PR QATAR QA RÉUNION ROMANIA RUSSIAN FEDERATION RWANDA RE RO RU RW COUNTRY COUNTRY CODE ...

Page 947: ...A SOUTH AFRICA SOUTH GEORGIA AND THE SOUTH SANDWICH ISLANDS SPAIN SRI LANKA SUDAN SURINAME SVALBARD AND JAN MAYEN SWAZILAND SWEDEN SWITZERLAND SYRIAN ARAB REPUBLIC SH KN LC PM VC WS SM ST SA SN RS SC SL SG SK SI SB SO ZA GS ES LK SD SR SJ SZ SE CH SY TAIWAN PROVINCE OF CHINA TAJIKISTAN TANZANIA UNITED REPUBLIC OF THAILAND TIMOR LESTE TOGO TOKELAU TONGA TRINIDAD AND TOBAGO TUNISIA TURKEY TURKMENIST...

Page 948: ...ES UNITED STATES MINOR OUTLYING ISLANDS URUGUAY UZBEKISTAN UG TA AE GB US TM UY UZ VANUATU Vatican City State VENEZUELA VIET NAM VIRGIN ISLANDS BRITISH VIRGIN ISLANDS U S VU see HOLY SEE VE VN VG VI WALLIS AND FUTUNA WESTERN SAHARA WF EH YEMEN YE Zaire ZAMBIA ZIMBABWE see CONGO THE DEMOCRATIC REPUBLIC OF THE ZM ZW COUNTRY COUNTRY CODE ...

Page 949: ...olean DEFAULT VALUE 1 enabled RANGE 0 disabled 1 enabled EXAMPLE suppress dtmf playback 0 PARAMETER display dtmf digits CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Enables and disables the display of DTMF digits when dialing on the IP phone DTMF is the signal sent from the phone to the network that you generate when you press the phone s touch keys This is also known as touchtone...

Page 950: ...ON FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Determines whether the IP phone or the server is responsible for notifying the recipient that an Intercom call is being placed FORMAT Integer DEFAULT VALUE 3 Off RANGE 1 Phone Side 2 Server Side 3 Off EXAMPLE sip intercom type 1 PARAMETER sip intercom prefix code CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION The prefix to add to th...

Page 951: ...ETER sip allow auto answer CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Enables or disables the IP phone to allow automatic answering for an Intercom call If auto answer is enabled on the IP phone the phone plays a tone to alert the user before answering the intercom call If auto answer is disabled the phone treats the incoming intercom call as a normal call FORMAT Boolean DEFAULT...

Page 952: ...one is on an active call as well as how the phone handles multicast paging calls while the phone is in a dialing state When you enable this parameter an incoming intercom call takes precedence over any active call by placing the active call on hold and automatically answering the intercom call Also when enabled for multicast pages during a dialing state the phone will automatically switch focus to...

Page 953: ...th several codecs defined in the media stream with an SDP Answer containing all the codecs present in the Offer as per RFC 3264 or with an SDP Answer containing just one preferred codec as per 3GPP TS 24 229 FORMAT Boolean DEFAULT VALUE 0 Disabled RANGE 0 1 0 Disabled RFC 3264 1 Enabled 3GPP TS 24 229 EXAMPLE sip single codec reply in sdp 1 PARAMETER paging group listening CONFIGURATION FILES star...

Page 954: ...ing if you want to make or receive all calls using a handset or headset For the 6865i 6867i 6869i and 6873i calls can be switched from the handset to headset by pressing the handsfree button on the phone To switch from the headset to the handset lift the handset 2 Speaker Headset Incoming calls are sent to the handsfree speakerphone first when the handsfree button is pressed By pressing the handsf...

Page 955: ...cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Specifies the minimum ringer volume level FORMAT Integer DEFAULT VALUE 0 RANGE 0 9 EXAMPLE ringer volume minimum 1 PARAMETER far end disconnect timer CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Specifies whether or not the phone displays an indication of a terminated call If set to 0 this feature is disabled and the phone does not display the Call Terminat...

Page 956: ...ringing BLF will not pick up the call immediately but will instead display the remote caller s information first allowing the user to review who is calling When using the MiCloud Telepo platform the parameter must be defined as 3 In this mode pressing a BLF key when the monitored extension is ringing will cause the phone use the dialog information sent in the NOTIFY message to form the INVITE requ...

Page 957: ...LF List softkey the phone prepends the 98 value to the designated extension of the BLF or BLF List softkey when dialing out Notes The default method for the phone to use is Directed Call Pickup over BLF if the server provides applicable information If the Directed Call Pickup over BLF information is missing in the messages to the server the Directed Call Pickup by Prefix method is used if a value ...

Page 958: ...E acd auto available 1 PARAMETER acd auto available timer CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Specifies the length of time in seconds before the IP phone status switches back to available FORMAT Integer DEFAULT VALUE 60 seconds RANGE 0 to 120 seconds EXAMPLE acd auto available timer 60 PARAMETER redial disabled CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION...

Page 959: ...N FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Enables or disables the Xfer key on the IP phone If this parameter is set to 0 the key is active and can be pressed by the user If this parameter is set to 1 pressing the Xfer key is ignored FORMAT Boolean DEFAULT VALUE 0 false RANGE 0 false 1 true EXAMPLE call transfer disabled 1 PARAMETER map redial key to CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cf...

Page 960: ... map conf key to 5551267 PARAMETER map redial as dtmf CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Allows the phone to send the stored number as DTMF using the phone configured DTMF method when the Redial key is pressed FORMAT Boolean DEFAULT VALUE 0 RANGE 0 1 0 Disabled 1 Enabled EXAMPLE map redial as dtmf 1 PARAMETER map conf as dtmf CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac...

Page 961: ...Asterisk 70 70 asterisk Sylantro 98 99 sylantro BroadWorks 68 88 broadworks ININ PBX callpark pickup inin Leave value fields blank to disable the park and pickup feature For BroadSoft BroadWorks the following syntax is applicable park_code park_dial_code pickup_code pickup_dial_code broadworks Note Pauses can be introduced in the park and pick up dial codes by adding commas Each comma amounts to a...

Page 962: ...nd pickup feature FORMAT Alphanumeric characters DEFAULT VALUE Blank RANGE See applicable values in table above EXAMPLE sprecode 68 PARAMETER pickupsprecode CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Specifies the code to enter before entering the extension for where you want to pickup a parked call The applicable value is dependent on the type of server in the network Server Pi...

Page 963: ...ule consists of 3 pages of 28 softkeys for a total of 84 You can have up to 3 expansion modules on an IP phone totalling 252 softkeys Valid for 6865i 6867i 6869i and 6873i phones Note 9 keypad keys are available to be configured as press and hold speeddials on all IP phone models IP PHONE MODEL SOFTKEYS EXPANSION MODULE KEYS PROGRAMMABLE KEYS LINES AVAILABLE 6863i N A 3 2 6865i 16 to 48 Model M680...

Page 964: ... hold and then press the Speeddial key dnd Indicates key is configured for do not disturb on the phone This option is Do Not Disturb in the Mitel Web UI You must also set the DND key mode see DND Key Mode on page 5 95 and DND Key Mode Settings on page A 185 for details xml Indicates the key is configured to accept an XML application for accessing customized XML services You can also specify an XML...

Page 965: ...for Group Paging on the phone Pressing this key automatically sends a Real Time Transport Protocol RTP stream to pre configured multicast address es without involving SIP signaling hotdesklogin Indicates the key is configured to be used as a login key when utilizing the Visitor Desk Phone hotdesk feature discreetringing Indicates the key is configured to toggle Discreet Ringing on off callhistory ...

Page 966: ...eb UI xml flash spre park pickup lcr callforward speeddialxfer speeddialconf directory filter callers Callers List in Mitel Web UI redial conf xfer icom phonelock paging hotdesklogin discreetringing callhistory callcenter contacts empty EXAMPLE softkey1 type directory softkey2 type speeddial softkey3 type lcr softkey4 type xml ...

Page 967: ... the following softkey types only speeddial xml flash spre park pickup speeddialxfer speeddialconf directory filter callers redial conf xfer icom paging hotdesklogin callhistory callcenter contacts Note If the softkeyN type parameter is set to flash and no label value is entered for the softkeyN label parameter the label of Flash is used FORMAT Text DEFAULT VALUE N A RANGE Varies EXAMPLE softkey1 ...

Page 968: ...ue is the phone number extension or prefix number to enter for the softkey For blf the value is the extension you want to monitor For spre the value is dependent on services offered by server For park and pickup valid values see Chapter 5 the section Park Pickup Call Server Configuration Values on page 5 226 For xml you can specify a URI to use for this XML softkey The variables you can use with t...

Page 969: ...eddial prefix PARAMETER softkeyN line CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION This is the line associated with the softkey you are configuring The number of applicable lines available is dependent on the specific IP phone model The softkeyN line parameter can be set for the following softkey types only speeddial list lcr speeddialxfer speeddialconf redial filter FORMAT Intege...

Page 970: ...y type of empty does not display on the idle screen at all FORMAT Text DEFAULT VALUE For softkey type none flash phonelock paging All states disabled For softkey types dnd speeddial xml lcr callforward speeddialxfer speeddialconf directory filter callers redial conf xfer icom empty idle connected incoming outgoing busy For softkey type flash All states disabled For softkey type park spre connected...

Page 971: ...to both top and bottom softkeys FORMAT Integer DEFAULT VALUE 1 Enabled RANGE 0 1 0 Disabled 1 Enabled EXAMPLE collapsed softkey screen 0 PARAMETER collapsed softkey screen offset top CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Defines the offset for locking or collapsing the top softkeys If the collapsed softkey screen parameter is enabled the phone will lock the respective top s...

Page 972: ... the phone will collapse the respective bottom softkeys from bottom softkey 1 to the value defined and lock the rest of the bottom softkeys FORMAT Integer DEFAULT VALUE 0 RANGE 1 17 6867i 1 23 6869i 6873i EXAMPLES collapsed softkey screen offset bottom 2 Note Applicable to the 6867i 6869i and 6873i IP Phone only PARAMETER collapsed context user softkey screen CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model ...

Page 973: ...one By default when a total of six top softkeys and four bottom softkeys are configured for the 6867i IP phone the screen displays five top softkeys four bottom softkeys and More options to access the remaining softkeys When this parameter is enabled the More softkeys are removed allowing the phones to display all configured top and bottom softkeys on one screen The same behavior is applied to the...

Page 974: ...gits through the active voice path To dial out you have to first put the active call on hold and then press the Speeddial key dnd Indicates key is configured for do not disturb on the phone This option is Do Not Disturb in the Mitel Web UI You must also set the DND key mode see DND Key Mode on page 5 95 and DND Key Mode Settings on page A 185 for details blf Indicates key is configured for Busy La...

Page 975: ... configured to be used as a Speeddial key for a voicemail account directory Indicates the key is configured to access the Directory List filter Indicates the key is configured to activate deactivate Executive Call Filtering callers Indicates the key is configured to access the Received Callers List redial Indicates the key is configured to access the Outgoing Redial List conf Indicates the key is ...

Page 976: ...AT Text DEFAULT VALUE N A RANGE none line speeddial dnd Do Not Disturb in the Mitel Web UI blf list BLF List in the Mitel Web UI acd Auto Call Distribution in the Mitel Web UI xml flash spre park pickup lcr callforward blfxfer speeddialxfer speeddialconf speeddialmwi directory filter callers Callers List in Mitel Web UI redial conf xfer icom services phonelock paging save delete hotdesklogin discr...

Page 977: ...ble key you then enter the rest of the number from the keypad on the phone line blf spre xml park pickup blfxfer speeddialxfer speeddialconf speeddialmwi redial filter icom paging callcenter Notes For speeddial the value is the phone number extension or prefix number to enter for the softkey For line the value is optional for example L4 For blf the value is the extension you want to monitor For li...

Page 978: ...USERNAME INCOMINGNAME CALLDURATION CALLDIRECTION For icom the value is the predefined intercom call number For paging the value is the ip and port the port range is from 1 to 65535 For callcenter the value for the key must be identical to the call center ID value configured for the specific user in the BroadSoft BroadWorks call manager software FORMAT String DEFAULT VALUE N A RANGE N A EXAMPLE prg...

Page 979: ...c cfg DESCRIPTION This is the line associated with the programmable key you are configuring The prgkeyN line parameter can be set for the following softkey types only speeddial blf list acd lcr blfxfer speeddialxfer speeddialconf speeddialmwi redial filter FORMAT Integer DEFAULT VALUE 1 RANGE 1 2 6863i 1 24 6865i EXAMPLE prgkey3 line 1 prgkey4 line 5 ...

Page 980: ... Settings on page A 185 for details blf Indicates key is configured for Busy Lamp Field BLF use User can dial out on a BLF configured key You can configure a maximum of 50 BLFs shared between the phone and any attached expansion modules list Indicates key is configured for BLF List use This option is BLF List in the Mitel Web UI User can dial out on a BLF List configured key You can also use the B...

Page 981: ...ndicates the key is configured to access the Outgoing Redial List conf Indicates the key is configured as a Conference key xfer Indicates the key is configured as a Transfer key for transferring calls icom Indicates the key is configured to be used as the Intercom key services Indicates the key is configured to be used as the Services key phonelock Indicates the key is configured to be used to loc...

Page 982: ...ed in order from softkey1 to softkey20 after any hardcoded keys have been added If a particular softkey is not defined it is ignored FORMAT Text DEFAULT VALUE none RANGE none line speeddial dnd blf list BLF List in the Mitel Web UI acd Auto Call Distribution in the Mitel Web UI xml flash spre callforward park pickup blfxfer speeddialxfer speeddialconf speeddialmwi lcr directory filter callers Call...

Page 983: ...ftkey Programmable Key Keypad Key Expansion Module Key Hard Key Parameters A 241 contacts favorite empty EXAMPLE topsoftkey1 type line topsoftkey2 type speeddial topsoftkey3 type lcr topsoftkey4 type xml ...

Page 984: ... types only line speeddial blf acd xml flash spre park pickup blfxfer speeddialxfer speeddialconf speeddialmwi directory filter callers redial conf xfer icom services paging hotdesklogin callhistory callcenter contacts Note If the topsoftkeyN type parameter is set to flash and no label value is entered for the topsoftkeyN label parameter the label of Flash is used FORMAT Text DEFAULT VALUE N A RAN...

Page 985: ... you then enter the rest of the number from the keypad on the phone line blf spre xml park pickup blfxfer speeddialxfer speeddialconf speeddialmwi redial paging icom filter callcenter Notes For speeddial the value is the phone number extension or prefix number to enter for the softkey For line the value is optional for example L4 For blf the value is the extension you want to monitor For list the ...

Page 986: ...TION For icom the value is the predefined intercom call number For paging the value is the ip and port the port range is from 1 to 65535 For callcenter the value for the key must be identical to the call center ID value configured for the specific user in the BroadSoft BroadWorks call manager software FORMAT String DEFAULT VALUE N A RANGE N A EXAMPLE topsoftkey1 value 9 topsoftkey2 value 411 topso...

Page 987: ... associated with the softkey you are configuring The number of applicable lines available is dependent on the specific IP phone model The topsoftkeyN line parameter can be set for the following softkey types only speeddial blf list acd lcr blfxfer speeddialxfer speeddialconf speeddialmwi redial filter FORMAT Integer DEFAULT VALUE 1 RANGE 1 24 EXAMPLE topsoftkey1 line 1 topsoftkey2 line 5 ...

Page 988: ...hat is dialed out when you press and hold the corresponding keypad key FORMAT Integer DEFAULT VALUE N A RANGE N A EXAMPLE pnhkeypad7 value 5557605123 PARAMETER pnhkeypadN line where N corresponds to the keypad keys 1 9 CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION The line associated with the press and hold speeddial number configured on the keypad key FORMAT Integer DEFAULT VALUE ...

Page 989: ... configure a maximum of 50 BLFs shared between the phone and any attached expansion modules list Indicates key is configured for BLF List use This option is BLF List in the Mitel Web UI User can dial out on a BLF List configured key You can also use the BLF List URI parameter to specify a URI for the phone to access for the BLF List acd for Sylantro BroadWorks servers only Indicates the key is con...

Page 990: ... as a Conference key xfer Indicates the key is configured as a Transfer key for transferring calls icom Indicates the key is configured to be used as the Intercom key services Indicates the key is set to be used as the Services key phonelock Indicates the key is set to be used to lock unlock the phone paging Indicates the key is set for Group Paging on the phone Pressing this key automatically sen...

Page 991: ...he Mitel Web UI xml flash spre park pickup lcr callforward blfxfer speeddialxfer speeddialconf speeddialmwi directory filter callers Callers List in Mitel Web UI redial conf xfer icom services phonelock paging save delete hotdesklogin discreetringing callhistory callcenter empty Example expmod1 key1 type line expmod1 key2 type speeddial expmod1 key3 type blf expmod1 key4 type list ...

Page 992: ... softkey types only line speeddial blf acd xml flash spre park pickup blfxfer speeddialxfer speeddialconf speeddialmwi directory filter callers redial conf xfer icom services paging hotdesklogin callhistory callcenter Note If the expmodXkeyN type parameter is set to flash and no label value is entered for the expmodXkeyN label parameter the label of Flash is used FORMAT Text DEFAULT VALUE N A RANG...

Page 993: ...ess the Speeddial key you then enter the rest of the number from the keypad on the phone line blf spre xml park pickup blfxfer speeddialxfer speeddialconf speeddialmwi redial filter icom paging callcenter Notes For speeddial the value is the phone number extension or prefix number to enter for the softkey For line the value is optional for example L4 For blf the value is the extension you want to ...

Page 994: ...NGNAME CALLDURATION CALLDIRECTION For icom the value is the predefined intercom call number For paging the value is the ip and port the port range is from 1 to 65535 For callcenter the value for the key must be identical to the call center ID value configured for the specific user in the BroadSoft BroadWorks call manager software FORMAT String DEFAULT VALUE N A RANGE N A EXAMPLE expmod1 key1 value...

Page 995: ...ith the softkey you are configuring on the Expansion Module The number of applicable lines available is dependent on the specific IP phone model The expmodX keyN line parameter can be set for the following softkey types only speeddial blf list acd lcr blfxfer speeddialxfer speeddialconf speeddialmwi redial filter FORMAT Integer DEFAULT VALUE 1 RANGE 1 24 EXAMPLE expmod1 key1 line 1 expmod1 key2 li...

Page 996: ...s configured for Auto Call Distribution called Auto Call Distribution in the Mitel Web UI The ACD feature allows the Sylantro BroadWorks server to distribute calls from a queue to registered IP phone users agents xml Indicates the key is configured to accept an XML application for accessing customized XML services You can also specify an XML softkey URL for this option flash Indicates the key is s...

Page 997: ...al List conf Indicates the key is configured as a Conference key xfer Indicates the key is configured as a Transfer key for transferring calls icom Indicates the key is set to be used as the Intercom key phonelock Indicates the key is set to be used to lock unlock the phone paging Indicates the key is set for Group Paging on the phone Pressing this key automatically sends a Real Time Transport Pro...

Page 998: ...l Web UI acd Auto call distribution in the Mitel Web UI xml flash spre park pickup lcr callforward blfxfer speeddialxfer speeddialconf speeddialmwi directory filter callers Callers List in Mitel Web UI redial conf xfer icom services phonelock paging hotdesklogin discreetringing callhistory callcenter EXAMPLE hardkey1 type speeddial ...

Page 999: ...he Speeddial key you then enter the rest of the number from the keypad on the phone line blf spre xml park pickup blfxfer speeddialxfer speeddialconf speeddialmwi redial filter paging callcenter Notes For speeddial the value is the phone number extension or prefix number to enter for the key For line the value is optional for example L4 For blf the value is the extension you want to monitor For sp...

Page 1000: ...ring DEFAULT VALUE N A RANGE N A EXAMPLE hardkey1 value 123456 example of a speeddial prefix PARAMETER hardkeyN line CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION The line associated with the hard key you are configuring The hardkeyN line parameter can be set for the following key types only speeddial blf list acd lcr blfxfer speeddialxfer speeddialconf speeddialmwi redial filter F...

Page 1001: ...the key Type list displays ALL of the key types by default in the Mitel Web UI Notes Any key types configured that do not apply to the phone s environment are ignored The SAVE and DELETE keys appear by default as Keys 5 and 6 on the 6865i unless specifically changed by your Administrator An Administrator must use the English value when configuring the key types in the configuration files Any key t...

Page 1002: ...ve EXAMPLE softkey selection list blf speeddial line xml none filter line callers speeddial redial dnd conf blf xfer list icom acd services xml phonelock flash paging spre save park delete pickup hotdesklogin lcr discreetringing callforward callhistory blfxfer mystatus speeddialxfer contacts speeddialconf favorite speeddialmwi empty directory ...

Page 1003: ...eyN label softkeyN value softkeyN line softkeyN states FORMAT Boolean DEFAULT VALUE 0 disable RANGE 0 disable 1 enable EXAMPLE softkey1 locked 1 PARAMETER topsoftkeyN locked CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Locks the specified top softkey on the 6867i 6869i or 6873i IP phone When enabled the phone locks the key with the provisioned local settings and prevents users fro...

Page 1004: ... prgkeyN line FORMAT Boolean DEFAULT VALUE 0 disable RANGE 0 disable 1 enable EXAMPLE prgkey1 locked 1 PARAMETER expmodX keyN locked CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Locks the specified softkey on the Expansion Module attached to the IP phone When enabled the phone locks the key with the provisioned local settings and prevents users from changing or configuring the key...

Page 1005: ...dN parameters i e pnhkeypadN value and pnhkeypadN line FORMAT Integer DEFAULT VALUE 0 Disabled RANGE 0 Disabled 1 Enabled EXAMPLE pnhkeypad1 locked 1 PARAMETER hardkeyN locked CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Locks the specified hard key on the IP phones When enabled the phone locks the key with the provisioned local settings and prevents users from changing or configu...

Page 1006: ...n without assigning another Save key removes the ability to save items on the IP phone FORMAT Boolean DEFAULT VALUE 1 lock RANGE 0 unlock 1 lock EXAMPLE prgkey5 locked 0 PARAMETER prgkey6 locked CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Allows you to lock or unlock the Delete key on the 6865i IP Phone When the Delete key is unlocked a User can change the function of the key usi...

Page 1007: ...I and the SAVE TO key If this parameter is set to disabled No it blocks the user from using any of the features on the phone to create or edit a Speeddial key FORMAT Boolean DEFAULT VALUE 1 Enabled RANGE 0 Disabled 1 Enabled EXAMPLE speeddial edit 0 Note Applicable to the 6865i 6867i 6869i and 6873i IP Phones only PARAMETER list uri CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Spe...

Page 1008: ...r hold slow flashing state 3 switch page if monitored extension transitions to either ringing or hold state OR from idle off state to in call solid state EXAMPLE blf activity page switch 1 Note Applicable to the 6867i 6869i and 6873i IP Phones only PARAMETER blf display label to max CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Specifies how the phone should display BLF and BLF Lis...

Page 1009: ...enabled then the series of question marks will be hidden and nothing will be shown on the screen beside the affected softkeys FORMAT Boolean DEFAULT VALUE 0 RANGE 0 1 0 disabled 1 enabled EXAMPLE keys noname hidden 1 PARAMETER keys noname symbol CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION By default when softkeys are configured as BLF List keys on the phone but there are not enou...

Page 1010: ...as 1 upon a BLF or BLF List key press the active call will be placed on hold and the phone will place a call to the BLF or BLF List number using the next available line If defined as 2 upon a BLF or BLF Xfer key press an HTTP GET will be triggered on the URI defined in the action uri blf parameter Note If defined as 2 a valid URI must be defined for the action uri blf parameter If a valid URI is n...

Page 1011: ... DESCRIPTION Enables or disables the playing of a short ring splash when there is an incoming call on a BLF monitored extension FORMAT Integer DEFAULT VALUE 0 Disabled RANGE 0 2 0 Disabled 1 Enabled for idle state only 2 Enabled for idle state and active call state Note Playing a BLF ring splash while in an active call state i e defining the parameter as 2 is only available to the 6865i 6867i 6869...

Page 1012: ...ed after a delay of x seconds the ring signal that is the same as the current BLF ring splash is played at a lower level use the ring splash delay parameter to define the delay 7 The behavior is determined by the global parameter play a ring splash If play a ring splash is defined as 0 then the feature is disabled If play a ring splash is defined as 1 then the behavior is the same as Normal If pla...

Page 1013: ...ed if a custom ring tone is selected FORMAT Integer DEFAULT VALUE N A RANGE 0 Silence 1 Normal 2 Normal delayed 3 Periodic 4 Periodic delayed 5 Low volume 6 Low volume delayed 7 The behavior is determined by the global parameter play a ring splash If play a ring splash is defined as 0 then the feature is disabled If play a ring splash is defined as 1 then the behavior is the same as Normal If play...

Page 1014: ...ed after a delay of x seconds the ring signal that is the same as the current BLF ring splash is played at a lower level use the ring splash delay parameter to define the delay 7 The behavior is determined by the global parameter play a ring splash If play a ring splash is defined as 0 then the feature is disabled If play a ring splash is defined as 1 then the behavior is the same as Normal If pla...

Page 1015: ...yed if a custom ring tone is selected FORMAT Integer DEFAULT VALUE N A RANGE 0 Silence 1 Normal 2 Normal delayed 3 Periodic 4 Periodic delayed 5 Low volume 6 Low volume delayed 7 The behavior is determined by the global parameter play a ring splash If play a ring splash is defined as 0 then the feature is disabled If play a ring splash is defined as 1 then the behavior is the same as Normal If pla...

Page 1016: ...ayed after a delay of x seconds the ring signal that is the same as the current BLF ring splash is played at a lower level use the ring splash delay parameter to define the delay 7 The behavior is determined by the global parameter play a ring splash If play a ring splash is defined as 0 then the feature is disabled If play a ring splash is defined as 1 then the behavior is the same as Normal If p...

Page 1017: ... if a custom ring tone is selected FORMAT Integer DEFAULT VALUE N A RANGE 0 Silence 1 Normal 2 Normal delayed 3 Periodic 4 Periodic delayed 5 Low volume 6 Low volume delayed 7 The behavior is determined by the global parameter play a ring splash If play a ring splash is defined as 0 then the feature is disabled If play a ring splash is defined as 1 then the behavior is the same as Normal If play a...

Page 1018: ...fter a delay of x seconds the ring signal that is the same as the current BLF ring splash is played at a lower level use the ring splash delay parameter to define the delay 7 The behavior is determined by the global parameter play a ring splash If play a ring splash is defined as 0 then the feature is disabled If play a ring splash is defined as 1 then the behavior is the same as Normal If play a ...

Page 1019: ... if a custom ring tone is selected FORMAT Integer DEFAULT VALUE N A RANGE 0 Silence 1 Normal 2 Normal delayed 3 Periodic 4 Periodic delayed 5 Low volume 6 Low volume delayed 7 The behavior is determined by the global parameter play a ring splash If play a ring splash is defined as 0 then the feature is disabled If play a ring splash is defined as 1 then the behavior is the same as Normal If play a...

Page 1020: ... Low volume delayed after a delay of x seconds the ring signal that is the same as the current BLF ring splash is played at a lower level use the ring splash delay parameter to define the delay 7 The behavior is determined by the global parameter play a ring splash If play a ring splash is defined as 0 then the feature is disabled If play a ring splash is defined as 1 then the behavior is the same...

Page 1021: ...layed if a custom ring tone is selected DEFAULT VALUE Integer RANGE N A EXAMPLE 0 Silence 1 Normal 2 Normal delayed 3 Periodic 4 Periodic delayed 5 Low volume 6 Low volume delayed 7 The behavior is determined by the global parameter play a ring splash If play a ring splash is defined as 0 then the feature is disabled If play a ring splash is defined as 1 then the behavior is the same as Normal If ...

Page 1022: ...up cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Indicates the volume of the ring splash from 1 loudest to 9 softest when the keyN ring splash parameter is set to a low volume alerting pattern FORMAT Numeric DEFAULT VALUE 5 RANGE 1 9 EXAMPLE ring splash volume 2 PARAMETER ring splash frequency CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Indicates the frequency interval in seconds when the ke...

Page 1023: ... Boolean DEFAULT VALUE 0 Disabled RANGE 0 1 0 Disabled 1 Enabled EXAMPLE discreet ringing 1 Note Applicable to the 6867i 6869i and 6873i IP Phones only PARAMETER drop context softkey CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Allows administrators the ability to manually configure whether or not the Drop softkey is displayed on screen If the parameter is disabled the Drop softke...

Page 1024: ...ule 1 expmod1page1left Expansion Module 1 Page 1 left column expmod1page2left Expansion Module 1 Page 2 left column expmod1page3left Expansion Module 1 Page 3 left column Expansion Module 2 expmod2page1left Expansion Module 2 Page 1 left column expmod2page2left Expansion Module 2 Page 2 left column expmod2page3left Expansion Module 2 Page 3 left column Expansion Module 3 expmod3page1left Expansion...

Page 1025: ...olumn expmod1page2right Expansion Module 1 Page 2 right column expmod1page3right Expansion Module 1 Page 3 right column Expansion Module 2 expmod2page1right Expansion Module 2 Page 1 right column expmod2page2right Expansion Module 2 Page 2 right column expmod2page3right Expansion Module 2 Page 3 right column Expansion Module 3 expmod3page1right Expansion Module 3 Page 1 right column expmod3page2ri...

Page 1026: ... compatibility with SIP phone user agents FORMAT Boolean DEFAULT VALUE 0 RANGE 0 1 0 Disabled 1 Enabled EXAMPLE csta 1 PARAMETER csta proxy CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION The IP address or FQDN of the CSTA proxy server The CSTA proxy a server that initiates and forwards requests generated by the SIP phone to the targeted user using CSTA XML messages FORMAT IP address...

Page 1027: ...ILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Forces the phone to use the Blind Transfer method available in software prior to release 1 4 This method sends the CANCEL message after the REFER message when blind transferring a call FORMAT Boolean DEFAULT VALUE 0 disabled RANGE 0 disabled 1 enabled EXAMPLE sip cancel after blind transfer 1 PARAMETER sip refer to with replaces CONFIGURATION FILES st...

Page 1028: ...fer the call to the user name or if there is no contact header found or the contact header has no user name put the remote address of the original INVITE to the Refer To header FORMAT Boolean DEFAULT VALUE 0 disabled RANGE 0 disabled 1 enabled EXAMPLE sip refer to with replaces 1 PARAMETER sip update callerid CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Enables or disables the upd...

Page 1029: ...arameter is set to 0 press 1 and keys during boot up when the logo displays to force the web recovery mode FORMAT Boolean DEFAULT VALUE 0 false RANGE 0 false 1 true EXAMPLE force web recovery mode disabled 1 PARAMETER max boot count CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Specifies the number of faulty boots that occur before the phone is forced into Web recovery mode FORMAT ...

Page 1030: ...ER sip whitelist CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION This parameter enables disables the whitelist proxy feature as follows Set to 0 to disable the feature Set to 1 to enable the feature When this feature is enabled an IP phone accepts call requests from a trusted proxy server only The IP phone rejects any call requests from an untrusted proxy server FORMAT Boolean DEFAUL...

Page 1031: ... cfg DESCRIPTION Specifies an Conf script for the phone to use When this parameter is set pressing the Conf key GETs the specified URI from the server to use in performing the conference action FORMAT String DEFAULT VALUE empty RANGE Any valid URI EXAMPLE conf script http bluevelvet ana mitel com conf php PARAMETER icom script CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Specifies...

Page 1032: ...FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Specifies an Options script for the phone to use When this parameter is set pressing the Options Key GETs the specified URI from the server Note PressingandholdingtheOptionskeydisplaysthelocalOptions Menu on the phone FORMAT String DEFAULT VALUE empty RANGE Any valid URI EXAMPLE options script http fargo ana mitel com options xml PARAMETER auto offho...

Page 1033: ...e allows XML POSTs to the phone as well as XML GETs to from the phone by pressing the XML keys softkeys programmable keys extension module keys FORMAT Integer DEFAULT VALUE 0 RANGE 0 to 2 EXAMPLE xml lock override 1 PARAMETER sip symmetric udp signaling CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Allows you to enable or disable the phone to use port 5060 to send SIP UDP messages ...

Page 1034: ...DEFAULT VALUE 1 enabled RANGE 0 disabled 1 enabled EXAMPLE sips symmetric tls signaling 0 PARAMETER sip user agent CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Allows you to enable or disable the addition of the User Agent and Server SIP headers in the SIP stack The value of 0 prevents the UserAgent and Server SIP header from being added to the SIP stack The value of 1 allows thes...

Page 1035: ...el com then If the NAPTR record is returned empty the phone will use the default value _sip _udp test mitel com for the SRV lookup If the NAPTR record is returned test mitel com SIP D2U _sip _udp abc mitel com the phone will use _sip _udp abc mitel com for the SRV lookup If the NAPTR record is returned test mitel com SIP D2T _sip _tcp test mitel com where the service type TCP mismatches the phone ...

Page 1036: ... to the phone FORMAT Boolean DEFAULT VALUE 0 disabled RANGE 0 disabled 1 enabled EXAMPLE sip accept out of order requests 1 PARAMETER sip notify opt headers CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Enables and disables whether or not the Allow and Allow Events optional headers are included in the SIP NOTIFY messages sent from the phone to the server FORMAT Boolean DEFAULT VALU...

Page 1037: ... The phone will use the URI information contained in the tel URI field if available and ignore the information contained in the sip URI field if available 4 tel URI preferred The phone will use the URI information contained in the tel URI field If the tel URI field is unavailable the phone will use the URI information contained in the sip URI field Note The default value i e 1 will be enforced if ...

Page 1038: ...ip compact headers 1 PARAMETER sip enforce require hdr CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Enables and disables the rejection of an INV or BYE with a 420 Bad Extension if the INV or BYE contains an unsupported value in the REQUIRE header FORMAT Integer DEFAULT VALUE 0 RANGE 0 disable 1 enable EXAMPLE sip enforce require hdr 1 PARAMETER config encryption key CONFIGURATION ...

Page 1039: ...acters EXAMPLE sip dns host file hostfile txt PARAMETER sip dns srvX name Note The X indicate a record number with values from 1 to 4 CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION The fully qualified URI of the DNS SRV record FORMAT Fully qualified URI including service prefix DEFAULT VALUE N A RANGE N A EXAMPLE sip dns srv1 name _sip _udp example com PARAMETER sip dns srvX priorit...

Page 1040: ...s srvX weight parameter must be configured but the phones will support this feature in a future release FORMAT Integer DEFAULT VALUE 0 RANGE 0 to 65535 EXAMPLE sip dns srv1 weight 60 PARAMETER sip dns srvX port Note The X indicate a server number with values from 1 to 4 CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION The port number on the target host FORMAT Integer DEFAULT VALUE 0 R...

Page 1041: ...ve responses FORMAT Integer DEFAULT VALUE 1 5 minutes RANGE 0 2147483647 seconds 0 Disabled EXAMPLE sip dns cache negative max ttl 3600 PARAMETER sip dns cache positive max ttl CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Specifies the DNS maximum cache TTL for positive responses FORMAT Integer DEFAULT VALUE 1 5 minutes RANGE 0 2147483647 seconds 0 Disabled EXAMPLE sip dns cache p...

Page 1042: ...By default this parameter is set to 1 invalid whereby SIP services use the same transport protocol as defined in the sip transport protocol parameter FORMAT Numeric DEFAULT VALUE 1 Invalid RANGE 1 Invalid 0 TCP UDP 1 UDP 2 TCP EXAMPLE sip services transport protocol 1 PARAMETER sip services port CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Specifies the port used for SIP services ...

Page 1043: ...summary reports transport protocol 2 Note Applicable to the 6863i and 6865i IP Phones only PARAMETER username alphanumeric input order CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION When enabled this parameter changes the default behavior of the keypad input order during username prompts from uppercase letters digit lowercase letters to digit uppercase letters lowercase letters For ...

Page 1044: ...ARAMETER recorder addressN N is a number from 1 to 6 CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Specifies a trusted IP address maximum of six corresponding to the voice recording system The IP phone will check and respond to SIP messages coming from these IP addresses on the port defined by the sip services port parameter Note If all of the recorder addressN parameters are left ...

Page 1045: ... left undefined no authentication checks will be performed FORMAT IP Address DEFAULT VALUE N A RANGE N A EXAMPLE recording destination1 192 168 1 30 recording destination2 192 168 1 31 recording destination3 192 168 1 32 recording destination4 192 168 1 33 recording destination5 192 168 1 34 recording destination6 192 168 1 35 PARAMETER recording periodic beep CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg mac c...

Page 1046: ...ne sends the configured BroadWorks Xsi user name sip xsi user name parameter along with the SIP authentication user name sip auth name parameter and password sip password parameter to authenticate the Xsi interface This allows users to authenticate without having to manually enter their login credentials FORMAT Boolean DEFAULT VALUE 0 RANGE 0 1 0 Disabled 1 Enabled EXAMPLE xsi allow sip authentica...

Page 1047: ...he value specified in the sip lineN auth name parameter FORMAT sip lineN auth name server DEFAULT VALUE N A RANGE N A EXAMPLE sip line1 xsi user name 5553456 xsi broadworks net sip line2 xsi user name 5551234 xsi broadworks net PARAMETER xsi user name CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Specifies the user name used for normal authentication not SIP authentication of the X...

Page 1048: ...ry feature and not applicable to user related Xsi features such as Speed Dial 8 Basic Call Logs and Personal Directory Contacts Credentials for the user related Xsi features require encryption and therefore must be entered through the phone s Options List Credentials menu FORMAT String DEFAULT VALUE N A RANGE N A EXAMPLES xsi ip xsp xsi broadworks net or xsi ip johndoe mitel123 xsp xsi broadworks ...

Page 1049: ...bles Xsi Speed Dial 8 functionality FORMAT Boolean DEFAULT VALUE 0 Disabled RANGE 0 Disabled 1 Enabled EXAMPLE xsi speeddial8 enabled 1 PARAMETER xsi calllogs enabled CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Enables or disables Xsi Basic Call Log functionality FORMAT Boolean DEFAULT VALUE 0 Disabled RANGE 0 Disabled 1 Enabled EXAMPLE xsi calllogs enabled 1 PARAMETER xsi hide n...

Page 1050: ...1 PARAMETER xsi remote office CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Enables or disables Xsi Remote Office functionality FORMAT Boolean DEFAULT VALUE 0 Disabled RANGE 0 Disabled 1 Enabled EXAMPLE xsi remote office 1 PARAMETER xsi simultaneous ring personal CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Enables or disables Xsi Simultaneous Ring Personal functio...

Page 1051: ...rks anywhere locations 25 PARAMETER broadsoft branding CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Allows service providers the ability to replace BroadSoft related feature strings e g BroadSoft SCA BSFT Call Settings BroadWorks Anywhere in the UI with their own custom branding names FORMAT String in the following format full name short name platform name Note To ensure the appli...

Page 1052: ...PLE instant messaging and presence 1 PARAMETER imp user name CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Specifies the user name used for authentication of the XMPP BroadSoft UC ONE presence account FORMAT username server DEFAULT VALUE N A RANGE N A EXAMPLE imp user name johnsmith imp broadsoft com PARAMETER imp password CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTI...

Page 1053: ...ting with the XMPP UC ONE presence server FORMAT String DEFAULT VALUE N A RANGE N A EXAMPLE imp ip imp broadsoft com PARAMETER imp port CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Specifies the port used for communicating with the XMPP UC ONE presence server FORMAT Integer DEFAULT VALUE 5222 RANGE Any valid port EXAMPLE imp port 5221 ...

Page 1054: ...x from the display name of the FROM header or PAI header will be stripped before it is displayed on the phone s screen For example if the From header sent by the BroadWorks call manager SIP INVITE message is From F Filtrage Dupont Francois sip 5551234567 as aastra com user phone then the IP phone displays the calling name as Filtrage Dupont Francois since the F prefix is removed FORMAT String in q...

Page 1055: ... cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Specifies the configuration server URL where the user cfg is located when utilizing the Visitor Desk Phone VDP feature FORMAT String up to 256 characters FTP ftp server port path TFTP tftp server port path HTTP http server port path HTTPS https server port path DEFAULT VALUE N A RANGE N A EXAMPLE user config url http 100 200 50 79 vdp PARAMETER hot desk high security CONFI...

Page 1056: ...n with the user config upload parameter this parameter is utilized to help distribute the file transfers to the config ration server in a more even manner i e so that the server does not get bombarded by file transfer requests all at the same time After the initial save the user _local cfg is saved at a random time period between the values defined in the user config upload parameter and this user...

Page 1057: ...f the user _local cfg has changed Checked when the user config upload time period expires and at logout EXAMPLE user config upload control 2 PARAMETER sip moh server CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Global parameter Specifies the media server SIP address providing the audio stream for music on hold functionality If defined the phone will use the specified server to pro...

Page 1058: ...on hold functionality If defined the phone will use the specified server to provide an audio stream to any held parties on the specific line The audio stream will be offered in all cases when a remote party is placed on hold i e when placed on hold directly when placed on hold while performing a transfer or conference or when the local party switches lines FORMAT String SIP address excluding the d...

Page 1059: ...or Note The sip session timer configuration parameter must be configured to enable UAC Session Refresh feature functionality FORMAT Boolean Default Value 0 Disabled Range 0 1 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Example sip force uac session refresh 1 PARAMETER srtp loose roc CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg Description Enables or disables a Rollover Counter ROC reset in scenarios where a re INVI...

Page 1060: ...ing all the debug levels on the phone may impact performance and normal operation of the phone PARAMETER log server ip CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Specifies the IP address of the log server to which log information will be transmitted FORMAT IP address DEFAULT VALUE 0 0 0 0 RANGE N A EXAMPLE log server ip 192 168 3 2 PARAMETER log server port CONFIGURATION FILES s...

Page 1061: ...The IP Phone blogs are separated into modules which allow you to log specific information for analyzing Module Name configuration files linemgr line manager information user interface misc miscellaneous sip call control SIP stack dis display driver dstore delayed storage ept endpoint ind indicator kbd keyboard net network provis provisioning rtpt Real Time Transport snd sound prof profiler xml Ext...

Page 1062: ...les Example 2 Functions and Info 16 32 48 log module dis 48 log module net 48 log module snd 48 In the above example functions and general information are logged for the display drivers network and sound modules Example 3 log module rtpt 0 log module ind 65535 In the above example all debug levels are OFF for the Real Time Transport module All debug levels are ON for the indicator module You can s...

Page 1063: ...VALUE N A RANGE N A EXAMPLE upload system info server tftp 132 432 0 43 69 sysinfo PARAMETER upload system info manual option CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Enables and disables the ability to manually upload support information from the IP Phone UI and Mitel Web UI IP Phone UI Options Phone Status Upload System Info Mitel Web UI Status System Information Support Inf...

Page 1064: ...stem info on crash CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Enables and disables the watchdog to automatically reboot the phone and send a crash file to the pre defined server FORMAT Boolean DEFAULT VALUE 0 RANGE 0 disabled 1 enabled EXAMPLE upload system info on crash 1 ...

Page 1065: ...Appendix B CONFIGURING THE IP PHONE AT THE ASTERISK IP PBX ...

Page 1066: ...or Guide B 2 ABOUT THIS APPENDIX This appendix describes how to setup a user s phone with an extension to make and receive calls using the Asterisk as the PBX TOPICS This appendix covers the following topics TOPIC PAGE IP Phone at the Asterisk IP PBX page B 3 ...

Page 1067: ...u just enter the machines name in the host field host dynamic defaultip 192 168 1 1 default IP address that the phone is configured to The password that phone1 will use to register with this PBX secret 1234 dtmfmode rfc2833 Choices are inband rfc2833 or info mailbox 1000 Mailbox for message waiting indicator If a phone is not in a valid context you will not be able to use it In this example sip is...

Page 1068: ...ip show peers at the console This will display the extensions that are registered at the IP PBX system This completes the basic set up for the 6867i phone with 1234 extension at theAsterisk IP PBX system Refer to Asterisk documentation for set up on extended or advanced features such as voicemail and call forwarding etc NAME USERNAME HOSTMASK MASK PORT STATUS phone1 phone1 192 168 1 1 D 255 255 25...

Page 1069: ...Appendix C SAMPLE CONFIGURATION FILES ...

Page 1070: ...he 6869i and 6865i Sample 6867i and 6873i configuration files can be derived from the 6869i sample Sample 6863i configuration files can be derived from the 6865i sample TOPICS This appendix covers the following topics TOPIC PAGE Sample Configuration Files page C 3 6869i Sample Configuration File page C 3 6865i Sample Configuration File page C 10 ...

Page 1071: ...le The settings included here are examples only You should change comment the values to suit your requirements Not all possible parameters are shown refer to the admin guide for the full list of supported parameters their defaults and valid ranges The Mitel 6800 Series IP phones will download 2 configuration files from the TFTP server while restarting the startup cfg file the model cfg file and th...

Page 1072: ...Gateway DNS and TFTP Server Network Settings Notes If DHCP is enabled you do not need to set these network settings Although depending on you DHCP server configuration you may still have to set the dns address ip This value is unique to each phone on a server and should be set in the mac cfg file if setting this manually subnet mask default gateway dns1 dns2 Time Server Settings time server disabl...

Page 1073: ...uration files from Three protocols are supported TFTP FTP and HTTP download protocol TFTP valid values are TFTP FTP and HTTP TFTP server settings tftp server 192 168 0 130 alternate tftp server use alternate tftp server 1 If your DHCP server assigns a TFTP server address which you do not use you can use the alternate tftp server FTP server settings ftp server 192 168 0 131 can be IP or FQDN ftp us...

Page 1074: ...ols x matches any digit 0 9 matches 0 or more repetitions of the previous expression matches any number inside the brackets can be used with a to represent a range expression grouping either or If the dialled number doesn t match the dial plan then the call is rejected sip digit timeout 3 set the inter digit timeout in seconds Example dial plans sip dial plan x xx this is the default dial string n...

Page 1075: ...e the Admin Guide for a detailed explanation of how this works sip screen name Joe Smith the name display on the phone s screen sip user name 4256 the phone number sip display name Joseph Smith the caller name sent out when making a call sip vmail 78 the number to reach voicemail on sip auth name jsmith account used to authenticate user sip password 12345 password for authentication account sip mo...

Page 1076: ...0 102 sip line5 proxy port 5060 sip line5 registrar ip 10 50 10 102 sip line5 registrar port 5060 sip line5 registration period 60 Softkey Settings Softkeys can be set either server wide or unique to each phone Setting softkeys as line call appearances should be done in the mac cfg file since these are unique to each phone Notes There are a maximum of 44 top softkeys that can be configured on the ...

Page 1077: ... TOPSOFTKEY LINE This is line associated with the softkey For line softkeys the value must be between 3 and 24 1 2 are already hardcoded as the L1 and L2 hard key line call appearances Speed Dials topsoftkey1 type speeddial topsoftkey1 label Ext Pickup topsoftkey1 value 8 topsoftkey2 type speeddial topsoftkey2 label Call Return topsoftkey2 value 69 DND Key topsoftkey4 type dnd topsoftkey4 label DN...

Page 1078: ...he full list of supported parameters their defaults and valid ranges The Mitel 6800 Series IP phones will download 2 configuration files from the TFTP server while restarting the startup cfg file the model cfg file and the mac cfg file These three configuration files can be used to configure all of the settings of the phone with the exception of assigning a static IP address to a phone and line se...

Page 1079: ...P Server Network Settings Notes If DHCP is enabled you do not need to set these network settings Although depending on you DHCP server configuration you may still have to set the dns address ip This value is unique to each phone on a server and should be set in the mac cfg file if setting this manually subnet mask default gateway dns1 dns2 Time Server Settings time server disabled 1 Time server di...

Page 1080: ... do not use you can use the alternate tftp server FTP server settings ftp server 192 168 0 131 can be IP or FQDN ftp username mitel ftp password 6865imitel HTTP server settings for http bogus mitel com firmware http server bogus mitel com can be IP or FQDN http path firmware Dial Plan Settings Notes As you dial a number on the phone the phone will initiate a call when one of the following conditio...

Page 1081: ...n seconds Example dial plans sip dial plan x xx this is the default dial string note that is must be quoted since it contains a character sip dial plan 01 xxx 2 8 xxxx 91xxxxxxxxxx accept any 4 digit number beginning with a 0 or 1 any 5 digit number beginning with a number between 2 and 8 inclusive or a 12 digit number beginning with 91 sip dial plan terminator 1 enable sending of the symbol to to...

Page 1082: ...per line settings See the Admin Guide for a detailed explanation of how this works sip screen name Joe Smith the name display on the phone s screen sip user name 4256 the phone number sip display name Joseph Smith the caller name sent out when making a call sip vmail 78 the number to reach voicemail on sip auth name jsmith account used to authenticate user sip password 12345 password for authentic...

Page 1083: ...egistrar ip 10 50 10 102 sip line5 registrar port 5060 sip line5 registration period 60 Programmable Key Settings Programmable keys can be set either server wide or unique to each phone Setting programmable keys as line call appearances should be done in the mac cfg file since these are unique to each phone Notes There are a maximum of 8 programmable keys that can be configured on the 6865i IP pho...

Page 1084: ... the extension you want to monitor PRGKEY LINE This is line associated with the prgkey For line prgkeys the value must be between 3 and 24 1 2 are already hardcoded as the L1 and L2 hard key line call appearances Speed Dials prgkey1 type speeddial prgkey1 value 8 prgkey2 type speeddial prgkey2 value 69 DND Key prgkey3 type dnd Line appearance prgkey4 type line prgkey4 line 5 blf prgkey5 type blf p...

Page 1085: ...Appendix D SAMPLE BLF SOFTKEY SETTINGS ...

Page 1086: ...PPENDIX This appendix provides sample BLF softkey settings for both the Asterisk server and the BroadSoft BroadWorks server TOPICS This appendix covers the following topics TOPIC PAGE Sample BLF Softkey Settings page D 3 Asterisk sipXecs BLF page D 3 BroadSoft BroadWorks BLF page D 4 ...

Page 1087: ...rt on Mitel IP phones SOFTKEY CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS FORASTERISK SIPXECS BLF topsoftkey1 type blf topsoftkey1 value 9995551212 topsoftkey1 label John topsoftkey1 line 1 PROGRAMMABLE KEY CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS FOR ASTER ISK SIPXECS BLF prgkey1 type blf prgkey1 value 9995551212 prgkey1 label John prgkey1 line 1 prgkey7 type blf prgkey7 value 9995551313 prgkey7 label Jane prgkey7 line 1 ...

Page 1088: ...manager as jsmith mitel com the value of the respective BLF List key on the phone should be defined as sip 9 192 168 104 13 If an extension number is defined e g sip jsmith mitel com ext 5000 it will be used when the key is pressed to dial out to the BLF List target in scenarios where the corresponding key has not been updated with the BLF List data If the BLF List key has been updated the target ...

Page 1089: ...ROGRAMMABLE KEY CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS FOR BROADSOFT BROADWORKS BLF prgkey5 type list prgkey5 value sip 5000 192 168 104 13 5000 prgkey5 line 1 prgkey6 type list prgkey6 value sip 5001 192 168 104 13 5001 prgkey6 line 1 list uri sip 9 192 168 104 13 Note One softkey must be defined of type list for EACH monitored user So if there are two users being monitored two top softkeys must be defined of ...

Page 1090: ...Appendix E SAMPLE MULTIPLE PROXY SERVER CONFIGURATION ...

Page 1091: ...his Appendix E 2 ABOUT THIS APPENDIX This appendix provides a sample multiple proxy server configuration TOPICS This appendix covers the following topics TOPIC PAGE Multiple Proxy Server Configuration page E 3 ...

Page 1092: ...p registration period 3600 sip dial plan x line info Fill in all necessary information below carefully Populate all lines even if there is only one account line 1 sip line1 auth name sip line1 password sip line1 mode 0 sip line1 user name sip line1 display name sip line1 screen name sip line1 proxy ip sip line1 proxy port 5060 sip line1 registrar ip sip line1 registrar port 5060 sip registration p...

Page 1093: ...e3 user name sip line3 display name sip line3 screen name line 4 sip line4 auth name sip line4 password sip line4 mode 0 sip line4 user name sip line4 display name sip line4 screen name sip line4 proxy ip sip line4 proxy port 5060 sip line4 registrar ip sip line4 registrar port 5060 sip registration period 500 ...

Page 1094: ...Appendix F CERTIFICATE SUPPORT ...

Page 1095: ...ENDIX This appendix provides details on the certificates supported by the 6800 Series SIP phones for this software release TOPICS This appendix covers the following topics TOPIC PAGE Certificates Supported in This Software Release page F 3 ...

Page 1096: ...ecure Server CA 2048 sha384WithRSAEncryption Feb 11 23 59 59 2027 GMT Comodo High Assurance Secure Server CA 2048 sha1WithRSAEncryption May 30 10 48 38 2020 GMT Comodo UTN USERFirst Hardware 2048 sha1WithRSAEncryption May 30 10 48 38 2020 GMT AddTrust External CA Root 2048 sha1WithRSAEncryption May 30 10 48 38 2020 GMT CyberTrust Certificates Cybertrust SureServer Standard Validation CA 2048 sha1W...

Page 1097: ...ithRSAEncryption Jan 24 04 55 00 2024 GMT GeoTrust Mobile Device Root Privileged 2048 sha1WithRSAEncryption Jul 30 04 00 00 2023 GMT GeoTrust Mobile Device Root Unprivileged 2048 sha1WithRSAEncryption Jul 30 04 00 00 2023 GMT GeoTrust Primary Certification Authority 2048 sha1WithRSAEncryption Jul 16 23 59 59 2036 GMT GeoTrust Primary Certification Authority G3 2048 sha256WithRSAEncryption Dec 1 23...

Page 1098: ...ertification Authority 2048 sha1WithRSAEncryption Nov 16 01 54 37 2026 GMT Go Daddy Class 2 Certification Authority 2048 sha1WithRSAEncryption Jun 29 17 06 20 2034 GMT GoDaddy Class 2 Certification Authority Root Certificate G2 2048 sha256WithRSAEncryption Dec 31 23 59 59 2037 GMT Go Daddy Root Certificate Authority G2 2048 sha256WithRSAEncryption Dec 31 23 59 59 2037 GMT Go Daddy Secure Certifica...

Page 1099: ...2034 GMT GoDaddy Secure Extended Validation Code Signing CA G4 384 ecdsa with SHA384 May 1 07 00 00 2035 GMT Mitel Certificates Mitel Networks Root CA 1024 sha1WithRSAEncryption Jun 11 20 05 31 2029 GMT Symantec Certificates Symantec Class 3 Secure Server CA G4 2048 sha256WithRSAEncryption Oct 30 23 59 59 2023 GMT Symantec Class 3 Secure Server SHA256 SSL CA 2048 sha256WithRSAEncryption Apr 8 23 5...

Page 1100: ...ug 1 23 59 59 2028 GMT VeriSign Class 4 Public Primary Certification Authority G2 1024 sha1WithRSAEncryption Aug 1 23 59 59 2028 GMT VeriSign Class 1 Public Primary Certification Authority G3 2048 sha1WithRSAEncryption Jul 16 23 59 59 2036 GMT VeriSign Class 2 Public Primary Certification Authority G3 2048 sha1WithRSAEncryption Jul 16 23 59 59 2036 GMT VeriSign Class 3 Public Primary Certification...

Page 1101: ...niversal Root Certification Authority 2048 sha256WithRSAEncryption Dec 1 23 59 59 2037 GMT VeriSign Class 3 Code Signing 2009 CA 2048 sha1WithRSAEncryption Mar 31 23 59 59 2019 GMT CERTIFICATE COMMON NAME PUBLIC KEY SIZE BIT SIGNATURE ALGORITHM VALIDITY EXPIRATION ...

Page 1102: ...ity for any damages and or long distance charges which result from unauthorized and or unlawful use Mitel shall not be liable for any incidental or consequential damages including but not limited to loss damage or expense directly or indirectly arising from the customer s use of or inability to use this product either separately or in combination with other equipment This paragraph however shall n...

Page 1103: ...te is to be provided with all products returned for warranty repairs EXCLUSIONS Mitel does not warrant its products to be compatible with the equipment of any particular telephone company This warranty does not extend to damage to products resulting from improper installation or operation alteration accident neglect abuse misuse fire or natural causes such as storms or floods after the product is ...

Page 1104: ...he goods or the supply of equivalent goods or ii the repair of the goods or iii the payment of the cost of replacing the goods or of acquiring equivalent goods or iv the payment of the cost of having the goods repaired 1 2 Clause 1 1 is not intended to have the effect of excluding restricting or modifying a the application of all or any of the provisions of Part 5 4 of Schedule 2 to the Competitio...

Page 1105: ... IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY WHETHER INANACTION OF CONTRACT TORT OR OTHERWISE ARISING FROM OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE M5T SIP STACK M5T Portions of this software are 1997 2006 M5T a Division of Media5 Corporation M5T tm All intellectual property rights in such porti...

Page 1106: ...tion and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentat...

Page 1107: ...TIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION ...

Page 1108: ...y the same copyright terms except that the holder is Tim Hudson tjh cryptsoft com Copyright remains Eric Young s and as such any Copyright notices in the code are not to be removed If this package is used in a product Eric Young should be given attribution as the author of the parts of the library used This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or in documentation online or te...

Page 1109: ...AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS...

Page 1110: ...RACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OFTHE USE OFTHIS SOFTWARE EVEN IFADVISED OFTHE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE WIND RIVER SYSTEMS VXWORKS SOFTWARE The VxWorks Run Time software module is Copyright c WindRiver Systems Inc all rights reserved It is licensed for use not sold All use of this product and the VxWorks Run Time module is subject to agreeme...

Page 1111: ... OWNERSHIP OF SOFTWAREAND COPYRIGHTS Title to all copies of the Software remains with Intel or its suppliers The Software is copyrighted and protected by the laws of the United States and other countries and international treaty provisions You may not remove any copyright notices from the Software Intel may make changes to the Software or to items referenced therein at any time without notice but ...

Page 1112: ... termination you will immediately destroy the Software or return all copies of the Software to Intel APPLICABLE LAWS Claims arising under this Agreement shall be governed by the laws of California excluding its principles of conflict of laws and the United Nations Convention on Contracts for the Sale of Goods You may not export the Software in violation of applicable export laws and regulations In...

Page 1113: ......

Reviews:

No comments

Brands by name

Popular brands

Load more brands